JP7466919B2 - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to an amusement machine.

In conventional gaming machines, there are gaming machines that determine whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player based on the establishment of a starting condition.

Some of these gaming machines are designed to control the game to a specific gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state after the special game ends (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2018-057968 A

However, the problem with the gaming machines described in the above patent documents was that the gameplay was not very interesting.

The present invention was made in consideration of the above problems, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can increase the enjoyment of gaming.

In order to solve the above problem, according to the present invention, a gaming machine capable of executing a special game advantageous to a player comprises an operation means operable by a player, a first judgment means for judging judgment information acquired based on establishment of a first acquisition condition, a first variable display execution means for executing a first variable display based on a judgment result of the first judgment means, a second judgment means for judging judgment information acquired based on establishment of a second acquisition condition, a second variable display execution means for executing a second variable display based on a judgment result of the second judgment means, a state control means capable of control to a first gaming state and a second gaming state different from the first gaming state, and a performance control means capable of executing a first gaming performance corresponding to the first variable display and a second gaming performance corresponding to the second variable display, wherein the state control means is capable of ending the second gaming state when the number of occurrences of a first gaming event becomes a first number or the number of occurrences of a second gaming event different from the first gaming event becomes a second number in the second gaming state, and During the execution of the second game presentation, it is possible to execute any one of a plurality of types of vibration presentations which vibrate the operating means in a predetermined manner, and during the first game state, it is possible to execute the first game presentation of a miss in which the special game is not executed and the first game presentation of a win in which the special game is executed, and execution of the second game presentation is restricted, and during the second game state, it is possible to execute the first game presentation of a miss in which the special game is not executed and the first game presentation of a win in which the special game is executed and the second game presentation, and during the first game state, when the first variable display of a miss in which the special game is not executed is executed and the first game presentation is executed, a predetermined vibration presentation can be executed, and during the second game state, when the first variable display of a miss in which the special game is not executed is executed, but execution of the first game presentation is restricted, execution of the predetermined vibration presentation is restricted .

The present invention makes it possible to increase the enjoyment of games.

FIG. 2 is an oblique view of a portion of the front side of the gaming machine. 2 is an oblique view of the rear side of the gaming machine. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing an example of a block diagram of the entire gaming machine. FIG. 2 is a diagram illustrating an example of various storage areas of a main RAM. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a game flow of the gaming machine. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing main processing in a main control board. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an initial setting process in the main control board. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing timer interrupt processing in the main control board. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing input control processing in the main control board. A diagram showing the first starting hole detection switch input processing on the main control board. A diagram showing the second starting hole detection switch input processing on the main control board. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing gate detection switch input processing in the main control board. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing specific area detection switch input processing in the main control board. A diagram showing the special diagram special electric control processing on the main control board. A diagram showing the special pattern memory determination process in the main control board. A diagram showing the jackpot determination process on the main control board. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a big win determination table. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a special symbol determination table. A diagram showing the special chart variation pattern determination process in the main control board. A figure showing an example of a normal special chart variation pattern determination table. A figure showing an example of a special chart fluctuation pattern determination table for time reduction. A figure showing an example of a special chart pre-determination table. A diagram showing special pattern change processing on the main control board. A diagram showing the special pattern stopping processing on the main control board. A figure showing an example of a large prize opening control data judgment table. A diagram showing the jackpot game processing on the main control board. A diagram showing the small win game processing on the main control board. A diagram showing the jackpot game ending processing on the main control board. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a game status setting table. A diagram showing the game state referenced at the end of a big win game that does not involve a small win game. A diagram showing the game state referred to at the end of a big win game that goes through a small win game. A diagram showing the general-purpose power control processing on the main control board. A diagram showing normal pattern change processing on the main control board. 11 is a diagram showing an example of various determination tables used in the normal power control process; FIG. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a general map advance determination table. A diagram showing customer waiting control processing in the main control board. This is a timing chart when a time-saving game state occurs after the end of a big win game. This is a timing chart for when the remaining number of times for the time-saving special chart reaches 0 and the time-saving game state ends. This is a timing chart for when a big win game starts from a small win game and the time-saving game state ends. This is a timing chart for when the remaining number of times the time-saving normal game is played reaches 0 and the time-saving game state ends. A diagram showing the main processing of the performance control unit. A diagram showing timer interrupt processing of the performance control unit. 1 is a mode flow showing the transition of game modes. A diagram showing the command analysis process of the performance control unit. A diagram showing the icon change performance decision process of the performance control unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of an icon final display mode determination table. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating an example of a change scenario determination table. 13 is a flowchart showing the process of determining the light-emitting effect when a prize is won by the effect control unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a winning light-emitting effect pattern determination table. 13 is a flowchart showing the predictive consecutive performance decision processing of the performance control unit. A figure showing an example of a look-ahead zone performance scenario determination table. A figure showing an example of a look-ahead countdown performance scenario determination table. A diagram showing the variable performance pattern determination process in the performance control unit. A figure showing an example of a normal variable performance pattern determination table. A figure showing an example of a variable presentation pattern determination table for time reduction. A diagram showing the preview performance decision process in the performance control unit. A figure showing an example of a role prediction determination table at the start of fluctuation. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a pre-reach notice determination table. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a dialogue preview pattern determination table. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a step-up notice pattern determination table. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a pseudo consecutive performance pattern determination table. A figure showing an example of a development effect pattern determination table. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a cut-in effect pattern determination table. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a deciding effect pattern determination table. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a re-lottery effect pattern determination table. A diagram showing the third time-saving performance processing in the performance control unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a presentation when a customer waiting state occurs during normal gaming mode. A figure showing an example of a presentation when a pre-reading presentation is executed during normal game play. A figure showing an example of a presentation when the pre-reading presentation ends midway during normal game play. A figure showing an example of a presentation when a variable presentation is executed after transitioning to the first time-saving game state. A figure showing the continuation of the example of the presentation when a variable presentation is executed after transitioning to the first time-saving game state. This figure shows example 1 of the presentation after a favorable result is notified to the player through a regular chart change presentation during a time-saving game state. This figure shows example 2 of the presentation after a favorable result has been notified to the player through a regular chart change presentation during a time-saving game state. This figure shows the continuation of presentation example 2 after a favorable result has been notified to the player through a regular chart change presentation during the time-saving game mode. A figure showing an example of a presentation in which a result is displayed when the time-saving game state ends. A figure showing an example of a presentation in which the result is not displayed when the time-saving game state ends. 13A to 13C are diagrams illustrating various tables in the second embodiment. A figure showing an example of a battle mode presentation in the second embodiment. A figure showing the continuation of the example of a battle mode presentation in the second embodiment.

First Embodiment
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described with reference to the drawings.

(Configuration of gaming machine)
First, the configuration of a gaming machine 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described with reference to Figures 1 to 3. Figure 1 is a front view of the gaming machine 1, Figure 2 is a perspective view of a portion of the front side of the gaming machine 1, and Figure 3 is a perspective view of the back side of the gaming machine 1.

The gaming machine 1 is provided with an outer frame 2, a gaming board mounting frame 3 that is rotatably supported relative to the outer frame 2, a glass frame 4 that is rotatably supported relative to the gaming board mounting frame 3, and a gaming board 5 that has a gaming area 5a formed therein through which gaming balls (gaming media) flow down.

The outer frame 2 is made up of a rectangular base frame 2a with a central opening in the front-rear direction, to which a decorative plate 2b is attached at the lower front. The outer frame 2 is fixed to the island equipment of the amusement arcade via fastening members (e.g., nails, fasteners, etc.).

The game board mounting frame 3 is detachably connected to the outer frame 2 via the first hinge mechanism 6 at one horizontal end, and is supported rotatably with the first hinge mechanism 6 as a fulcrum. Therefore, when the game board mounting frame 3 is rotated like a door relative to the outer frame 2, the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 is exposed forward, making it possible to perform maintenance on various devices provided on the back side of the game board mounting frame 3.

The glass frame 4 is detachably connected to the game board mounting frame 3 via the second hinge mechanism 7 at one horizontal end, and is supported rotatably with the second hinge mechanism 7 as a fulcrum. Therefore, when the glass frame 4 is rotated like a door relative to the game board mounting frame 3, the game area 5a of the game board 5 and the front part of the game board mounting frame 3 can be opened and closed.

An opening 8 (window) that opens in the front-to-rear direction is formed in the approximate center near the top of the glass frame 4, and a transparent member 8a (such as a glass plate or acrylic plate) is attached to cover the opening 8 from the rear, making it possible to see the play area 5a through this opening 8 and transparent member 8a.

Around the opening 8 of the glass frame 4, there are provided an audio output device 9 consisting of a speaker, a frame lighting device 10 having multiple decorative LEDs, an upper tray 11 for storing multiple game balls, such as game balls paid out from a payout device 95 described below based on the establishment of the awarding conditions, a lower tray 12 for receiving and storing game balls that do not fit into the upper tray 11 and flow into the overflow ball flow path described below, and a launch operation device 13 that can be operated to launch the game balls.

The audio output devices 9 are provided at two locations spaced apart on the top of the glass frame 4, and output BGM (background music), SE (sound effects), etc. to create a sound (music, voice) effect. In addition, multiple frame lighting devices 10 are provided around the opening 8, and create a lighting effect by changing the direction of light irradiation and the color of light emitted by each lamp (LED). In addition, the frame lighting device 10 is equipped with an alarm LED 10a that is controlled to light up/blink when the glass frame 4 opens or a payout abnormality occurs in which game balls cannot be paid out from the payout device 95.

The bottom surface of the storage section 11a of the upper tray 11 for the game balls slopes downward toward the direction (right direction) of the launch operation device 13, and a ball feed solenoid 11b is provided at the end of the downward slope. When the game balls stored in the storage section 11a of the upper tray 11 flow down and reach the ball feed solenoid 11b, the ball feed solenoid 11b operates to send the game balls out one by one toward the game board mounting frame 3.

In addition, in the central front part of the upper tray 11, a performance button device 16 and a selection button device 18 (see Figure 1 or Figure 2) are arranged side by side and function as input devices for performing decision operations and selection operations related to various performances described below.

The effect button device 16 is provided with an effect button 17 capable of performing operations such as decision operations (operation input), an effect button detection switch 17a for detecting the operation of the effect button 17, an effect button drive device 17b equipped with a button drive motor for changing the effect button 17 between a normal state and a protruding state positioned higher than the normal state and a button vibration motor for changing the effect button 17 between the normal state and a vibration state in which the effect button 17 vibrates in a predetermined manner, and an effect button light-emitting LED 17c for changing the effect button 17 between an off state and a lit state in which the effect button 17 emits light in a predetermined manner, allowing the player to input predetermined information into the gaming machine 1.

The selection button device 18 is provided with a cross key 19 (upper button 191A, left button 192A, lower button 193A, right button 194A) that can be used to perform operations such as selection, and a cross key detection switch 19a (see FIG. 4) for detecting the operation of the cross key 19, allowing the player to input predetermined information into the gaming machine 1.

In addition, a lending operation unit 20 is provided on the right side of the upper tray 11, which allows the lending of game balls and the return of storage media such as cards that store the remaining balance. When the lending button 20a on the lending operation unit 20 is operated, a ball lending machine (not shown) installed next to the gaming machine 1 subtracts the remaining balance stored in the storage media and lends out game balls, and when the return button 20b on the lending operation unit 20 is operated, the storage media is returned from the ball lending machine (not shown).

Between the upper tray 11 and the lower tray 12, an overflow ball flow path (not shown) is formed to receive game balls that do not fit into the upper tray 11 and guide them to the lower tray 12. In addition, a full detection switch 32a (see FIG. 4) is provided in the middle of the overflow ball flow path to detect when the lower tray 12 is full of game balls, and while the full detection switch 32a detects that the lower tray 12 is full, the payout device 95, which will be described later, stops paying out game balls.

The launch operation device 13 is provided with a base 14 fixed to the glass frame 4, a launch handle 15 rotatably mounted on the base 14, a touch sensor 15a (see FIG. 4) that detects whether the player's hand is touching the launch handle 15, and a launch volume 15b (see FIG. 4) consisting of a variable resistor whose resistance value changes depending on the rotation angle of the launch handle 15. When the touch sensor 15a detects that the player's hand is touching the launch handle 15, the ball feed solenoid 11b is activated and the game balls are sent out one by one.

The game board mounting frame 3 is provided with a game board mounting portion for mounting the game board 5, a launching device 26 (see FIG. 4) for launching game balls toward the game area 5a, a locking mechanism (not shown) for locking the game board mounting frame 3 and the glass frame 4 in a closed state, and an opening detection switch 31a (see FIG. 4) for detecting the opening (opening/closing) of the glass frame 4.

The game board mounting section 25 is formed in a recessed chamber shape that opens to the front at approximately the center near the top of the game board mounting frame 3, and the game board 5 can be stored from the front. At the back of the recessed chamber of the game board mounting section 25, an opening that opens in the front-to-rear direction is provided, and through this opening, various devices and the like provided on the back side of the game board 5 face the rear of the gaming machine 1.

The launching device 26 is provided with a launching member for launching the game ball, a launching solenoid 28b (see FIG. 4) for driving the launching member, a launching rail that slopes upward from the launching member toward the lower left end of the game board, and a stopper that stops the game ball at the launch position, which is the lower end of the slope of the launching rail. Then, when the game ball sent out by the ball feed solenoid 11b (see FIG. 4) is received at the launch position, the game ball is launched toward the game area 5a by the operation of the launching member.

The locking mechanism 27 is provided on the right side of the game board mounting portion 25, and the front end of the cylinder in which the keyhole is formed is exposed on the front side of the glass frame 4. When a special key is inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder and rotated in one direction, the game board mounting frame 3 is unlocked and the game board mounting frame 3 can be opened and closed, and when rotated in the other direction, the glass frame 4 is unlocked and the glass frame 4 can be opened and closed.

Curved inner and outer rails 35 and 36 are provided near the outer edge of the game board 5, and the area surrounded by the inner and outer rails 35 and 36 forms a game area 5a into which game balls can flow. A launched ball guide path 38 is formed between the inner and outer rails 35 and 36, which guides game balls launched by the launching device 26 to the upstream part of the game area 5a. An outlet 39 is formed at the most downstream part of the game area 5a to guide the game balls that have flowed down outside the game area (to the collection part of the game board mounting frame 3).

A decorative frame 40 is provided in the approximate center of the play area 5a, which is a frame-shaped area known as a center case that restricts the entry of game balls into the interior. This decorative frame 40 divides the play area 5a into a left play area where game balls launched with a first launch force flow down, and a right play area where game balls launched with a second launch force that is stronger than the first launch force flow down, and the left play area and the right play area are connected below the decorative frame 40.

A warp device 41 is provided on the left side of the decorative frame 40 to guide the game balls flowing down the left side game area into the interior of the decorative frame 40, and a stage section 42 is provided on the bottom of the decorative frame 40 to roll the game balls introduced into the decorative frame 40 by the warp device 41 and cause them to flow down below the decorative frame 40.

Three general winning openings 43 through which game balls can always enter (enter) are provided at intervals at the lower left side of the decorative frame 40, and one general winning opening 43 through which game balls can always enter (enter) is provided at the lower right side of the decorative frame 40. When a game ball that has entered (entered) this general winning opening 43 is detected by the general winning opening detection switch 43a (see FIG. 4) (awarding condition is met), a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., five) are paid out from the payout device 95 (see FIG. 3) to the upper tray 11 as prize balls (awarding prize value).

Below the stage section 42 is a first start hole 45 (first special symbol start winning area) where game balls can always enter (enter), and when a game ball that has entered (entered) this first start hole 45 is detected by the first start hole detection switch 45a (see FIG. 4) (awarding conditions are met), a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., three balls) are paid out from the payout device 95 (see FIG. 3) to the upper tray 11 as prize balls (awarded prize value). In addition, the right to make a jackpot determination as to whether or not a special game (jackpot game) is to be played is granted (special symbol determination information, described later, is stored).

Directly below the first starting port 45 is a starting port lamp 75 that emits light in a predetermined manner when the lamp light-emitting effect described below is executed, and a lens member 75a (object) is provided to cover the front of the starting port lamp 75.

Below the decorative frame 40 and diagonally below and to the right of the first starting hole 45, there is a variable starting section 46 that can be changed from a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter (slot in), to an open state in which it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter, based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (a winning result in the winning judgment described below).

The variable starting section 46 has an upper surface that slopes downward in the left-right direction (left side in FIG. 1) to form a flow path for the game ball, and is provided with a second starting hole opening/closing member 48 that can move in the front-back direction, a second starting hole 47 (starting winning area of the second special pattern) that opens upward directly below the second starting hole opening/closing member 48, a second starting hole detection switch 47a (see FIG. 4) that detects a game ball that has won (entered) the second starting hole 47, and a second starting hole opening/closing solenoid 48b (see FIG. 4) that converts the second starting hole 47 to a closed state by moving the second starting hole opening/closing member 48 forward (winning restriction position) and converts the second starting hole 47 to an open state by moving the second starting hole opening/closing member 48 backward (winning permission position).

When a game ball enters the second start hole 47, which is opened during the auxiliary game described below, and this game ball is detected by the second start hole detection switch 47a (see FIG. 4) (awarding condition is met), a predetermined number of game balls (for example, two balls) are paid out from the payout device 95 (see FIG. 3) to the upper tray 11 as prize balls (awarded prize value). In addition, the right to make a jackpot determination as to whether or not to play a special game (jackpot game) is granted (special chart determination information described below is stored).

In the right-side game area, which is to the right of the decorative frame 40, there is an upstream flow path 91a into which all game balls launched toward the right-side game area flow, a central flow path 91b into which almost all game balls flowing out from the upstream flow path 91a flow, a left-side flow path 91c into which game balls that do not flow into the central flow path 91b but bounce to the left flow, a right-side flow path 91d into which game balls that do not flow into the central flow path 91b but bounce to the right flow, a first downstream flow path 91e into which almost all game balls that flow out from the central flow path 91b and the right-side flow path 91d flow, and a second downstream flow path 91f into which game balls that do not flow into the first downstream flow path 91e but bounce to the left flow and game balls that flow out from the left-side flow path 91c flow.

At the upstream end of the central flow path 91b, a normal game gate 44 (normal game start area) through which game balls can always pass is provided. When a game ball that has passed through the normal game gate 44 is detected by the gate detection switch 44a, no prize balls are awarded, but the player is given the right to make an auxiliary game judgment (win judgment) to determine whether or not to execute a winning game (normal game judgment information, described later, is stored).

A first variable winning section 49 (first variable winning device) is provided in the middle of the central flow path 91b. This can be changed from a closed state, in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to win (enter the ball), to an open state, in which it is possible or easy to win, based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (a jackpot is determined in the jackpot determination).

The first variable winning section 49 (first variable winning device) has an upper surface that slopes downward in the left-right direction (right side in the figure) to become a flow path for game balls (forming part of the bottom surface of the central flow path 91b), and is provided with a first large winning opening opening/closing member 51 that can move in the front-back direction, a first large winning opening 50 (winning area) that opens upward directly below the first large winning opening opening/closing member 51, a first large winning opening detection switch 50a that detects game balls that have won (entered) the first large winning opening 50, and a first large winning opening opening opening solenoid 51b (see Figure 4) that converts the first large winning opening 50 to a closed state by moving the first large winning opening opening/closing member 51 forward (winning restriction position) and converts the first large winning opening 50 to an open state by moving the first large winning opening opening/closing member 51 backward (winning permitted position).

Then, during the small prize game described below, when the first large prize opening opening/closing member 51 moves backward and the first large prize opening 50 is converted from a closed state to an open state, the game balls that have flowed down the top surface of the first large prize opening opening opening/closing member 51 or that have reached the first large prize opening 50 enter the first large prize opening 50, and when these game balls are detected by the first large prize opening detection switch 50a, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) are paid out from the payout device 95 (see Figure 3) to the upper tray 11 as prize balls.

In addition, downstream of the first large winning hole detection switch 50a, there is a specific area opening/closing member 52 whose upper surface slopes downward in the left-right direction (right side in the figure) to become a flow path for game balls and which can move in the front-back direction, a specific area 53 that opens upward directly below the specific area opening/closing member 52, a specific area detection switch 53a (see Figure 4) that detects game balls that have flowed into (entered) the specific area 53, a flow path switching solenoid 52b that converts the specific area 53 into a closed state by moving the specific area opening/closing member 52 forward (winning restriction position) and converts the specific area 53 into an open state by moving the specific area opening/closing member 52 backward (winning permission position), and an outlet 54 into which game balls that have not flowed into the specific area 53 flow.

When a game ball passes through (enters) the specific area 53 that is open during the small win game described below and is detected by the specific area detection switch 53a, no prize balls are awarded, but the big win game described below is executed after the small win game ends.

In addition, instead of providing the specific area opening/closing member 52, the specific area 53, and the specific area detection switch 53a, the first large prize opening detection switch 50a may be set as the specific area, and the game ball that flows into the first large prize opening that is opened during the small prize game described below may be detected by the first large prize opening detection switch 50a, so that the large prize game described below is executed after the small prize game ends.

In this embodiment, the big win game and the small win game that convert the big prize opening into an open state are treated as special games that are advantageous to the player, but there are cases where the big win game is treated as a special game and the small win game is treated as a specific game.

A second variable winning section 55 (second variable winning device) is provided in the middle of the first downstream flow path 91e. This can be changed from a closed state, in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to win (enter the ball), to an open state, in which it is possible or easy to win, based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (a jackpot is determined in the jackpot determination).

The second variable prize winning section 55 (first variable prize winning device) has an upper surface that slopes downward in the left-right direction (left side in the figure) to become a flow path for game balls (forming part of the bottom surface of the first downstream flow path 91e), and is provided with a second large prize winning opening opening/closing member 57 that can move in the front-back direction, a second large prize winning opening 56 (winning area) that opens upward directly below the second large prize winning opening opening/closing member 57, a second large prize winning opening detection switch 56a that detects game balls that have won (entered) the second large prize winning opening 56, and a second large prize winning opening opening opening solenoid 57b (see FIG. 4) that converts the second large prize winning opening 56 to a closed state by moving the second large prize winning opening opening/closing member 57 forward (winning restriction position) and converts the second large prize winning opening 56 to an open state by moving the second large prize winning opening opening/closing member 57 backward (winning permitted position).

When the second large prize opening opening/closing member 57 moves backwards during a jackpot game and the second large prize opening 56 is converted from a closed state to an open state, the game balls that have flowed down the top surface of the second large prize opening opening/closing member 57 or that have reached the second large prize opening 56 enter the second large prize opening 56, and when these game balls are detected by the second large prize opening detection switch 56a, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) are paid out from the payout device 95 (see Figure 3) to the upper tray 11 as prize balls.

The front of the right game area is covered with a decorative member 91 that allows the rear to be seen through, and on the back surface of the decorative member 91, in front of the central flow passage 91b (directly above the first large prize opening opening member 51), multiple front protrusions 91b2 protruding toward the rear are provided at intervals. Furthermore, on the back wall of the central flow passage 91b (directly above the first large prize opening opening member 51), multiple rear protrusions 91b1 are provided so as to alternate with the front protrusions 91b2, and the rear protrusions 91b1 and the front protrusions 91b2 form a meandering flow passage, which attenuates the flow speed (flow force) of the game balls in the central flow passage 91b (especially the upper surface of the first large prize opening opening member 51). Therefore, it takes one second for the game balls to flow down the upper surface of the first large prize opening opening member 51 from the upstream end to the downstream end.

Furthermore, on the back surface of the decorative member 91, in front of the first downstream flow passage 91e (directly above the second large prize opening opening member 57), multiple front protrusions 91c2 protruding toward the rear are provided at intervals. Furthermore, on the back wall of the first downstream flow passage 91e (directly above the second large prize opening opening member 57), multiple rear protrusions 91c1 are provided so as to alternate with the front protrusions 91c2, and the rear protrusions 91c1 and the front protrusions 91c2 form a serpentine flow passage, thereby attenuating the flow speed (flow force) of the game ball in the first downstream flow passage 91e (especially the upper surface of the second large prize opening opening member 57). Therefore, it takes one second for the game ball to flow down the upper surface of the second large prize opening opening member 57 from the upstream end to the downstream end.

The game balls launched into the left-hand game area will either flow directly down along the outer edge of the decorative frame 40, or flow into the warp device 41 and then flow down through the stage section 42, and will win one of the three general winning openings 43 or the first starting opening 45 located below the decorative frame 40, or will flow into the out opening 39. Therefore, they will not win (pass through) the general winning gate 44, general winning opening 43, first variable winning section 49 (first large winning opening 50), or second variable winning section 55 (second large winning opening 56) located in the right-hand game area.

In addition, a game ball launched into the right-side play area flows through the upstream flow path 91a, then down the central flow path 91b (regular gate 44), the left-side flow path 91c, the right-side flow path 91d, the first downstream flow path 91e, the second downstream flow path 91f, etc., and enters one of the general winning openings 43, the variable starting section 46 (second starting opening 47), the first variable winning section 49 (first large winning opening 50), or the second variable winning section 55 (second large winning opening 56) provided in the right-side play area, or flows into the outlet 39. Therefore, the game ball will not enter the general winning opening 43 or the first starting opening 45 provided in the left-side play area.

On the back side of the game board 5, there is an out-ball flow path that receives and collects out-balls, which are game balls that have won in the general winning port 43, the first starting port 45, the second starting port 47, the first large winning port 50, and the second large winning port 56, as well as game balls that have flowed into the outlet 39, and allows them to flow down, and an out-ball detection switch 39a (see Figure 4) is provided at the most downstream part of the out-ball flow path. Game balls detected by the out-ball detection switch 39a are discharged from the outlet on the back side of the game machine 1 to the outside of the game machine 1 (island equipment).

Outside the play area 5a, there is a pattern display device consisting of a first special pattern display 60, a second special pattern display 61, and a normal pattern display 62, a reserved display device consisting of a first special pattern reserved display 63, a second special pattern reserved display 64, and a normal pattern reserved display 65, and a main information display 69 consisting of a round number display 66, a right hit display 67, and a status confirmation display 68.

The first special symbol display 60 is a variable display for displaying (informing) the result of a jackpot determination for a first special symbol, which is made based on the entry (entry) of a game ball into the first starting hole 45, the second special symbol display 61 is a variable display for displaying (informing) the result of a jackpot determination for a second special symbol, which is made based on the entry (entry) of a game ball into the second starting hole 47, and the normal symbol display 62 is a variable display for displaying (informing) the result of a hit determination for a normal symbol, which is made based on the passage (entry) of a game ball into the normal gate 44.

The jackpot determination corresponds to obtaining special symbol determination information (random number value for jackpot determination, random number value for special symbol determination, random number value for reach determination, random number value for special symbol fluctuation pattern determination, etc.) when the game ball enters (enters) the first starting hole 45 or the second starting hole 47, and determining whether or not to execute a jackpot game or a small jackpot game based on the obtained special symbol determination information.

When a jackpot is determined based on a game ball entering the first starting hole 45, the first special symbol is displayed on the first special symbol display 60 in a varying manner, and after a predetermined time has passed, the first special symbol is displayed stationarily to notify the result of the determination. When a jackpot is determined based on a game ball entering the second starting hole 47, the second special symbol is displayed stationarily to notify the result of the determination, and after a predetermined time has passed, the second special symbol is displayed stationarily to notify the result of the determination.

The first special symbol display 60 and the second special symbol display 61 are each composed of multiple LEDs, and when each special symbol changes, the LEDs of the corresponding display blink at a predetermined interval or sequence. When a special symbol is displayed in a static state, the LEDs light up in a manner that notifies the result of the jackpot determination (jackpot, small jackpot, or miss).

In this embodiment, a "jackpot" refers to a state in which it has been determined in the jackpot determination that a jackpot game (special game) will be played. A "jackpot game" refers to a game state that is advantageous to a player who plays a round game in which the big prize openings (first big prize opening 50, second big prize opening 56) are converted from a closed state to an open state in a predetermined manner a predetermined number of times (e.g., four times, ten times, etc.) with intervals in between, and in which the player is likely to win prize balls.

In addition, the maximum number of times the large prize openings (first large prize opening 50, second large prize opening 56) can be opened and the maximum opening time for each round of play are preset, but if a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., 10 balls) enter the large prize openings (balls enter the large prize openings) even before the maximum number of times or maximum opening time are reached, one round of play ends. Note that in this embodiment, it is possible to play one of several types of large prize games (special games) that differ in the degree of advantage given to the player.

"Small win" refers to a state in which it has been determined in the big win determination that a small win game (special game) will be played. "Small win game" refers to a game state that is advantageous to players who play a game in which the big win opening (second big win opening 56) is converted from a closed state to an open state in a less favorable manner than in a big win game, making it easier for the player to win prize balls.

The maximum opening time of the large prize opening during a small prize game (1.8 seconds) is a predetermined time, but if a certain number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) enter the large prize opening before the maximum opening time is reached, the small prize game ends. Unlike a large prize game, the game status does not change just because a small prize game has been played.

The auxiliary game judgment corresponds to obtaining normal game judgment information (random number value for winning judgment, random number value for normal pattern judgment, random number value for normal pattern variation pattern judgment, etc.) based on the passage (entry) of the game ball into the normal game gate 44, and judging whether or not to execute the auxiliary game based on the obtained normal game judgment information. When the auxiliary game judgment is made, the normal pattern display 62 displays the variation of the normal pattern, and after a predetermined time has passed, a stationary display of the normal pattern is made to notify the judgment result.

The normal symbol display 62 is composed of multiple LEDs, and the LEDs flash at a predetermined interval or sequence when displaying the normal symbol in a variable manner. When displaying a normal symbol in a static manner, the LEDs light up in a manner that notifies the result of the auxiliary game judgment (win or miss).

In this embodiment, "win" refers to a state in which it has been determined in the auxiliary game judgment that an auxiliary game (a winning game) will be executed. "Auxiliary game" refers to a game state in which the second starting hole 47 is opened in a predetermined manner.

The maximum number of times the second start hole 47 can be opened and the maximum opening time during the auxiliary game (winning game) are preset, but the auxiliary game (winning game) ends when a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., 10 balls) enter the second start hole 47 even before the maximum number of times the balls can be opened and the maximum opening time are reached. In other words, the "auxiliary game" is a game state in which the conditions for starting the variable display of the second special symbol are likely to be met. In this embodiment, multiple types of auxiliary games (winning games) with different degrees of advantage to the player are provided.

The first special symbol reserved indicator 63 is composed of multiple LEDs, and is intended to display the first reserved memory (U1), which is the number of special symbol determination information (first reserved) stored when a game ball wins (enters) the first starting hole 45, and lights up or flashes in a manner indicating the number of first reserved items. Note that up to four first reserved items can be stored, but the number may be more or less than four.

The second special symbol reserved indicator 64 is composed of multiple LEDs, and is intended to display the second reserved memory (U2), which is the number of special symbol determination information (second reserved) stored when a game ball enters (enters) the second starting hole 47, and lights up or flashes in a manner indicating the number of second reserved items. Note that, although a maximum of four second reserved items can be stored, the number may be less or more than four, or no second reserved items may be stored.

The normal symbol reserve indicator 65 is composed of multiple LEDs, and is intended to display the number of reserved normal symbols, which is the number of normal symbol judgment information (reserved normal symbols) stored when a game ball enters (passes through) the normal symbol gate 44, and lights up or flashes in a manner indicating the number of reserved normal symbols. Note that up to four reserved normal symbols can be stored, but the number may be less or more than four, or no reserved normal symbols may be stored.

The first special symbol display 60 and/or the second special symbol display 61 can also be configured with a seven-segment LED. For example, if a big win is determined in the big win determination, numbers such as "3" or "7" are displayed as static numbers, if a small win is determined, alphabets such as "A" or "C" are displayed as static numbers, and if a miss is determined, a static "-" is displayed as static numbers, and during the varying display, the light is turned off and the "-" is alternately displayed.

The round number indicator 66 is composed of multiple LEDs and is intended to display the number of rounds when a jackpot state (special game) occurs. When a jackpot game starts, the LEDs start to light up in a predetermined manner indicating the number of rounds, the LEDs continue to light up during the jackpot game, and when the jackpot game ends, the LEDs are turned off. For example, if the jackpot game has four rounds, only the leftmost LED is lit, and if the jackpot game has ten rounds, all LEDs are lit.

The right-hit indicator 67 is composed of one LED, and is used to display a right-hit display that encourages the player to shoot the game ball toward the right-side game area (so-called right hit) during a jackpot state (special game) or during a time-limited game state. The LED lights up during a jackpot state (special game) and during a time-limited game state.

The status confirmation indicator 68 is composed of one LED and is intended to indicate that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode described later is set. When the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is entered, the LED starts to light up, and when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is ended, the LED goes out. In this way, the status confirmation indicator 68, which indicates that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set, is provided on the front (surface) of the gaming machine, so that it is possible to easily check whether the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set. The status confirmation indicator 68 may be installed on the front (surface) of the gaming machine 1, or may be installed in other locations.

In addition, in this embodiment, the same display mode (illuminated display) is used regardless of whether the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set, but the display may be made so that it is possible to recognize which mode is set. For example, when the setting change mode is set, the status confirmation indicator 68 may be illuminated, and when the setting confirmation mode is set, the status confirmation indicator 68 may be flashed, or vice versa.

In addition, in this embodiment, a status confirmation indicator 68 is provided as a dedicated indicator to indicate that the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode is set, but it may be used in combination with other indicators. For example, in the setting change mode and setting confirmation mode, the first special symbol indicator 60, the second special symbol indicator 61, the first special symbol reserved indicator 63, the second special symbol reserved indicator 64, the round number indicator 66, the right hit indicator 67, etc. are turned off, so one or more LEDs of these indicators may be turned on.

A first image display device 70 (main LCD) consisting of a liquid crystal display is provided at the back of the performance space 40a defined inside the decorative frame 40, a second image display device 71 (sub LCD) consisting of a liquid crystal display formed with a smaller size and display area than the first image display device 70 is provided at the bottom of the performance space 40a and in front of the first image display device 70, a movable performance device 73 for executing action performances is provided at the top of the performance space 40a, and a change notification LED 59 for reporting the changing display status of the special pattern is provided at the right part of the performance space 40a.

The first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71 display various effects according to the progress of the game. The effects include a customer waiting demo effect that is performed when the variable display of the special pattern is not being executed, a variable effect that accompanies the variable display of the performance pattern 70a that is executed while the variable display of the special pattern is being executed, and a jackpot effect that is executed during the execution of a jackpot game.

The second image display device 71 can also perform a moving effect by moving using a liquid crystal movable device (not shown) composed of a solenoid, motor, etc. while the first image display device 70 is performing a moving effect.

Specifically, the movement effect is achieved by vertical movement (rising and descending) between a standby position (lower position) located near the end of the first image display device 70 and a performance position (upper position) located near the center of the first image display device 70. Note that the movement direction of the second image display device 71 (sub-LCD) may be left-right or front-back, or the movement effect may be achieved by operating the performance button 17.

The display section (effective display area) of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display) is formed with a variable display area for displaying three performance patterns 70a (left pattern, middle pattern, right pattern) and a mode display area showing the performance mode related to the execution of the variable performance.

The performance pattern 70a is composed of patterns showing numbers from "1" to "9", for example, and starts to change in response to the start of the changing display of the special pattern executed by the first special pattern display device 60 and the second special pattern display device 61, and stops in response to the stop of the changing display of the special pattern. The performance pattern 70a may be a pattern showing the alphabet such as "A" to "F".

The performance symbols 70a are displayed stationary for a predetermined time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) in a manner that indicates the result of the jackpot determination (miss appearance, jackpot appearance, small win appearance). The jackpot appearance and small win appearance are combinations of the same performance symbols 70a, such as "777" and "555," while the miss appearance is any other appearance.

The display of the effect pattern 70a changes in a vertical scroll mode, but it may also scroll horizontally, or it may switch on the spot or rotate (spin).

In addition, during the changing display (changing performance) of the performance pattern 70a, various performance images such as background images and characters, movies, etc. are displayed on the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71 depending on the result of the jackpot determination, thereby increasing the player's anticipation for the execution of the jackpot game (special game).

In the embodiment of the present invention, the first image display device 70 displays the changing effect pattern 70a, but the changing effect pattern 70a may be displayed by either the first image display device 70 or the second image display device 71, or by both.

The first image display device 70 is provided with a first reserved icon display area 70B for displaying the number of first reserved icons corresponding to the first reserved memory (U1) in the normal game state described below, a regular reserved icon display area 70D for displaying the number of regular reserved icons corresponding to the regular reserved memory (F) in the time-saving game state described below, an icon display area 70C for displaying the icon (execution information) indicating that a variable performance (variable display of patterns) is being performed regardless of the game state, a first reserved number display area 70E for displaying the number of first reserved memories (U1) numerically regardless of the game state, a second reserved number display area 70F for displaying the number of second reserved memories (U2) numerically regardless of the game state, and a regular reserved number display area 70G for displaying the number of regular reserved memories (F) numerically regardless of the game state.

The first hold icon display area 70B is divided into a first display section 70B1 (first area), a second display section 70B2 (second area), a third display section 70B3 (third area), and a fourth display section 70B4 (fourth area) from the side closest to the icon display area 70C, and the first display section 70B1 to the fourth display section 70B4 display a number of first hold icons corresponding to the number of first hold memories (U1). Note that icons corresponding to second hold memories (U2) are not displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B.

Specifically, the first display unit 70B1 displays a first hold icon indicating the first hold memory in which the first special symbol variable display is executed first, the second display unit 70B2 displays a first hold icon indicating the first hold memory in which the first special symbol variable display is executed second, the third display unit 70B3 displays a first hold icon indicating the first hold memory in which the first special symbol variable display is executed third, and the fourth display unit 70B4 displays a first hold icon indicating the first hold memory in which the first special symbol variable display is executed fourth.

The regular map hold icon display area 70D is divided from the left into a first display section 70D1 (first area), a second display section 70D2 (second area), a third display section 70D3 (third area), and a fourth display section 70D4 (fourth area), and the first display section 70D1 to the fourth display section 70D4 display a number of regular map hold icons corresponding to the number of second hold memories (U2). Note that icons corresponding to second hold memories (U2) are not displayed in the regular map hold icon display area 70D.

Specifically, the first display unit 70D1 displays a regular pattern reserve icon indicating a regular pattern reserve memory in which the regular pattern change display is executed first, the second display unit 70D2 displays a regular pattern reserve icon indicating a regular pattern reserve memory in which the regular pattern change display is executed second, the third display unit 70D3 displays a regular pattern reserve icon indicating a regular pattern reserve memory in which the regular regular pattern change display is executed third, and the fourth display unit 70D4 displays a regular pattern reserve icon indicating a regular pattern reserve memory in which the regular pattern change display is executed fourth.

The icon display area 70C is formed directly above a pedestal image to clearly distinguish it from the first hold icon display area 70B and the regular hold icon display area 70D, and the icon is displayed as if it is sitting or floating on top of this pedestal image.

Specifically, as the display of the first special pattern (performance pattern 70a) begins to change, the first reserved icons displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B move (shift) one by one toward the icon display area 70C, and the first reserved icon displayed in the first display section 70B1 moves (shifts) to the icon display area 70C and becomes that icon, and when the display of the first special pattern (performance pattern 70a) ends, the icon disappears (is erased).

In addition, as the display of the normal pattern (performance pattern 70a) begins, the normal pattern reserve icons displayed in the normal pattern reserve icon display area 70D move (shift) one by one toward the icon display area 70C, and the normal pattern reserve icon displayed in the first display section 70D1 moves (shifts) to the icon display area 70C and becomes the icon, and when the display of the normal pattern (performance pattern 70a) ends, the icon disappears (is erased). Note that the icon may be made to disappear during the display of the normal pattern (performance pattern 70a) changes.

In this way, during the normal game state (first game state) in which the display of the first special symbol changes is more important than the display of the normal symbol changes, the display of the normal symbol reserve icon corresponding to the normal symbol reserve memory (F) is restricted, but the display of the first reserve icon corresponding to the first reserve memory (U1) is possible, and during the time-saving game state (second game state) in which the display of the normal symbol changes is more important than the display of the first special symbol changes, the display of the first reserve icon corresponding to the first reserve memory (U1) is restricted, but the display of the normal symbol reserve icon corresponding to the normal symbol reserve memory (F) is possible. Therefore, it is possible to display reserve icons according to the importance of the game state, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, regardless of whether the game is in a normal game state (first game state) or a time-saving game state (second game state), the first reserved memory (U1) is displayed numerically in the first reserved number display area 70E, the second reserved memory (U2) is displayed numerically in the second reserved number display area 70F, and the regular reserved memory (F) is displayed numerically in the regular reserved number display area 70G. This allows the various reserved memories to be checked at all times, making the game more interesting.

In addition, in the time-saving game state (time-saving presentation modes A to C), when the presentation mode is not a specified one (during the stock chance presentation described below), the reserved icon corresponding to the normal pattern or the icon in question is displayed, whereas when the presentation mode is a specified one (during the stock chance presentation described below), the reserved icon corresponding to the normal pattern or the icon in question may not be displayed, or vice versa.

The movable performance device 73 has a first movable member 73a and a second movable member 73b that can be operated, and can perform a motion performance by making the first movable member 73a and the second movable member 73b perform a predetermined motion while the variable display of the performance pattern 70a executed by the first image display device 70 is being executed. In addition, the first movable member 73a and the second movable member 73b are provided with a board lighting device 74 having multiple decorative LEDs, and can emit light in a predetermined manner while the motion performance is being executed.

Specifically, the first movable member 73a moves (rising and descending) between a standby position (first position) located toward the end (upper) of the first image display device 70 and a performance position (second position) located toward the center (lower) of the first image display device 70. The second movable member 73b moves between a standby position (first position) that covers a portion of the front of the first movable member 73a and a performance position where it retreats from the front of the first movable member 73a.

The change notification LEDs 59 are composed of full-color LEDs as part of the board lighting device 74, and include a first change notification LED 59a corresponding to the first special symbol, a second change notification LED 59b corresponding to the second special symbol, and a third change notification LED 59c corresponding to the normal symbol.

The first variation notification LED 59a starts changing color (displaying the variation of the first lamp special pattern) in response to the start of the variation display of the first special pattern, and stops changing color (displaying the variation of the first lamp special pattern) in response to the stop of the variation display of the first special pattern (going out if it's a miss, and emitting light if it's a jackpot), thereby notifying whether the first special pattern is varying or not. The second variation notification LED 59b starts changing color (displaying the variation of the second lamp special pattern) in response to the start of the variation display of the second special pattern, and stops changing color (displaying the variation of the second lamp special pattern) in response to the stop of the variation display of the second special pattern (going out if it's a miss, and emitting light if it's a jackpot), thereby notifying whether the second special pattern is varying or not. The third variation notification LED 59c starts changing color (displaying the variation of the third lamp special pattern) in response to the start of the variation display of the normal pattern, and stops changing color (displaying the variation of the third lamp special pattern) in response to the stop of the variation display of the normal pattern (turning off if it is a miss, lighting up if it is a win), thereby notifying whether or not the normal pattern is being varied.

The result of the first special pattern change display (jackpot determination) may be notified by the combination of the stopped performance pattern 70a and the first lamp special pattern, and the result of the second special pattern change display (special play range) may be notified by the combination of the stopped performance pattern 70a and the second lamp special pattern. Also, the result of the first special pattern change display (jackpot determination) may be notified only by the stopped first special pattern, and the result of the second special pattern change display (jackpot determination) may be notified only by the stopped second special pattern.

In addition, instead of displaying the first lamp special symbol, the second lamp special symbol, and the third lamp special symbol using the first change notification LED 59a, the second change notification LED 59b, and the third change notification LED 59c, three types of simple special symbols that have the same functions as the first lamp special symbol, the second lamp special symbol, and the third lamp special symbol (during the change display, O and X are displayed alternately, and if it is a loss, the X stops, and if it is a win, the O stops) may be displayed changeably on the first image display device 70 or the second image display device 71.

On the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 and the game board 5, there are a payout device 95 for paying out game balls based on the establishment of predetermined payout conditions (prize balls, ball loans), a game ball storage section 96 for storing game balls supplied from island equipment etc. and supplying them to the payout device 95, a main control device 110A incorporating a main control board 110, a payout control device 120A incorporating a payout control board 120, a performance control device 130A incorporating a performance control board 130, a power supply device 160A incorporating a power supply board 160, a game information output terminal board 90 for outputting game information to the outside of the game machine (information collection device such as a hall computer), etc.

In addition, a cover member 23 with an opening and closing door is provided, which opens and closes in the left and right direction on one side around a rotation axis set on the left or right side to cover the upper part of the main control device and the entire performance control device from the rear, and the performance control device 130A is provided with a changeover switch 22, covered by the cover member 23, for switching adjustment modes related to adjusting the volume of the performance sound output from the audio output device 9 and the light intensity of the image display device and various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 74).

On the front side of the main control board 110, there are mounted a main control unit 110m consisting of a one-chip microcomputer for controlling the game, an RWM clear switch 111a for inputting a signal to clear the memory contents of the main RAM 110c of the main control unit 110m or to update a setting value which is the stage of the advantageous degree of the game (the probability of being judged as a jackpot in the jackpot judgment), a setting key switch 112a for inputting a signal to switch to a setting change mode or a setting confirmation mode which will be described later by operating the setting key, an information display 113 for displaying performance information and setting values which enable the actual performance of the gaming machine to be grasped, and other electronic components.

The information display 113 is composed of four seven-segment displays (113a to 113d) aligned horizontally. The two seven-segment displays from the left, 113a and 113b, form an identification segment for displaying identification information indicating the type of performance information (data type), and the two seven-segment displays from the right, 113c and 113d, form a numeric segment for displaying numeric information indicating setting values and numerical values of the performance information (see FIG. 41).

(Overall block diagram of the gaming machine)
Next, a control means for controlling the progress of a game will be described with reference to the overall block diagram of the gaming machine 1 in Fig. 4. Fig. 4 is an overall block diagram of the gaming machine 1.

The control configuration of this embodiment includes a main control board 110 that controls the overall progress of the game (basic operations), a payout control board 120 that controls the payout of game balls based on the receipt of a payout control command from the main control board 110, a presentation control board 130 that controls the presentation related to the game based on the receipt of a presentation control command from the main control board 110, and a power supply board 160 that supplies power to the main control board 110, the payout control board 120, and the presentation control board 130.

The communication between the main control board 110 and the payout control board 120 is configured to enable bidirectional transmission and reception of commands, while the communication between the main control board 110 and the performance control board 130 is configured to enable unidirectional transmission of commands from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130.

The main control board 110 is equipped with a main CPU 110a that performs calculation processing, a main ROM 110b that stores game control programs, etc., a main RAM 110c that serves as a work area during calculation processing, and a main control unit 110m that is a one-chip microcomputer equipped with input/output ports, etc.

The input/output ports of the main control unit 110m include an out ball detection switch 39a, a general winning hole detection switch 43a, a gate detection switch 44a, a first starting hole detection switch 45a, a second starting hole detection switch 47a, a second starting hole opening/closing solenoid 48b, a first large winning hole detection switch 50a, a first large winning hole opening/closing solenoid 51b, a flow path switching solenoid 52b, a specific area detection switch 53a, a second large winning hole detection switch 56a, a second large winning hole opening/closing solenoid 57b, a magnetic detection The output sensor 57a, radio wave detection sensor 58a, first special symbol display 60, second special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, first special symbol reserved display 63, second special symbol reserved display 64, normal symbol reserved display 65, round number display 66, right hit display 67, status confirmation display 68, game information output terminal board 90, RWM clear switch 111a, setting key switch 112a, information display 113, payout control board 120, and performance control board 130 are connected.

The main CPU 110a receives an operating clock from a crystal oscillator, reads out the game control program stored in the main ROM 110b, and performs calculation processing related to the game while using the main RAM 110c as a work area. This allows it to perform control processing in response to detection signals from various input devices (detection switches, detection sensors, etc.), control processing for controlling various output devices (solenoids, displays, etc.), control processing for sending and receiving various control commands, and control processing for sending game information to the outside of the gaming machine (hall computer, etc.) via the game information output terminal board 90.

The "game information" includes a start hole entry signal output each time a game ball enters the first start hole 45 or the second start hole 47, a pattern determination signal output each time the varying display of the first special pattern or the second special pattern is stopped, a jackpot signal output throughout the jackpot game, an open signal output throughout the round game (opening of the jackpot entry hole), a time-saving state signal output throughout the time-saving game state described below, and a security signal output when a situation occurs that is problematic (threatening) in terms of the security of the gaming machine 1 (RWM clear, error, etc.).

The pattern confirmation signal is not output when the variable display of the normal pattern is stopped, but it may be configured not to output the pattern confirmation signal when the variable display of the normal pattern is stopped during the normal game state, and to output the pattern confirmation signal when the variable display of the normal pattern is stopped during the time-saving game state.

The start gate winning signal is transmitted when the game ball wins the first start gate 45 or the second start gate 47, but is not output when the game ball wins the normal gate 44.

The payout control board 120 includes a payout control unit 121 that drives the payout device 95 to control the payout of game balls, and a launch control unit 122 that drives the launch device 26 to control the launch of game balls.

The payout control unit 121 includes a payout CPU 121a that performs calculation processing, a payout ROM 121b that stores payout programs, a payout RAM 121c that serves as a work area during calculation processing, and input/output ports.

The input/output port of the payout control unit 121 is connected to an open detection switch 31a, a full detection switch 32a, a payout ball detection switch 95a for detecting game balls being paid out from the payout device 95, a payout motor 95b for paying out game balls from the payout device 95, and a ball presence detection switch 96a for detecting that game balls are stored in the game ball storage unit 96.

The payout CPU 121a receives an operating clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the payout control program stored in the payout ROM 121b, and performs calculation processing related to the payout of game balls while using the payout RAM 121c as a work area. This allows it to perform control processing for paying out game balls from the payout device 95 in response to a payout control command from the main control board 110, control processing for sending a command based on the result of the calculation processing to the main control board 110, etc.

The launch control unit 122 includes a control circuit and an input/output port, which are not shown.
The input/output ports of the launch control unit 122 are connected to the ball feeding solenoid 11b, the touch sensor 15a, the launch volume 15b, and the launch solenoid 28b.

When the launch control unit 122 detects that the player's hand is touching the launch handle 15 by a touch signal input from the touch sensor 15a, it allows current to flow to the ball feed solenoid 11b and the launch solenoid 28b, and when it detects a change in the rotation angle of the launch handle 15 by a detection signal from the launch volume 15b, it drives the ball feed solenoid 11b and drives the launch solenoid 28b so that the launch strength corresponds to the rotation angle of the launch handle 15, thereby launching the game balls (99.9 balls/min).

The performance control board 130 is equipped with a performance control unit 130m that performs overall control of the progress of the performance based on the performance control commands received from the main control board 110, a display control unit 140 that performs control processing of image display and audio output based on the performance control commands received from the performance control unit 130m, and a lamp control unit 150 that performs control processing of various light-emitting components (LEDs, etc.) and various driving sources (motors, etc.) based on the performance control commands received from the performance control unit 130m.

The performance control unit 130m includes a sub-CPU 130a that performs calculation processing, a sub-ROM 130b that stores the performance control program, a sub-RAM 130c that serves as a work area during calculation processing, and input/output ports.

The performance button detection switch 17a and the cross key detection switch 19a are connected to the input/output port of the performance control unit 130m.

The sub-CPU 130a receives an operating clock from a crystal oscillator, reads out the performance control program stored in the sub-ROM 130b, and performs calculation processing related to the performance while using the sub-RAM 130c as a work area. This allows it to perform control processing for determining the performance mode of the variable performance, control processing for sending a performance control command based on the determination result to the display control unit 140, control processing in response to detection signals from various input devices (detection switches, etc.), control processing for controlling various output devices (lighting devices, motors, etc.), etc.

The display control unit 140 receives commands from the performance control unit 130m and controls the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71 to display a specified image, and controls the audio output device 9 to output a specified voice or sound.

The display control unit 140 includes a general control unit 141 that performs general control of image display and audio output based on reception of a performance control command from the performance control unit 130m, an image control unit 145 (VDP) that controls the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71 based on reception of a display control command (display list) from the general control unit 141, a CGROM 146 in which image data and the like are stored, an audio control unit 148 (audio LSI) that controls the audio output device 9 based on reception of an audio control command from the general control unit 141, and an audio ROM 149 in which audio data and the like are stored.

The overall control unit 141 includes an overall CPU 141a that performs calculation processing, an overall ROM 141b in which an overall control program is stored, an overall RAM 141c that serves as a work area during calculation processing, and input/output ports to which an image control unit 145 (VDP) and an audio control unit 148 (audio LSI) are connected.

The general CPU 141a receives an operating clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the general control program stored in the general ROM 141b, and performs calculation processing related to the performance while using the general RAM 141c as a work area. This allows it to perform control processing for generating display control commands (display lists) that indicate the performance images to be displayed on the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71 and sending them to the display control unit 140, and control processing for generating audio control commands that indicate the performance sounds to be output from the audio output device 9 and sending them to the audio control unit 148 (audio LSI).

The lamp control unit 150 includes a lamp CPU 150a that performs calculation processing, a lamp ROM 150b that stores the lamp control program, a lamp RAM 150c that serves as a work area during calculation processing, and input/output ports.

The input/output ports of the lamp control unit 150 are connected to the frame lighting device 10, the performance button drive device 17b (performance button drive motor, performance button vibration motor), the performance button light-emitting LED 17c, the starter lamp 75, the movable performance device 73, and the board lighting device 74.

The lamp CPU 150a receives an operating clock from a crystal oscillator, reads out the lamp control program stored in the lamp ROM 150b, and performs calculation processing related to the performance while using the lamp RAM 150c as a work area. This allows it to control the frame lighting device 10, the performance button drive device 17b, the performance button light-emitting LED 17c, the starter lamp 75, the movable performance device 73, and the board lighting device 74.

The power supply board 160 generates the main power supply (operating power supply) required for the operation of the gaming machine from a power supply supplied from outside the gaming machine, and supplies the main power supply to the gaming machine 1 (main control board 110, payout control board 120, performance control board 130, and various electronic components) (corresponding to a power supply supply means). The power supply board 160 is equipped with a power interruption detection circuit 162 that detects whether the supplied power supply voltage has dropped (a power outage has occurred) and outputs a voltage drop signal to the main control board 110 based on the drop in power supply voltage (occurrence of a power outage), and a backup power supply circuit 163 that supplies backup power to the main control board 110 in the event of a power interruption (power outage).

The power supply board 160 also has a power switch that can be operated by an arcade staff member to switch between an ON state that supplies main power to the gaming machine 1 (main control board 110, payout control board 120, presentation control board 130, and various electronic components) and an OFF state that stops the supply. When the power switch is turned ON, the supply of main power begins and the gaming machine 1 starts operating. Note that the supply of backup power to the main control board 110 is maintained even when the power switch is turned OFF.

The power interruption detection circuit 162 monitors the power supply voltage supplied to the gaming machine 1, and outputs a voltage drop detection signal to the main control board 110 when the power supply voltage falls below a predetermined value, and stops outputting the voltage drop detection signal when the power supply voltage exceeds the predetermined value while the voltage drop detection signal is being output.

The backup power circuit 163 is equipped with a capacitor that stores electricity when the gaming machine is energized, and in the event of a power outage (blackout), the backup power supply voltage stored in the capacitor is supplied to the main RAM 110c of the main control board 110. This allows the contents stored in the main RAM 110c to be retained even in the event of a power outage (blackout), and after recovery from the power outage (blackout), the game control state can be restored to the state before the power outage (blackout).

Although backup power is not supplied to the payout control board 120 and the performance control unit 130m, backup power may be supplied to the payout control board 120 and the performance control unit 130m so that the memory contents of the payout RAM 121c and the sub-RAM 130c are retained even in the event of a power outage. Backup power may also be supplied to only one of the payout control board 120 and the performance control unit 130m.

(Explanation of game state)
Next, the game state when the game progresses will be described. In this embodiment, there are a "normal game state (non-time-saving game state)" and a "time-saving game state" as states related to the ease of a game ball entering the second starting hole 47.

The initial game state of the gaming machine 1 is set to the "normal game state." Also, during a jackpot game, the game state is set to the "normal game state," but since a jackpot game is being played, the game state is different from the normal game state.

Here, "normal game state (non-time-saving game state)" refers to a game state in which the probability of a win being determined in the auxiliary game judgment, which is performed on the condition that the game ball has passed through the normal symbol gate 44, is 1/20, the average time for the normal symbol fluctuation display is set to approximately 5 seconds, and in the event of a win, the second starting hole 47 opens in a short opening pattern (0.07 seconds, which does not actually result in a win).

In contrast, the "time-saving game state" refers to a game state in which the probability of a win being determined is 1/20, the average time for the variable display of normal symbols is set to a shorter time (approximately 1.5 seconds) than in the normal game state, and when a win is determined, the second starting hole 47 opens in a short opening pattern (a 0.07-second opening that does not actually result in a win) or a long opening pattern (opening twice for 3 seconds that makes it easier to win), or only in the long opening pattern, which is advantageous to players who find it easier to get the game ball to enter the second starting hole 47 compared to the normal game state.

Therefore, in the normal game state, a game method in which the game ball is fired toward the left area of the game area 5a to make the game ball enter the first starting gate 45 is advantageous to the player, and in the time-saving game state, a game method in which the game ball is fired toward the right area of the game area 5a to make the game ball enter the normal gate 44 and the second starting gate 47 is advantageous to the player.

The "time-saving game state" includes a first time-saving game state and a second time-saving game state that are controlled after the end of a jackpot game (via a jackpot game), which will be described later, and a third time-saving game state that is controlled (without going through a jackpot game) when the number of consecutive miss variable displays of the special symbol that are executed after a predetermined condition is met (executing an RWM clear, clearing the number of variations based on the end of a jackpot game to 0) reaches a specified number (750 times in this embodiment).

The "time-saving game state" is set to be more favorable than the "normal game state" in terms of the average change time of the normal symbols and the probability of opening in the long opening pattern of the second starting hole 47, but it may be set to be more favorable in terms of only one of the probability of being determined as a win, the average change time of the normal symbols, and the probability of opening in the long opening pattern.

(Various storage areas in the main RAM)
5 is a diagram showing various storage areas set in the main RAM 110c. Specifically, FIG. 5(a) is a diagram showing a special chart judgment information storage area in which special chart judgment information acquired when a game ball enters the first starting hole 45 and/or the second starting hole 47 is stored, FIG. 5(b) is a diagram showing the configuration of each storage unit of the special chart judgment information storage area, FIG. 5(c) is a normal chart judgment information storage area in which normal chart judgment information acquired when a game ball passes through the normal chart gate 44 is stored, and FIG. 5(d) is a diagram showing the configuration of each storage unit of the normal chart judgment information storage area.

As shown in FIG. 5(a), the special chart determination information storage area is divided into a first special chart determination information reserve memory area in which special chart determination information obtained based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 45 is stored, a second special chart determination information reserve memory area in which special chart determination information obtained based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 47 is stored, and a special chart determination information storage area in which special chart determination information during variable display is stored, and the first special chart determination information reserve memory area and the second special chart determination information reserve memory area are each divided into a first memory section to a fourth memory section.

The number of pieces of special pattern determination information (reserved information) for the first special pattern stored in the first memory section to the fourth memory section of the first special pattern determination information reserved memory area becomes the number of first reserved memories (U1), and the number of first reserved icons corresponding to the special pattern determination information for these first special patterns is displayed in the first display section 70B1 to the fourth display section 70B4 of the first reserved icon display area 70B, respectively.

In addition, the number of special pattern determination information (reserved information) for the second special pattern stored in the first memory section to the fourth memory section of the second special pattern determination information reserved memory area is the number of second reserved memories (U2), but the number of reserved icons corresponding to the special pattern determination information for these second special patterns is not displayed.

The 0th memory section, which is the special symbol determination information execution memory area, corresponds to the icon display area 70C in the normal game state, and the icon corresponding to the special symbol determination information of the first special symbol stored in the 0th memory section is displayed in the icon display area 70C.

As shown in FIG. 5(b), each memory unit is divided into a random number memory area for determining a jackpot for storing random numbers for determining a jackpot, a random number memory area for determining a special symbol for storing random numbers for determining a special symbol, a random number memory area for determining a reach for a chance for storing random numbers for determining a reach for a chance ...

When a game ball enters the first starting hole 45 and special pattern determination information is acquired, the acquired special pattern determination information is stored in the smallest-numbered memory section in the first special pattern determination information reserve memory area in which special pattern determination information is not stored. When a game ball enters the second starting hole 47 and special pattern determination information is acquired, the acquired special pattern determination information is stored in the smallest-numbered memory section in the second special pattern determination information reserve memory area in which special pattern determination information is not stored.

When the start condition for the variable display of the first special pattern is satisfied, the special pattern determination information stored in the first memory unit of the first special pattern determination information reserve memory area is shifted to the 0th memory unit, which is the special pattern determination information execution memory area, and is referenced to execute the variable display of the first special pattern. Also, when the start condition for the variable display of the second special pattern is satisfied, the special pattern determination information stored in the first memory unit of the second special pattern determination information reserve memory area is shifted to be referenced to execute the variable display of the second special pattern.

As shown in FIG. 5(c), the normal map judgment information storage area is divided into a normal map judgment information reserve memory area in which normal map judgment information acquired based on the passage of the game ball through the normal map gate 44 is stored, and a normal map judgment information execution memory area in which normal map judgment information during execution of the variable display is stored, and the normal map judgment information reserve memory area is divided into a first memory section to a fourth memory section, respectively.

The number of pieces of ordinary map judgment information stored in the first to fourth memory units of the ordinary map judgment information reservation memory area becomes the number of ordinary map reservation memories (F), and the number of ordinary map reservation icons corresponding to these ordinary map judgment information are displayed in the first display unit 70D1 to the fourth display unit 70D4 of the ordinary map reservation icon display area 70D, respectively.

In addition, the 0th memory unit, which is the ordinary map judgment information execution memory area, corresponds to the icon display area 70C in the time-saving game state, and the icon corresponding to the ordinary map judgment information stored in the 0th memory unit is displayed in the icon display area 70C.

As shown in FIG. 5(d), each memory unit is divided into a random number memory area for hit determination for storing random number values for hit determination, a random number memory area for normal pattern determination for storing random number values for normal pattern determination, and a random number memory area for normal pattern variation pattern determination for storing random number values for normal pattern variation pattern determination.

When the game ball passes through the normal map gate 44 and normal map judgment information is acquired, the acquired normal map judgment information is stored in the smallest-numbered memory section in the normal map judgment information reserve memory area in which no normal map judgment information is stored.

When the conditions for starting the display of changes in the normal pattern are met, the 0th memory unit, which is the normal pattern determination information execution memory area, shifts the normal pattern determination information stored in the 1st memory unit of the normal pattern determination information reserve memory area, and the information is referenced to execute the display of changes in the normal pattern.

(Game flow of gaming machine)
The game flow of the gaming machine will be described with reference to FIG.

In the normal game state, when the first jackpot game of 5 rounds (5R) executed as a result of the variable display of the first special symbol (abbreviated as Special 1 in the diagram) ends, the game transitions to the normal game state, when the second jackpot game of 5 rounds (5R) executed as a result of the variable display of the first special symbol (Special 1) ends, the game transitions to the first time-saving game state, and when the third jackpot game of 5 rounds (10R) executed as a result of the variable display of the first special symbol (Special 1) ends, the game transitions to the second time-saving game state.

In addition, in the normal game state, when the third jackpot game of 10 rounds (10R) executed as a result of the variable display of the second special symbol (abbreviated as Special 2 in the figure) ends, the game transitions to the second time-saving game state, when the small jackpot game executed as a result of the variable display of the second special symbol (Special 2) ends without the game ball passing through the specific area 53, the game transitions to the normal game state, and when the fourth jackpot game of 6 rounds (6R: effectively 5 rounds) executed as a result of the game ball passing through the specific area 53 during the small jackpot game ends, the game transitions to the second time-saving game state.

In addition, after clearing the RWM or ending a jackpot game, regardless of whether or not the time-saving game state has been entered, if the variable display of a losing special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times in succession (the total number of executions of the losing variable display of the first special symbol and the losing variable display of the second special symbol is 750 times), not including the number of times the variable display of the normal symbol has been executed, the game will transition to the third time-saving game state.

In the time-saving game state, when the first jackpot game of 5 rounds (5R) executed as a result of the variable display of the first special symbol (Special 1) ends, the game state transitions to the normal game state, when the second jackpot game of 5 rounds (5R) executed as a result of the variable display of the first special symbol (Special 1) ends, the game state transitions to the first time-saving game state, and when the third jackpot game of 10 rounds (10R) executed as a result of the variable display of the first special symbol ends, the game state transitions to the second time-saving game state.

In addition, in the time-saving game state, when the third jackpot game of 10 rounds (10R), which is executed as a result of the variable display of the second special symbol (Special 2), ends, the game transitions to the second time-saving game state, and when the small jackpot game, which is executed as a result of the variable display of the second special symbol (Special 2), ends without the game ball passing through the specific area 53, the original time-saving game state is maintained, and when the fourth jackpot game of 6 rounds (6R: effectively 5 rounds), which is executed as a result of the game ball passing through the specific area 53 during the small jackpot game, ends, the game transitions to the second time-saving game state.

In addition, the game will transition to the normal game mode when the remaining number of times that the normal symbol variable display can be executed in the time-saving game mode (normal symbol variable number) becomes "0", meaning that the number of times that the normal symbol variable display has been executed becomes a specified number of times (either 50, 100, or 999 times), or when the remaining number of times that the special symbol variable display can be executed in the time-saving game mode (special symbol variable number) becomes "0" regardless of whether a small win game has been executed, meaning that the total number of times that the first special symbol variable display and the second special symbol variable display have been executed becomes a specified number of times (5 or 10 times).

The degree of advantage in each game state is normal game state < first time-saving game state < second time-saving game state < third time-saving game state.

It should be noted that, regardless of the game state, if the first jackpot game is executed, the game state transitions to the normal game state. However, if the first jackpot game is executed during the normal game state, the game state transitions to the normal game state, whereas if the first jackpot game is executed during the time-saving game state, the game state transitions to the first time-saving game state.

Also, although there is no type of small win game, types may be provided for the small win game, and when the game ball passes through the specific area 53 during the first small win game, a fourth big win game of 5 rounds (5R) is executed, and the game state transitions to the second time-saving game state after the fourth big win game ends, and when the game ball passes through the specific area 53 during the second small win game, a fifth big win game of 10 rounds (10R) is executed, and the game state transitions to the third time-saving game state after the fifth big win game ends. In this case, the first small win game may be executed more easily than the second small win game, or vice versa.

(flowchart)
Next, the progress of the game on the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to a flowchart.

(Main processing of the main control board)
The main processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to Fig. 7. Fig. 7 is a flowchart showing the main processing in the main control board 110. This main processing is performed when a system reset, which occurs when a power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board 160, is input to the main CPU 110a.

First, the main CPU 110a performs an initial setting process in step S10. Specifically, the initial setting process includes a preparation process for starting game control, a setting change process for changing the setting value based on a setting change operation, an RWM clear process for initializing a predetermined RWM area of the main RAM 110c based on an RWM clear operation, a setting confirmation process for confirming the setting value based on a setting confirmation operation, and a drive source initial operation process for initializing the various drive sources (second start opening opening solenoid 48b, first large prize opening opening opening solenoid 51b, flow path switching solenoid 52b, second large prize opening opening opening solenoid 57b) provided in the board unit 500. Details of the initial setting process will be described later.

In step S50, the main CPU 110a updates the random number value for determining the special symbol and the random number value for determining the reach, and in step S51, updates the initial random number value for determining the jackpot, the initial random number value for determining the special symbol, the initial random number value for determining the hit, and the initial random number value for determining the normal symbol.

In step S52, the main CPU 110a determines whether a voltage drop detection signal indicating a voltage drop in the power supply (for example, a voltage drop from 24 volts to less than 18 volts) has been input from the power interruption detection circuit 162 of the power supply board 160. If a voltage drop detection signal has not been input, the process proceeds to step S50, and if a voltage drop detection signal has been input, the process proceeds to step S53.

In step S53, the main CPU 110a determines whether the voltage drop detection signal has been continuously input for a predetermined period (e.g., 10 milliseconds). If the voltage drop detection signal has been continuously input for the predetermined period, it is assumed that a complete power outage has occurred and the process proceeds to step S54. If the voltage drop detection signal has not been input for the predetermined period, it is assumed that a momentary power outage has occurred, in which the voltage of the power supply drops for just a moment, and the process proceeds to step S52.

In step S54, the main CPU 110a sets an interrupt prohibition to prohibit timer interrupts, and in step S55, sends a power cutoff designation command to the payout control board 120 to notify it that the power cutoff process has begun. As a result, the payout control board 120, which has received the power cutoff designation command, sends a remaining payout number designation command indicating the remaining number of game balls stored in the payout RAM 121c to be paid out.

In step S56, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a remaining payout number designation command has been received. If a remaining payout number designation command has not been received, the process proceeds to step S57. If a remaining payout number designation command has been received, the process proceeds to step S58.

In step S57, the main CPU 110a determines whether the waiting time for receiving the remaining payout number designation command has elapsed. If the waiting time has not elapsed, the process proceeds to step S56. If the waiting time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S58, assuming that normal communication with the payout control board 120 is not possible.

In step S58, the main CPU 110a saves the payout number in the payout counter set in the main RAM 110c. Specifically, if a remaining payout number designation command has been received, the remaining payout number specified by the remaining payout number designation command is saved, and if a remaining payout number designation command has not been received, "0" is saved as the remaining payout number. The remaining payout number saved here is referenced in the timer interrupt payout control process described below, and after the power is restored, a payout number designation command corresponding to the remaining payout number is sent to the payout control board 120.

In step S59, the main CPU 110a clears the output port. This initializes the output state of the output port and stops the operation of various displays and various drive sources (motors, solenoids).

In step S60, the main CPU 110a calculates the checksum (abnormality determination data) of the main RAM 110c and saves it in a specified area of the main RAM 110c. In this way, the next time the power is turned on, it becomes possible to perform an abnormality determination of the data in the main RAM 110c using the checksum.

In step S61, the main CPU 110a saves a backup flag indicating that the data in the main RAM 110c has been backed up (power has been restored) in the main RAM 110c, and in step S62, prohibits RWM access and waits until the power supply is completely cut off.

In this way, when the supply of the operating power (18 volts or more) required for the operation of the gaming machine 1 begins, the initial setting process is performed, but when the supply of operating power resumes following a momentary power outage (voltage drop to less than 18 volts), the initial setting process is not performed. In other words, even if a setting change operation, setting confirmation operation, or RWM clear operation is being performed due to some factor when a momentary power outage occurs, the setting change process, setting confirmation process, and RWM clear process will not be executed, so the gaming machine will not perform unintended operations, and it is possible to ensure the reliability of the gaming machine.

(Initial setting process of main control board)
The initial setting process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to Fig. 8. Fig. 8 is a flow chart showing the initial setting process of the main control board 110.

First, the main CPU 110a prohibits all interrupts in step S11, performs initial CPU settings such as setting built-in registers in step S12, and performs processing to wait for the startup of other control boards in step S13. Specifically, it waits for one second for the payout control board 120 and performance control board 130 to start up so that no commands from the main control board 110 are missed.

In step S14, the main CPU 110a permits access to the RWM area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S15, sends a launch permission command to the payout control board 120. This causes the payout control unit 121 to carry out processing to permit the launch device 26 to launch game balls.

In step S16, the main CPU 110a determines whether a backup flag indicating that power has been restored has been saved in the main RAM 110c. If the backup flag has been saved, the process proceeds to step S17 assuming that power has been restored. If the backup flag has not been saved, the process proceeds to step S18 assuming that power has been turned on for the first time or that power has been restored irregularly (power has been restored after a power outage during execution of steps S18 to S35).

In step S17, the main CPU 110a calculates the checksum (abnormality determination data) of the main RAM 110c and clears the backup flag saved in the main RAM 110c.

In step S18, the main CPU 110a determines whether a setting change operation has been performed. Specifically, it determines whether the setting key switch 112a and the RWM clear switch 111a are ON. If a setting change operation has been performed, the process proceeds to step S19 to transition to setting change mode, and if a setting change operation has not been performed, the process proceeds to step S20.

The main CPU 110a performs a setting change process in step S19. Specifically, the main CPU 110a changes (updates) the setting value, which is the stage of the advantageous degree of the game (the probability of being determined as a jackpot in the jackpot determination), based on the operation of the RWM clear switch 111a, and performs a process to confirm the setting value by operating the setting key switch 112a. When this process is completed, the process proceeds to step S24.

In step S20, the main CPU 110a determines whether the checksum is normal. Specifically, it determines whether the checksum saved in the main RAM 110c matches the checksum calculated in step S17. If the checksum is normal (there is no abnormality in the data in the RWM area), the process proceeds to step S21; if the checksum is not normal (there is an abnormality in the data in the RWM area), the process proceeds to step S22.

If the backup flag has not been saved, it is assumed that this is the first time the power has been turned on or that the power has been restored irregularly as described above, and the checksum is determined to be abnormal, and processing proceeds to step S22.

In step S21, the main CPU 110a determines whether the setting value in the setting value area is within the appropriate range (here, 1 to 4). If it is determined that the setting value in the setting value area is within the appropriate range, the process proceeds to step S23, and if it is determined that the setting value in the setting value area is not within the appropriate range, the process proceeds to step S22.

In step S22, the main CPU 110a performs irrecoverable error processing. Specifically, it displays error information "E" indicating an irrecoverable error on the information display 113, sends an irrecoverable error designation command to the performance control board 130 indicating that an irrecoverable error has occurred, then sets interrupt prohibition to prohibit timer interruption, clears the output port, and then outputs an irrecoverable error signal (security signal) indicating the occurrence of an irrecoverable error from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90, and performs processing to wait until the power supply is completely cut off. As a result, the performance control board 130 performs processing to execute an irrecoverable error notification indicating that an irrecoverable error has occurred.

An "irrecoverable error" is an error state in which game control is no longer performed (there is no transition to game control), and it cannot be released unless a setting change process is performed. Therefore, when an irrecoverable error occurs, the error will not be released even if the power switch on the power supply board 160 is turned OFF and then turned ON without a setting change operation; it is necessary to turn the power switch ON while performing a setting change operation. Note that during an irrecoverable error, the presence or absence of signal input from the various input devices (various switches, various sensors) is not monitored at all.

"Irrecoverable error notification" refers to displaying an irrecoverable error screen ("This is an irrecoverable error. Please change the settings.") on the image display device to make the user aware that an irrecoverable error has occurred, or turning on all of the frame lighting devices 10 and board lighting devices 74 in a specified light color (e.g. red) until the power is turned off, or outputting an irrecoverable error sound ("This is an irrecoverable error" + buzzer sound) from the audio output device 9 indicating that an irrecoverable error has occurred until the power is turned off.

In step S23, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not an RWM clear operation has been performed. Specifically, it determines whether or not the RWM clear switch 111a is in the ON state. If an RWM clear operation has been performed, the process proceeds to step S24 to perform RWM clearing, and if an RWM clear operation has not been performed, the process proceeds to step S27.

The main CPU 110a performs an RWM clear process in step S24. Specifically, the main CPU 110a performs a process to initialize the game control state (initialize everything other than the setting value area of the main RAM 110c) based on the operation of the RWM clear switch 111a.

In step S25, the main CPU 110a performs a drive source initial operation process. Specifically, the main CPU 110a performs a process for initializing the various drive sources (second start opening/closing solenoid 48b, first large prize opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, flow path switching solenoid 52b, second large prize opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) that are provided in the board unit 500 and that are operated by the main control board 110 as the game progresses, for a predetermined period of time. The initial operation of the various drive sources will be described in detail later.

In step S26, the main CPU 110a sends a power-on command to the payout control board 120 and the presentation control board 130, indicating that the game control state has been initialized and the current game state (here, the non-time-saving game state as the normal game state), and moves processing to step S33. As a result, the presentation control board 130 performs processing to execute a power-on notification indicating that the game control state has been initialized.

The "power-on notification" refers to displaying the initial screen (background image and initial performance pattern "135") on the image display device when the power is turned on to allow the user to recognize that the game control state has been initialized, turning on the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 in a predetermined light color (e.g., white) for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 60 seconds), and outputting from the audio output device 9 a power-on notification sound ("RWM has been cleared" + buzzer sound) indicating that the RWM area has been initialized for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 30 seconds).
In addition, when notifying the power-on, instead of displaying the initial screen on the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71, a display notifying that the RWM area has been cleared may be displayed on the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71.

In step S27, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a setting confirmation operation has been performed. Specifically, it determines whether or not the setting key switch 112a is ON. If a setting confirmation operation has been performed, the process proceeds to step S28 to transition to setting confirmation mode, and if a setting confirmation operation has not been performed, the process proceeds to step S30 to return the game control state to the state before the power was turned off.

The main CPU 110a performs a setting confirmation process in step S28. Specifically, the setting values saved in the setting value (during gameplay) area of the main RAM 110c are displayed on the information display 113, and the setting key switch 112a is operated to end confirmation of the setting values.

In step S29, the main CPU 110a performs a drive source initial operation process. Specifically, the main CPU 110a performs a process for initializing the various drive sources described above (second start opening/closing solenoid 48b, first large prize opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, flow path switching solenoid 52b, second large prize opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) for a predetermined period of time. Details of the initial operation of the various drive sources will be described later.

In step S30, the main CPU 110a sets the RWM area when power is restored, such as by clearing (clearing to 0) the checksum saved in the main RAM 110c. This returns (restores) the game progress state (control state) to the state before the power was cut off, making it possible to resume play from the state before the power was cut off.

In step S31, the main CPU 110a transmits a power restoration command to the presentation control board 130, indicating that the game control state has been restored and the game state before the power outage occurred. This causes the presentation control board 130 to perform processing to end setting confirmation notifications, etc., and execute a power restoration notification indicating that the game control state has returned to the state before the power outage.

"Power restoration notification" refers to displaying a power restoration screen on the image display device for a predetermined period (e.g., 30 seconds) to notify the user that the game control state has returned to the state before the power was cut off, turning on all of the frame lighting devices 10 and board lighting devices 74 in a predetermined light color (e.g., white) for a predetermined period (e.g., 60 seconds), or outputting a power restoration notification sound (buzzer sound) from the audio output device 9 for a predetermined period (e.g., 30 seconds) to indicate that power has been restored (from a power outage).

In step S32, the main CPU 110a sends other commands (such as a special reserved number designation command and a regular reserved number designation command, which will be described later) to the performance control board 130. This allows the performance control board 130 to grasp the number of reserved special and regular reserved numbers, and also performs processing to display the reserved numbers on the image display device.

In step S33, the main CPU 110a transmits a setting value designation command to the performance control board 130. This allows the performance control board 130 to grasp the current setting value. Note that this setting value designation command may be transmitted to the performance control board 130 before the power-on designation command or power-restoration designation command is transmitted. The setting value designation command may also be transmitted each time the display of the special pattern begins to change, or each time a jackpot game begins.

In step S34, the main CPU 110a starts the CTC (counter timer circuit) to generate a timer interrupt (4 milliseconds), and in step S35, it starts controlling the progress of the game (timer interrupt of the main control board 110) by allowing all interrupts, and ends this initial setting process.

In other words, from when the gaming machine 1 is turned on until the initial setting process is completed, the machine is in a pre-start state before game progress control begins, and after the initial setting process is completed, the machine is in a playable state in which game progress control is performed.

In this way, when the setting is being changed (in setting change mode) or when the setting is being confirmed (in setting confirmation mode), it is possible to know that the setting is being changed on the front (front side) of the gaming machine 1 by checking the status confirmation display 68, the first image display device 70, the second image display device 71, the frame lighting device 10, and the board lighting device 74, and it is possible to know that the setting is being changed on the back (rear side) by checking the information display 113. In other words, it is possible to know whether or not the setting is being changed from either the front (front side) or the back (rear side) of the gaming machine 1.

The power-on command and power restoration command are transmitted together with information indicating the current game status. However, after transmitting the power-on command or power restoration command, a game status command indicating the current game status may be transmitted.

Also, by not judging whether the setting change in progress flag is set or not, irrecoverable error processing may be prevented even if the previous power outage occurred during a setting change.

(Timer interrupt processing on the main control board)
The timer interrupt process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to Fig. 9. Fig. 9 is a flow chart showing the timer interrupt process in the main control board 110.

This timer interrupt process is executed after the main processing initialization process is completed, by inputting a clock pulse at a predetermined period (4 milliseconds) from the reset clock pulse generating circuit provided on the main control board 110, and controls the progress of the game.

First, in step S100, the main CPU 110a saves the information stored in the registers to the stack area, and in step S110, performs time control processing. Specifically, it performs processing to update various timer counters, such as the stop time of special symbols and the opening time of special electric roles.

The main CPU 110a performs a specific random number value update process in step S120. Specifically, the random number value for determining a big win, the random number value for determining a special symbol, the random number value for determining a special symbol variation pattern, the random number value for determining a win, the random number value for determining a normal symbol, and the random number value for determining a normal symbol variation pattern are updated. Specifically, the process is performed to update each random number value and the random number counter by adding +1. Note that if the incremented random number counter value exceeds the maximum value of the random number range (if the random number counter has completed one revolution), the random number counter is reset to 0, and if the random number counter has returned to the initial value for the revolution, the corresponding initial random number value is set as the new initial value for the revolution, and the random number value is updated.

In step S130, the main CPU 110a performs an initial random number value update process. Specifically, similar to step S30, the main CPU 110a performs a process of updating the initial random number value for determining a big win, the initial random number value for determining a special symbol, the initial random number value for determining a win, and the initial random number value for determining a normal symbol.

The main CPU 110a performs input control processing in step S200. Specifically, it determines whether or not there has been input to various switches such as the general winning hole detection switch 43a, the first large winning hole detection switch 50a, the second large winning hole detection switch 56a, the first starting hole detection switch 45a, the second starting hole detection switch 47a, the gate detection switch 44a, and the specific area detection switch 53a, and performs processing to set predetermined data if there has been input. Details of the input control processing will be described later.

In step S300, the main CPU 110a performs special symbol special electricity control processing. Specifically, the main CPU 110a performs processing such as judging the special symbol determination information obtained based on the winning of the game ball into the first start hole 45 or the second start hole 47, displaying the variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, opening and closing the large prize holes (first large prize hole 50, second large prize hole 56), and setting the game state. The details of the special symbol special electricity control processing will be described later.

The main CPU 110a performs normal symbol and normal power control processing in step S400. Specifically, it performs processing such as judging the normal symbol judgment information acquired based on the passage of the game ball through the normal symbol gate 44, displaying the normal symbol fluctuation, and opening and closing the second starting hole 47 (auxiliary game). The details of the normal symbol and normal power control processing will be described later.

The types of winning and losing normal symbols determined as a result of the normal symbol determination information performed in the normal symbol and normal power control process remain the same regardless of the setting value. This prevents the game from becoming too complicated, allowing players to play with peace of mind.

In addition, the selection ratios of various winning normal symbols and various losing normal symbols, which are determined as a result of the normal symbol determination information performed in the normal symbol/normal power control process, are fixed and do not change depending on the setting value. By doing this, the player's degree of advantage does not change drastically depending on the setting value, allowing the player to play with peace of mind.

The main CPU 110a performs customer waiting control processing in step S450. Specifically, if a special game (big win game, small win game) or variable performance is not executed, the main CPU 110a performs processing such as sending a customer waiting designation command to the performance control board 130 as if the game had transitioned to a customer waiting state. The customer waiting control processing will be described in detail later.

The main CPU 110a performs payout control processing in step S500. Specifically, it refers to various prize ball counters stored in the main RAM 110c, and performs processing to send payout number designation commands corresponding to the various winning ports (general winning port 43, first start port 45, second start port 47, first large winning port 50, second large winning port 56) to the payout control board 120. This causes the payout control board 120 to execute processing to pay out prize balls from the payout device 95.

The main CPU 110a performs an abnormality determination process in step S600. Specifically, it determines whether various errors (illegal winning errors in which a game ball enters the second start port 47 when not in auxiliary play or a game ball enters the large winning port when not in special play, abnormal winning errors in which the number of game balls entering various winning ports does not match the number of game balls discharged from the winning ball flow path through which the winning balls flow, magnetic errors in which the magnetic detection sensor 57a detects abnormal magnetism for a predetermined period of time, radio wave errors in which the radio wave detection sensor 58a detects abnormal radio waves for a predetermined period of time, door opening errors in which the opening detection switch 31a changes from an OFF state to an ON state, and operation errors in which the RWM clear switch 111a or the setting key switch 112a is operated while the game progress control is being performed) have occurred, and performs processing to transmit an error designation command corresponding to the error that has occurred to the performance control board 130. This causes the performance control board 130 to execute processing to notify the error.

The main CPU 110a performs data creation processing in step S700. Specifically, the main CPU 110a performs processing to create data such as start port opening/closing data to be output to the second start port opening/closing solenoid 48b, large prize port opening/closing data to be output to the first large prize port opening/closing solenoid 51b and the second large prize port opening/closing solenoid 57b, special pattern display data to be output to the first special pattern display 60 and the second special pattern display 61, normal pattern display data to be output to the normal pattern display 62, special pattern reserved display data to be output to the first special pattern reserved display 63 and the second special pattern reserved display 64, and normal pattern reserved display data to be output to the normal pattern reserved display 65.

In step S720, the main CPU 110a performs external information data creation processing. Specifically, it performs processing to create game information data to be output from the game information output terminal board 90.

In step S750, the main CPU 110a performs output control processing. Specifically, port output processing is performed to output signals such as the start opening/closing data and the large winning opening/closing data created in step S700, and to output signals such as the game information data created in step S720, and display output processing is performed to output signals such as special symbol display data, normal symbol display data, special symbol reserved display data, and normal symbol reserved display data, and processing is performed to send a payout status confirmation designation command to the payout control board 120 to check the payout status of the payout control board 120, and to send a payout number designation command corresponding to each winning port to the payout control board 120 by referring to the prize ball counters (3 prize ball counter, 10 prize ball counter, 15 prize ball counter) described later. As a result, the payout control board 120 executes control to pay out prize balls from the game ball payout device 100.

In step S800, the main CPU 110a performs processing when an information program is called. Specifically, after prohibiting interrupts, the flag register is saved to the main RAM 110c, and processing is performed to call the target information program using the CALL command.

In step S810, the main CPU 110a performs normal base value calculation and display processing. Specifically, the game ball counting process counts game performance information such as the normal payout number, which is the number of prize balls paid out based on the entry of game balls into various winning ports (general winning port, large winning port start port) during the normal game state, the normal out number, which is the number of game balls detected by the out ball detection switch 39a during the normal game state, and the total out number, which is the number of game balls detected by the out ball detection switch 39a regardless of the game state, a normal base value calculation process calculates a normal base value ((normal payout number ÷ normal out number) × 100) in the current game section separated by the total out number, and saves the normal base value rounded off to the first decimal place in the first area of the base memory area set in the main RAM 110c, and a performance display data setting process sets performance display data to display the normal base values (performance information) for the four game sections calculated in the performance information calculation process and saved in the base memory area on the information display 113 while switching them every 5 seconds.

The total number of outs, number of payouts during normal play, and number of outs during normal play are game performance information that are not affected by changes to the setting value (are unrelated to the setting value), so by counting these, it is possible to calculate performance information that eliminates the influence of the setting value (the normal base value, described below), which can be used to understand the performance of the gaming machine 1.

The play section is updated every time the total number of outs reaches 60,000, and the base memory area is provided with a first area in which the normal base value for the current play section is stored, a second area for storing the normal base value for the play section one period before, a third area for storing the normal base value for the play section two periods before, and a fourth area for storing the normal base value for the play section three periods before, and the normal base values for four play sections including the current one are saved in each area.

In step S830, the main CPU 110a performs a test data creation process. Specifically, the main CPU 110a performs a process to create test data (test information) to be output to the test equipment used when testing the gaming machine 1.

The main CPU 110a performs output control processing in step S850. Specifically, it performs display output processing to output signals such as the performance display data (performance information) set in step S850 above to various displays, and processing to output signals such as the test data created in step S870 above.

In step S870, the main CPU 110a performs processing for returning to the game program. Specifically, the flag register is restored from the main RAM 110c, and processing is performed to permit interrupts and return to the game program.

In step S900, the main CPU 110a restores the information saved in step S100 to the register of the main CPU 110a and ends this timer interrupt process.

In this way, in the pre-start state before game progress control begins (during setting change mode, RWM clear mode, and setting confirmation mode), timer interrupts are not executed, so the number of payouts and outs are not counted, the normal base value is not calculated, and the normal base value is not displayed, which reduces the control burden on the main control board.

(Input control processing of main control board)
The input control process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to Fig. 10. Fig. 10 is a flow chart showing the input control process in the main control board 110.

First, in step S210, the main CPU 110a performs general winning hole detection switch input processing. Specifically, it determines whether a detection signal has been input from the general winning hole detection switch 43a, i.e., whether a game ball has entered the general winning hole 43, and then performs processing to pay out prize balls from the payout device 95.

In step S220, the main CPU 110a performs a large prize opening detection switch input process. Specifically, the main CPU 110a determines whether a detection signal has been input from the first large prize opening detection switch 50a or the second large prize opening detection switch 56a, i.e., whether a game ball has entered the first large prize opening 50 or the second large prize opening 56, and then performs a process to pay out prize balls from the payout device 95.

The main CPU 110a performs a first start hole detection switch input process in step S230. Specifically, the main CPU 110a determines whether a detection signal has been input from the first start hole detection switch 45a, i.e., whether a game ball has entered the first start hole 45, and performs a process to pay out prize balls from the payout device 95, as well as a process to obtain and store special game determination information. The details of the first start hole detection switch input process will be described later.

The main CPU 110a performs second start hole detection switch input processing in step S240. Specifically, the main CPU 110a determines whether a detection signal has been input from the second start hole detection switch 47a, i.e., whether a game ball has entered the second start hole 47, and performs processing to pay out prize balls from the payout device 95, as well as processing to obtain and store special game determination information. Details of the second start hole detection switch input processing will be described later.

The main CPU 110a performs gate detection switch input processing in step S250. Specifically, it determines whether a detection signal has been input from the gate detection switch 44a, i.e., whether the game ball has passed through the normal gate 44, and performs processing to obtain and store normal play determination information. The gate detection switch input processing will be described in detail later.

In step S260, the main CPU 110a performs specific area detection switch input processing and ends the current input control processing. Specifically, it determines whether a detection signal has been input from the specific area detection switch 53a, i.e., whether the game ball has passed through the specific area 53, and performs processing to set predetermined data. Details of the specific area detection switch input processing will be described later.

(First start port detection switch input processing of the main control board)
The first start hole detection switch input process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to Fig. 11. Fig. 11 is a flowchart showing the first start hole detection switch input process in the main control board 110.

First, in step S230-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a detection signal has been input from the first start hole detection switch 45a. If a detection signal has been input from the first start hole detection switch 45a, the process proceeds to step S230-2. If a detection signal has not been input from the first start hole detection switch 45a, the current first start hole detection switch input process is terminated.

In step S230-2, the main CPU 110a performs a process of updating the 3 prize ball counter used for the 3 prize balls by adding data indicating 3 prize balls, and in step S230-3, obtains special symbol determination information (random number value for determining a jackpot, random number value for determining special symbols, random number value for determining reach, random number value for determining special symbol fluctuation pattern).

In step S230-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether the first reserved memory (U1) is less than 4. If the first reserved memory (U1) is less than 4, the process proceeds to step S230-5, and if the first reserved memory (U1) is not less than 4, the current first start hole detection switch input process is terminated.

In step S230-5, the main CPU 110a performs a process of adding "1" to the first reserved memory (U1) to update it (U1←U1+1), and in step S230-6, sets the first special reserved number designation command corresponding to the first reserved memory (U1) in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the first special reserved number designation command is sent to the performance control board 130, and the image display device displays the reserved number corresponding to the first reserved memory (U1) (display of the first reserved icon, display of the first reserved number display area). In addition, a first reserved memory display (two LEDs) that allows the player to always check the number of first reserved memories (U1) may be provided in a position visible to the player, and the performance control board 130 may display the reserved number corresponding to the first reserved memory (U1) on the image display device and the first reserved memory display.

In step S230-7, the main CPU 110a searches for available storage units in the first special pattern determination information storage area, starting from the first storage unit, and stores the special pattern determination information acquired in step S230-3 in the available storage unit.

In step S230-8, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the game is currently in a normal game mode. If the game is in a normal game mode, the process proceeds to step S230-9 to perform a pre-reading process of the special symbol determination information obtained based on the entry of the game ball into the first start hole 45. If the game is not in a normal game mode, the process does not perform a pre-reading process of the special symbol determination information obtained based on the entry of the game ball into the first start hole 45, and ends the first start hole detection switch input process.

In step S230-9, the main CPU 110a performs a first special pattern pre-reading process (pre-determination process). In this first special pattern pre-reading process, a special pattern pre-determination table (see FIG. 23(a) or FIG. 23(b)) is selected for pre-reading (pre-determination) the special pattern determination information, the currently acquired special pattern determination information is pre-determined before the first special pattern variation display is performed, and a process is performed to generate a first special pattern pre-reading designation command for notifying the performance control board 130 of the result of the pre-determination (special pattern planned variation pattern). The pre-determination table will be described in detail later.

This "first special symbol pre-reading command" is information that can identify the planned special symbol variation pattern of the first special symbol, so the performance control board 130 can use the first special symbol pre-reading command to identify the type of special symbol, the result of the jackpot determination, the type of special symbol, the type of jackpot game (number of rounds), and the type of time-saving game state after the jackpot game ends.

In step S230-10, the main CPU 110a sets the first special chart pre-read command generated in step S230-9 in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c.

As a result, a first special pattern pre-reading winning designation command is sent to the designation control board 130, and a pre-reading notice (continuous notice display, icon change display) is executed, which gives the player hope of a big win game being played over one or more display changes, even before the display change of the first special pattern corresponding to the first special pattern pre-reading designation command begins.

The upper limit value of the first reserved memory (U1) is "4", but it may be more or less than this. Also, the upper limit value of the second reserved memory may be less or more than the upper limit value of the second reserved memory. Furthermore, the first reserved memory itself may be eliminated by storing the special pattern determination information only in the 0th memory section of the first special pattern determination information storage area.

In addition, when the game is in a normal game state, the first special chart pre-reading process is performed and a first special chart pre-reading designation command is sent to the presentation control board 130 to execute the pre-reading notice, but it is also possible to perform the first special chart pre-reading process regardless of the game state and send a first special chart pre-reading designation command to the presentation control board 130, so that when the game is in a normal game state on the presentation control board 130, the pre-reading notice performance is executed, and when the game is in a time-saving game state, the execution of the pre-reading notice performance is restricted (such as not executing it, or executing it with a lower probability than in the normal game state).

(Main control board second start port detection switch input processing)
The second start hole detection switch input process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to Fig. 12. Fig. 12 is a flowchart showing the second start hole detection switch input process in the main control board 110.

First, in step S240-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a detection signal has been input from the second start hole detection switch 47a. If a detection signal has been input from the second start hole detection switch 47a, the process proceeds to step S240-2. If a detection signal has not been input from the second start hole detection switch 47a, the current second start hole detection switch input process is terminated.

In step S240-2, the main CPU 110a performs a process of updating the two prize ball counter used for two prize balls by adding data indicating two prize balls, and in step S240-3, obtains special symbol determination information (random number value for determining a jackpot, random number value for determining special symbols, random number value for determining reach, random number value for determining special symbol fluctuation pattern).

In step S240-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether the second reserved memory (U2) is less than 4. If the second reserved memory (U2) is less than 4, the process proceeds to step S240-5, and if the second reserved memory (U2) is not less than 4, the current second start hole detection switch input process is terminated.

In step S240-5, the main CPU 110a performs a process of adding "1" to the second reserved memory (U2) to update it (U2←U2+1), and in step S240-6, sets the second special reserved number designation command corresponding to the second reserved memory (U2) in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the second special reserved number designation command is sent to the performance control board 130, and the image display device displays the reserved number corresponding to the second reserved memory (U2) (display of the second reserved number display area 70F). In addition, a second reserved memory display (two LEDs) that allows the player to always check the number of second reserved memories (U2) may be provided in a position visible to the player, and the performance control board 130 may display the reserved number corresponding to the second reserved memory (U2) on the image display device and the second reserved memory display.

In step S240-7, the main CPU 110a searches for available storage units in the second special pattern determination information storage area, starting from the first storage unit, and stores the special pattern determination information acquired in step S240-3 in an available storage unit.

In step S240-8, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the game is currently in a time-saving game state. If the game is in a time-saving game state, the process proceeds to step S240-9 to perform pre-reading processing of the special chart determination information obtained based on the entry of the game ball into the second start hole 47, and if the game is not in a non-time-saving game state, the process does not perform pre-reading processing of the special chart determination information obtained based on the entry of the game ball into the second start hole 47, and ends the current second start hole detection switch input process.

In step S240-9, the main CPU 110a performs a second special pattern pre-reading process (pre-determination process). In this second special pattern pre-reading process, a special pattern pre-determination table (see FIG. 23(c) or FIG. 23(d)) is selected for pre-reading (pre-determination) the special pattern determination information, the currently acquired special pattern determination information is pre-determined before the second special pattern variation display is performed, and a process is performed to generate a second special pattern pre-reading designation command for notifying the performance control board 130 of the result of the pre-determination (special pattern planned variation pattern, pre-reading information).

This "second special pattern pre-reading command" is information that can identify the result of the special pattern determination information, so the performance control board 130 can use the second special pattern pre-reading command to identify the type of second special pattern, the result of the jackpot determination, the type of special pattern, the type of jackpot game or small jackpot game (number of rounds), and the number of times (J1, J2, J3) that the game will be played in the normal time-saving game state after the jackpot game ends.

In step S240-10, the main CPU 110a sets the second special chart pre-read designation command generated in step S230-9 in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c.
As a result, a second special pattern pre-reading command is sent to the performance control board 130, and a pre-reading notice (continuous notice performance, icon change performance) is executed, which gives the player the expectation that a jackpot game will be played over one or more varying displays, before the varying display of the second special pattern corresponding to the second special pattern pre-reading command begins.

In this embodiment, the upper limit value of the second reserved memory (U2) is "4", but it may be more or less than this. Also, the upper limit value of the second reserved memory may be less than the upper limit value of the first reserved memory. Furthermore, the second reserved memory itself may be eliminated by storing the special pattern determination information only in the 0th memory section of the second special pattern determination information storage area.

In addition, when the game is in the time-saving play state, the second special chart pre-reading process is performed and a second special chart pre-reading designation command is sent to the performance control board 130 to execute the pre-reading notice, but it is also possible to perform the second special chart pre-reading process regardless of the play state and send a second special chart pre-reading designation command to the performance control board 130, so that when the game is in the time-saving play state on the performance control board 130, the pre-reading notice performance is executed and when the game is in the normal play state, the execution of the pre-reading notice performance is restricted (such as not executing it, or executing it with a lower probability than in the time-saving play state, etc.).

(Gate detection switch input processing on the main control board)
The gate detection switch input processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to Fig. 13. Fig. 13 is a flow chart showing the gate detection switch input processing in the main control board 110.

First, in step S250-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a detection signal has been input from the gate detection switch 44a. If a detection signal has been input from the gate detection switch 44a, the process proceeds to step S250-2. If a detection signal has not been input from the gate detection switch 44a, the current gate detection switch input process ends.

In step S250-2, the main CPU 110a acquires normal symbol determination information (random number value for winning determination, random number value for normal symbol determination, random number value for normal symbol variation pattern determination).

In step S250-3, the main CPU 110a determines whether the normal map reserved memory (F) is less than 4. If the normal map reserved memory (F) is less than 4, the process proceeds to step S250-4, and if the normal map reserved memory (F) is not less than 4, the current gate detection switch input process is terminated.

In step S250-4, the main CPU 110a performs a process to add "1" to the regular map reserve memory (F) to update it (F←F+1), and in step S250-5, sets a regular map reserve number designation command corresponding to the regular map reserve memory (F) in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. This causes the regular map reserve number designation command to be sent to the performance control board 130, and the number of regular map reserve icons corresponding to the regular map reserve memory (F) is displayed on the image display device. In addition, a regular map reserve memory display (two LEDs) that allows the player to always check the number of regular map reserve memories (F) may be provided in a position visible to the player, and the performance control board 130 may display the reserve corresponding to the regular map reserve memory (F) on the image display device and the regular map reserve memory display.

In step S250-6, the main CPU 110a searches for available memory units in the general map determination information storage area, starting from the first memory unit, and stores the general map determination information acquired in step S250-2 in the available memory unit.

In step S250-7, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the game is currently in a time-saving game state. If the game is in a time-saving game state, the process proceeds to step S250-8 to perform a pre-reading process of the normal game judgment information obtained based on the game ball entering the normal game gate 44, and if the game is not in a non-time-saving game state, the process does not perform a pre-reading process of the normal game judgment information obtained based on the game ball entering the normal game gate 44, and ends the current gate detection switch input process.

The main CPU 110a performs a normal pattern pre-reading process (pre-determination process) in step S250-8. In this normal pattern pre-reading process, a normal pattern pre-determination table (see FIG. 36(a) or FIG. 36(b)) is selected for pre-reading (pre-determination) of the normal pattern determination information, and the currently acquired normal pattern determination information is pre-determined before the normal pattern variation display is performed, and a process is performed to generate a normal pattern pre-reading designation command for notifying the performance control board 130 of the result of the pre-determination (normal pattern planned variation pattern, pre-reading information).

This "regular symbol pre-reading command" is information that can identify the result of the regular symbol judgment information, so the performance control board 130 can use the regular symbol pre-reading command to identify the type of regular symbol, the result of the hit judgment, the type of regular symbol, and the type of auxiliary game (short opening, long opening).

In step S250-9, the main CPU 110a sets the map pre-read command generated in step S250-8 above in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c.

As a result, a normal symbol pre-reading command is sent to the performance control board 130, and a pre-reading notice (continuous notice performance, icon change performance) is executed, which gives the player the expectation that an auxiliary game will be executed over the display of one or more normal symbols, even before the display of the normal symbol corresponding to the normal symbol pre-reading command begins.

In this embodiment, the upper limit of the regular map reserved memory (F) is set to "4", but it may be higher or lower than this. Also, the upper limit of the regular map reserved memory may be lower or higher compared to the upper limit of the first reserved memory. Furthermore, the regular map reserved memory itself may be eliminated by storing regular map judgment information only in the 0th memory section of the regular map judgment information storage area.

In addition, when the game is in the time-saving play state, normal map pre-reading processing is performed and a normal map pre-reading designation command is sent to the presentation control board 130 to execute the pre-reading notice, but it is also possible to perform normal map pre-reading processing regardless of the play state and send a normal map pre-reading designation command to the presentation control board 130, so that when the game is in the time-saving play state on the presentation control board 130, the pre-reading notice performance is executed and when the game is in the normal play state, the execution of the pre-reading notice performance is restricted (such as not executing it, or executing it with a lower probability than in the time-saving play state, etc.).

(Specific area detection switch input processing on main control board)
14, the specific area detection switch input process of the main control board 110 will be described. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing the specific area detection switch input process of the main control board 110.

First, in step S260-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a detection signal has been input from the specific area detection switch 53a. If a detection signal has been input from the specific area detection switch 53a, the process proceeds to step S260-2. If a detection signal has not been input from the specific area detection switch 53a, the current specific area detection switch input process is terminated.

In step S260-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the current time is within a specific area effective period during which the passage of the gaming ball into the specific area 53 is valid. Specifically, it determines whether or not a small win game (conversion game) is in progress. If a small win game is in progress, the process proceeds to step S260-3. If the current time is not within the specific area effective period, the process proceeds to step S260-5.

In step S260-3, the main CPU 110a sets in the main RAM 110c a specific area passing flag indicating that the game ball passed through the specific area 53 during a small win game, and specific area passing game state information indicating the game state when the game ball passed through the specific area 53 (information indicating that the game is in the normal game state if the current game state is the normal game state, and information indicating that the game is in the time-saving game state if the current game state is the time-saving game state), and in step S260-4, sets in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c a specific area passing designation command indicating that the game ball passed through the specific area 53 during the specific area effective period, and ends this specific area detection switch input process.

As a result, a specific area passage designation command is sent to the presentation control board 130, and a passing notification presentation is executed to notify the player that the game ball has passed through the specific area 53 (a big win game is being executed). This allows the player to know that the game ball has passed through the specific area 53 during a small win game, making it possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

In step S260-5, the main CPU 110a sets a specific area passage error designation command, indicating that the game ball passed through the specific area 53 at an abnormal timing, in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and ends this specific area detection switch input process.

As a result, a specific area passing error designation command is sent to the presentation control board 130, and a passing error notification presentation is executed to notify the occurrence of a passing error in which the game ball passes through the specific area 53 at an abnormal timing. This allows the employees of the game establishment to recognize the occurrence of a passing error and take appropriate measures.

(Special diagram special electric control processing of the main control board)
The special pattern special electric control process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to Fig. 15. Fig. 15 is a flowchart showing the special pattern special electric control process of the main control board 110.

First, in step S301, the main CPU 110a loads the value of the special chart special power processing data, and in step S302, references the branch destination address from the loaded special chart special power processing data, executes the process corresponding to the branch destination address, and ends the current special chart special power control process.

Specifically, if the special pattern special electric processing data = 0, a special pattern memory determination process (step S310) is executed to perform processing to start the variable display of the special pattern based on the pending memory (special pattern determination information) and processing to change the special pattern special electric processing data to "1", and the current special pattern special electric control process is terminated.
If the special pattern special electric processing data = 1, a special pattern change process (step S320) is executed to perform processes such as stopping the display of the special pattern as the change time passes and sending a pattern confirmation command to the performance control board 130 and changing the special pattern special electric processing data to "2," and then the current special pattern special electric control process is terminated.
If the special symbol special electric processing data = 2, then as the stop time of the special symbol elapses, if it is a losing special symbol, the special symbol special electric processing data is changed to "0", if it is a big win special symbol, the opening time of the big win game is set and the special symbol special electric processing data is changed to "3", if it is a small win special symbol, the opening time of the small win game is set and the special symbol special electric processing data is changed to "4", a special symbol stop process (step S330) is executed, and the current special symbol special electric control process is terminated.

If the special chart special electricity processing data = 3, a jackpot game process (step S340) is executed to perform processing to execute a jackpot game and processing to change the special chart special electricity processing data to "5" based on the end of the final round of play, and the current special chart special electricity control process is terminated.
If the special chart special electricity processing data = 4, a small win game process (step S350) is executed to perform processing to execute a small win game and processing to change the special chart special electricity processing data to "0" or "3" based on the completion of the ending of the small win game, and the current special chart special electricity control process is terminated.
If the special chart special electric processing data = 5, a jackpot game end process (step S360) is executed to perform a process to end the jackpot game and a process to change the special chart special electric processing data to "0" based on the end of the ending of the jackpot game, and the current special chart special electric control process is ended.

(Special pattern memory determination process of the main control board)
The special symbol storage determination process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to Fig. 16. Fig. 16 is a flow chart showing the special symbol storage determination process in the main control board 110.

First, in step S310-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the special symbol is being displayed in a changing state. If the special symbol is being displayed in a changing state, the main CPU 110a ends the current special symbol memory determination process, and if the special symbol is not being displayed in a changing state, the process proceeds to step S310-2.

In step S310-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether the second pending memory (U2) is 1 or greater. If the second pending memory (U2) is 1 or greater, the process proceeds to step S310-3, and if the second pending memory (U2) is not 1 or greater, the process proceeds to step S310-4.

In step S310-3, the main CPU 110a updates the second reserved memory (U2) by subtracting "1", and in step S310-6, the main CPU 110a sets the number of reserved special figures after subtraction, in this case a second reserved number designation command corresponding to the second reserved memory (U2), in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the second reserved number designation command is sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to update the reserved icon displayed on the image display device and the display of the icon.

In step S310-7, the main CPU 110a sets a game state designation command corresponding to the current game state in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. This causes the game state designation command to be sent to the performance control board 130, which updates the game state as understood by the performance control board 130 and performs a performance according to the updated game state.

In step S310-8, the main CPU 110a performs a shift process on the data stored in the second special pattern determination information storage area, and shifts the special pattern determination information stored in the first to fourth storage units to the previous storage unit.

For example, the special pattern determination information stored in the fourth memory section of the second special pattern determination information holding memory area is shifted to the third memory section of the second special pattern determination information holding memory area. In addition, the special pattern determination information stored in the first memory section of the second special pattern determination information holding memory area is shifted to the zeroth memory section, which is the special pattern determination information execution memory area, and the special pattern determination information used in the previous game that was stored in the zeroth memory section is erased.

On the other hand, in step S310-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether the first reserved memory (U1) is 1 or greater. If the first reserved memory (U1) is 1 or greater, the process proceeds to step S310-5, and if the first reserved memory (U1) is not 1 or greater, the current special symbol memory determination process is terminated.

In step S310-5, the main CPU 110a updates the first reserved memory (U1) by subtracting "1", and in step S310-6, the main CPU 110a sets the number of reserved special figures after subtraction, in this case the first reserved figure number designation command corresponding to the first reserved memory (U1), in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the first reserved figure number designation command is sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to update the reserved icon displayed on the image display device and the display of the icon.

In step S310-7, the main CPU 110a sets a game state designation command corresponding to the current game state in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. This causes the game state designation command to be sent to the performance control board 130, which updates the game state as understood by the performance control board 130 and performs a performance according to the updated game state.

In step S310-8, the main CPU 110a performs a shift process on the data stored in the first special symbol reserved memory area, and shifts the special symbol determination information stored in the first to fourth memory units to the previous memory unit.

For example, the special symbol determination information stored in the fourth memory section of the first special symbol reserve memory area is shifted to the third memory section of the first special symbol reserve memory area. In addition, the special symbol determination information stored in the first memory section of the first special symbol reserve memory area is shifted to the zeroth memory section, which is the special symbol determination information execution memory area, and the special symbol determination information used in the previous game that was stored in the zeroth memory section is erased.

In addition, in conjunction with the shifting process of the special symbol determination information in step S310-8, the special symbol reserved display data indicating the first reserved memory (U1) and the second reserved memory (U2) after the subtraction is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c. This updates the display contents of the first special symbol reserved indicator 63 and the second special symbol reserved indicator 64.

In addition, in this embodiment, the second special chart determination information reserved memory area is shifted in priority over the first special chart determination information reserved memory area in steps S310-2 to S310-8 (the second reserved memory is subtracted in priority over the first reserved memory), but the first special chart determination information reserved memory area or the second special chart determination information reserved memory area may be shifted in the order in which the game ball entered the starting hole (the first reserved memory and the second reserved memory are subtracted in the order of winning), or the first special chart determination information reserved memory area may be shifted in priority over the second special chart determination information reserved memory area (the first reserved memory is subtracted in priority over the second reserved memory).

In step S311, the main CPU 110a executes a jackpot determination process to determine whether or not a jackpot has been reached and the special symbol stop data for the special symbol based on the special symbol determination information stored in the 0th memory unit, which is the special symbol determination information execution memory area. The details of the jackpot determination process will be described later.

In step S312, the main CPU 110a sets a special symbol designation command corresponding to the type of special symbol determined in the big win determination process in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. This causes the special symbol designation command to be sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to determine the performance symbol 70a that will be displayed in a stopped state as a result of the variable performance.

In step S313, the main CPU 110a performs a special pattern change pattern determination process to determine the change pattern (change time) of the special pattern based on the special pattern determination information stored in the 0th memory unit, which is the special pattern determination information execution memory area. The details of the special pattern change pattern determination process will be described later.

In step S314, the main CPU 110a sets a special pattern change pattern designation command corresponding to the type of special pattern change pattern determined in the special pattern change pattern determination process in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. This causes the special pattern change pattern designation command to be sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to determine the change performance pattern, which is the performance mode of the change performance performed during the special pattern change display.

In step S315, the main CPU 110a sets the special symbol fluctuation time (counter value) corresponding to the type of special symbol fluctuation pattern determined in the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination process in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S316 starts displaying the fluctuation of the special symbol. As a result, the data creation process in step S700 creates LED lighting data for displaying the fluctuation of the special symbol, and the created lighting data is output in the output control process in step S800, thereby displaying the fluctuation of the special symbol on the first special symbol display device 60 or the second special symbol display device 61.

In step S317, the main CPU 110a sets the special symbol special signal processing data to "1" and ends this special symbol memory determination process.

In step S310-6, only the special reserved number designation command corresponding to the subtracted reserved number of special symbols (first reserved memory (U1), second reserved memory (U2)) is sent, but it is also possible to send both the special reserved number designation command corresponding to the subtracted reserved number of special symbols and the non-subtracted reserved number of special symbols, that is, the first special reserved number designation command and the second special reserved number designation command. In this way, for example, even if the performance control board 130 does not properly receive (misses) the special reserved number designation command sent at the start of the previous special symbol variable display, it is possible to correct the first reserved memory (U1) and the second reserved memory (U2) to normal values by the special reserved number designation command sent at the start of the next special symbol variable display.

(Main control board jackpot determination process)
The big win determination process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to Fig. 17. Fig. 17 is a flow chart showing the big win determination process in the main control board 110.

In step S311-1, the main CPU 110a refers to the setting value stored in the setting value area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S311-2, selects a jackpot determination table (see FIG. 18(a) or FIG. 18(b)) according to the type of special symbol for determining whether or not a jackpot has been reached (whether or not a small jackpot has been reached). Details of the jackpot determination table will be described later.

In step S311-3, the main CPU 110a compares the current setting value and the random number value for determining a jackpot with the jackpot determination table to determine whether or not a jackpot has been reached (whether or not a small jackpot has been reached). If it is a jackpot, the process proceeds to step S311-4; if it is not a jackpot, the process proceeds to step S311-6.

In step S311-4, the main CPU 110a sets the game status information at the time of winning the jackpot in a specified area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S311-5, selects a special jackpot symbol determination table (see FIG. 19(a)) for determining the type of special jackpot symbol, and proceeds to step S311-11. Details of the special jackpot symbol determination table will be described later.

In step S311-6, the main CPU 110a compares the current setting value and the random number value for determining a big win against the big win determination table to determine whether or not a small win has occurred. If it has, the process proceeds to step S311-7. If it has not, the process proceeds to step S311-8, assuming that it has not occurred.

In step S311-7, the main CPU 110a selects a special symbol determination table for small wins (see FIG. 19(b)) for determining the type of special symbol for small wins, and proceeds to step S311-11. Details of the special symbol determination table for small wins will be described later.

In step S311-8, the main CPU 110a selects the special symbol determination table for a loss (see FIG. 19(c)) for determining the special symbol for a loss, and proceeds to step S311-9. Details of the special symbol determination table for a normal loss will be described later.

In step S311-9, the main CPU 110a compares the type of special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) for which a jackpot determination is to be made and the random number value for special symbol determination with the special symbol determination table to determine the special symbol that will be displayed as a result of the variable display executed on the first special symbol display device 60 or the second special symbol display device 61.

In step S311-10, the main CPU 110a sets the special stop symbol data corresponding to the special symbol determined in step S311-9 in a specified area of the main RAM 110c, and ends this jackpot determination process.

(Big win determination table)
Figure 18(a) is a jackpot determination table for the first special pattern for determining (jackpot determination) special pattern determination information obtained based on the entry (sinking) of the gaming ball into the first starting hole 45, and Figure 18(b) is a jackpot determination table for the second special pattern for determining (jackpot determination) special pattern determination information obtained based on the entry (sinking) of the gaming ball into the second starting hole 47.

As shown in Figures 18(a) and 18(b), the jackpot determination table associates the current setting value, the random number value for jackpot determination, and the determination result (jackpot, small win, miss), and for reference, the rightmost column lists the approximate probability of winning in the case of a "jackpot" and a "small win."

The main CPU 110a refers to the jackpot determination table for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 18(a) or the jackpot determination table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 18(b), and determines whether it is a "jackpot," "small jackpot," or "normal miss" based on the current setting value and the random number value for jackpot determination.

For example, according to the jackpot determination table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 18(b), when the set value is "1", 200 random numbers for jackpot determination from "1" to "200" are determined as "jackpots", 860 random numbers for jackpot determination from "300" to "59998" are determined as "minor wins", and any other random numbers for jackpot determination are determined as "misses".

In addition, in the jackpot determination table for the second special symbol, a "miss" is set, but it is also possible to determine that any random number other than the one that is determined to be a jackpot is a "small win" without setting a miss.

(Special symbol determination table)
Figure 19(a) is a special pattern determination table for big wins that is referenced when determining the stopping pattern of the special pattern when a big win is determined, Figure 19(b) is a special pattern determination table for small wins that is referenced when determining the stopping pattern of the special pattern when a small win is determined, and Figure 19(c) is a special pattern determination table for misses that is referenced when determining the stopping pattern of the special pattern when a miss is determined.

As shown in Figures 19(a) to 19(c), the special symbol determination table associates the type of special symbol that determines the stop symbol, the random number value for special symbol determination, the result of the special symbol determination, the stop special symbol data indicating the result of this determination, and the special symbol designation command indicating the result of the special symbol determination, and for reference, the lighting state of the LED in the special symbol display is described in the rightmost column.

The special symbols "00" and "10" are the losing special symbols that do not trigger a jackpot game. The special symbol "01" is the jackpot special symbol that triggers a first jackpot game consisting of five rounds of play, the special symbol "02" is the jackpot special symbol that triggers a second jackpot game consisting of five rounds of play, the special symbol "03" is the jackpot special symbol that triggers a third jackpot game consisting of ten rounds of play, the special symbol "11" is the jackpot special symbol that triggers the third jackpot game described above, and the special symbol "12" is the small jackpot special symbol that triggers a small jackpot game.

Details will be given later, but the degree of advantage of each type of jackpot game is 1st jackpot game < 2nd jackpot game < 3rd jackpot game.

The first feature of the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 19 is that the LEDs (light-emitting members) of the special symbol display that light up when displaying the small win special symbol include the same LEDs (light-emitting members) of the special symbol display that light up when displaying the losing special symbol. This makes it easier to know that it is a small win special symbol or a losing special symbol, rather than a big win special symbol, and makes the game more interesting.

A second feature of the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 19 is that when the special symbol determination information (first special symbol) obtained based on the entry of a gaming ball into the first starting hole 45 is determined to be a jackpot, any of the first to third jackpot games can be played, and when the special symbol determination information (second special symbol) obtained based on the entry of a gaming ball into the second starting hole 47 is determined to be a jackpot, the third jackpot game can be played. In this way, the type of jackpot game that can be played changes depending on the type of special symbol, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

Note that one losing special symbol is associated with each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but multiple losing special symbols may be associated with at least one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

The number of LEDs on the special pattern display that light up when displaying the big win special pattern may be more than three or less than three. The number of LEDs on the special pattern display that light up when displaying the small win special pattern may be more than two or less than two, but even in this case, the number may be different from the number of LEDs on the special pattern display that light up when displaying the big win special pattern.

Also, the LED of the special pattern display that lights up when displaying the small win special pattern and the LED of the special pattern display that lights up when displaying the losing special pattern may not be the same (they may be completely different).

In addition, the jackpot determination table for the first special symbol does not allow a small jackpot to be won, but it may be possible to make it so that a small jackpot is won. In this case, it is preferable to make the probability of winning lower than that of the jackpot determination table for the second special symbol.

(Main control board special chart variation pattern determination process)
The special pattern variation pattern determination process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to Fig. 20. Fig. 20 is a flowchart showing the special pattern variation pattern determination process in the main control board 110.

First, in step S313-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the current game state is normal. If the current game state is normal, the process proceeds to step S313-2. If the current game state is not normal, the process proceeds to step S313-3, assuming that the current game state is time-saving.

In step S313-2, the main CPU 110a selects the appropriate table (matching the game situation) from the normal special pattern change pattern determination table (see FIG. 21) for determining the special pattern change pattern in the normal game state, and moves the process to step S313-4. Details of the normal special pattern change pattern determination table will be described later.

In step S313-3, the main CPU 110a selects the relevant table (matching the game situation) from the time-saving special chart fluctuation pattern determination table (see FIG. 22) for determining the special chart fluctuation pattern in the time-saving game state, and moves the process to step S313-4. Details of the time-saving special chart fluctuation pattern determination table will be described later.

In step S313-4, the main CPU 110a compares the type of special symbol, the jackpot determination result, the special symbol determination result, the random number value for reach determination, the reserved number (U1 or U2), and the random number value for special symbol variation pattern determination against the special symbol variation pattern determination table to determine the special symbol variation pattern.

In step S313-5, the main CPU 110a sets the change time corresponding to the determined special chart change pattern in a specified area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S313-6, sets a special chart change pattern designation command corresponding to the determined change pattern in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the special chart change pattern designation command is sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to determine the change performance pattern, which is the performance mode of the change performance.

In step S313-7, the main CPU 110a increments by +1 the number of times the special symbol has changed since the specified condition was met (RWM cleared, the number of times the special symbol has changed since the end of the jackpot game was cleared to 0) stored in the main RAM 110c. Note that the number of times the special symbol has changed is incremented by +1 regardless of whether the game is in a normal game mode, a time-saving game mode, or whether the first special symbol or second special symbol has changed. Note that this number of times the special symbol has changed is referenced in the special symbol change process described below.

In step S313-8, the main CPU 110a judges whether or not the current state is a time-saving game state. If the current state is not a time-saving game state, the current special symbol variation pattern judgment table is terminated, and if the current state is a time-saving game state, in step S313-9, a time-saving number designation command corresponding to the remaining number of time-saving special symbol times (J), which is the remaining number of time-saving times for the special symbol, is set in the performance transmission data storage area. This causes the time-saving number designation command to be sent to the performance control board 130, making it possible for the performance control board 130 to grasp the remaining number of time-saving times for the special symbol. When this process is completed, the current special symbol variation pattern judgment process is terminated.

In this embodiment, in order to prevent the occurrence of a high probability game state (high probability time-saving game state) in which the probability of determining a jackpot is higher than in the normal game state, the number of fluctuations is updated by +1 regardless of the game state. However, if a high probability game state different from the normal time-saving game state is to be generated after the end of a jackpot game state (for example, after the end of a second jackpot game), it is advisable not to update the number of fluctuations in the high probability game state.

In addition, a command indicating the remaining number of times for the time-saving special chart (J) is sent as the time-saving number designation command, but it is also possible to send commands indicating not only the remaining number of times for the time-saving special chart (J) but also the remaining number of times for the time-saving small win (Z) or the remaining number of times for the time-saving normal chart (G).

In addition, during the time-saving play state, a time-saving number designation command indicating the remaining number of times (J) for the time-saving special chart is transmitted. However, since the remaining number of times (J) for the time-saving special chart is not notified during the time-saving play state (only the remaining number of times (G) for the time-saving normal chart is notified), it is also possible not to transmit the time-saving number designation command indicating the remaining number of times (J) for the time-saving special chart.

(Normal special chart variation pattern determination table)
FIG. 21 is a normal special symbol variation pattern determination table that is referenced when determining the variation pattern of the special symbol in the normal game state.

Specifically, FIG. 21(a) is a normal special symbol change pattern determination table 1 that is referenced when there is no jackpot history information in the main RAM 110c, or when there is jackpot history information and the number of times the special symbol has changed up to the third time-saving play state is 51 or more, and when the special symbol change display is executed (in normal presentation modes A to D), and FIG. 21(b) is a normal special symbol change pattern determination table 2 that is referenced when there is jackpot history information in the main RAM 110c and the number of times the special symbol has changed up to the third time-saving play state is 50 or less, and when the change display is executed (in the countdown mode described below).

(Special chart fluctuation pattern determination table for time reduction)
FIG. 22 is a special symbol variation pattern determination table for time-saving play, which is referenced when determining the variation pattern of special symbols during time-saving play.

Specifically, FIG. 22(a) is a special symbol change pattern determination table 1 for time-saving that is referenced when executing a change display of a special symbol during the time-saving game state (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state) after the end of a jackpot game with a first special symbol, and FIG. 22(b) is a special symbol change pattern determination table 2 for time-saving that is referenced when executing a change display of a special symbol during the time-saving game state (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state) after the end of a jackpot game with a second special symbol or during the third time-saving game state.

As shown in Figures 21 and 22, the special symbol variation pattern determination table associates the type of special symbol (starting hole) that performs the variation display, the result of the jackpot determination, the result of the special symbol determination (stop special symbol data), a random number value for reach determination, the first reserved memory (U1) or the second reserved memory (U2), a random number value for determining the special symbol variation pattern, the special symbol variation pattern as the determination result, and the variation time of the special symbol, and for reference, the contents of the variation performance are listed.

Therefore, a "special symbol variation pattern" can be said to be capable of identifying at least the type of special symbol, the result of the jackpot determination, the type of special symbol, and the variation time of the special symbol. In addition, as will be described in detail later, since a jackpot game or a small jackpot game is executed depending on the type of special symbol, it can also be said to be capable of identifying the type (number of rounds) of the jackpot game or small jackpot game. In addition, since the number of time-saving game states (time-saving number of times) is set at the end of a jackpot game depending on the type of special symbol, it can also be said to be capable of identifying the number of time-saving times.

The "normal variation", "shortened variation", and "ultra-shortened variation" as the presentation contents shown in the special pattern variation pattern determination table shown in Figures 21 and 22 mean that a variation presentation is executed in which the three presentation patterns 70a vary independently at high speed and stop without reaching a reach.

"Reach" refers to a variation mode that makes the player expect a jackpot game or an auxiliary game in which the second starting hole 47 is opened for a long time, in which some of the combinations of performance symbols 70a that indicate a jackpot with a special symbol or a jackpot with a normal symbol temporarily stop and other performance symbols 70a change. For example, when a combination of three performance symbols 70a, "777," is set as the combination of performance symbols 70a that indicate a jackpot (jackpot result mode), the same performance symbol 70a temporarily stops at "7" in the left and right areas, and the remaining performance symbols 70a change in the center area.

Nine combinations of the performance symbols 70a that indicate a jackpot (jackpot result mode) are set from "111" to "999," and seven combinations of the performance symbols 70a that indicate a jackpot that will cause the second starting hole 47 to open long (win result mode) are set: "111," "222," "444," "555," "666," "888," and "999." Some of these combinations overlap, but it is also possible to use odd-numbered combinations of the performance symbols 70a that indicate a jackpot and even-numbered combinations of the performance symbols 70a that indicate a jackpot that will cause the second starting hole 47 to open long, so that the two do not overlap.

"Temporary stop" refers to a state in which the performance pattern 70a sways slightly or deforms slightly, making it appear to the player that the performance pattern 70a is stopped (but is not completely stopped).

"Normal reach" refers to a reach effect in which the same effect pattern 70a temporarily stops in the left and right areas, and the remaining effect pattern 70a fluctuates in the center area, and this is the reach with the lowest expectation of a jackpot. Note that in this embodiment, a "normal reach" does not result in a jackpot, but it may be configured so that a jackpot occurs with a "normal reach."

"SP Reach" is a super reach that occurs after a normal reach and has a higher chance of resulting in a jackpot than a normal reach.

An "SPSP reach" is a special reach that occurs after a normal reach or a super reach and has a higher chance of winning than a super reach. For example, the three performance symbols 70a shrink and move to the corners of the image display device, creating a more special performance than an "SP reach" using almost the entire display area of the image display device.

The "full rotation reach" is a reach that occurs after a normal reach or a super reach, and guarantees a big win. For example, from a blackout effect, the three effect patterns 70a all move at a slow speed while being identical, and a more special effect than the "SPSP reach" is produced using almost the entire display area of the image display device.

The "special effect" is an effect that notifies the player that a big win or small win game will be played by displaying "BONUS approaching" without a reach effect. Note that the "BONUS approaching" may be displayed while a reach effect is being played.

The "short stock chance variation" is a chance presentation that aims to execute an auxiliary game in which the game ball passes through the normal pattern gate 44 to open the second starting hole 47 in a long opening pattern, thereby informing the player that there is a chance to increase the second reserved memory (U2) (stock reserved memory) in order to execute a variable display of the second special pattern, which is almost always a big win or a small win.

The "middle stock chance variation" is a chance presentation that aims to execute an auxiliary game in which the game ball passes through the normal pattern gate 44 to open the second starting hole 47 in a long opening pattern for a longer period of time than the short stock chance variation, thereby informing the player that there is a chance to increase the second reserved memory (U2) (stock reserved memory) in order to execute a variable display of the second special pattern, which is almost always a big win or a small win.

The "long stock chance variation" is a chance presentation that aims to execute an auxiliary game in which the game ball passes through the normal pattern gate 44 to open the second starting hole 47 in a long opening pattern for a longer period of time than the middle stock chance variation, thereby informing the player that there is a chance to increase the second reserved memory (U2) (stock reserved memory) in order to execute a variable display of the second special pattern, which is almost always a big win or a small win.

The first feature of the special symbol variation pattern determination table shown in Figures 21 and 22 is that in normal game mode, the special symbol variation pattern determination table can be switched depending on the number of times the special symbol varies from the establishment of a predetermined condition (RWM clear, end of jackpot game). In this way, it is possible to execute the variation display of the special symbol in a manner that is unlikely to tire the player, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The second feature of the special symbol variation pattern determination table shown in Figures 21 and 22 is that in the normal game state, the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined using a different special symbol variation pattern determination table depending on whether or not the game is in a countdown mode in which a countdown display is performed to the third time-saving game state. In this way, the variation pattern of the special symbol can be used to appeal to the player that the occurrence of the third time-saving game state is approaching, and the variation pattern of the special symbol can be switched depending on the switching of the presentation mode, making the game more interesting.

The third feature of the special symbol variation pattern determination table shown in Figures 21 and 22 is that in the time-saving game state, the special symbol variation pattern determination table is not switched depending on the number of times the special symbol varies. By doing so, it is possible to realize a different gameplay from the normal game state, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

The fourth feature of the special symbol variation pattern determination table shown in Figures 21 and 22 is that, while a reach effect is executed when the variation display of a special symbol is executed in the normal game state, a reach effect is not executed when the variation display of a special symbol is executed in the time-saving game state. In this way, in the normal game state, the player's attention is drawn to the variation effect executed during the variation display of a special symbol, and in the time-saving game state, the player's attention is drawn to the variation effect executed during the variation display of a normal symbol, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The fifth feature of the special symbol change pattern determination table shown in Figures 21 and 22 is that in the time-saving game state, a special symbol change pattern with a longer change time is more likely to be executed when a jackpot is reached as a result of the change display of the second special symbol than when a jackpot is reached as a result of the change display of the first special symbol. This makes it easier to enhance the presentation effect when a jackpot is reached as a result of the change display of the second special symbol, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The sixth feature of the special symbol change pattern determination table shown in Figures 21 and 22 is that in the time-saving game mode, a special symbol change pattern with a longer change time is more likely to be executed when the change display of the second special symbol results in a jackpot than when the change display of the second special symbol results in a small jackpot. This makes it easier to enhance the presentation effect when the change display of the second special symbol results in a jackpot, making the game more interesting.

In the normal game state, the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table is switched only once, but it may be switched multiple times (for example, three times at 250 times, 500 times, and 750 times) depending on the number of times the special symbol changes, or in the time-saving game state, the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table may be switched once or multiple times depending on the number of times the special symbol changes, but it is preferable that the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table is less likely to switch in the time-saving game state than in the normal game state (e.g., it is easier to switch the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table in the normal game state).

In addition, a reach effect may be executed when the variable display of a special pattern is executed in the time-saving play state. In this case, the reach effect may be executed with a lower probability than in the normal play state even if the same judgment result (jackpot, miss) is obtained, and the reach effect may be executed more easily in the case of a jackpot than in the case of a small win (the probability of execution may be made higher in the case of a jackpot, or it may not be executed in the case of a small win, etc.).

In addition, in the normal game state, if there is no jackpot history, the normal special chart fluctuation pattern determination table 1 in FIG. 21(a) is used, while if there is a jackpot history, the normal special chart fluctuation pattern determination table 2 in FIG. 21(b) is used. However, even if there is no jackpot history, if there is a small jackpot history (such as a case where a small jackpot game was executed but a jackpot game was not executed), the normal special chart fluctuation pattern determination table 2 in FIG. 21(b) may be used.

(Special chart advance judgment table)
Figure 23 is a special chart pre-determination table that is referenced when pre-determining (reading ahead) special chart determination information obtained based on the entry of a game ball into the starting hole.

Specifically, FIG. 23(a) is a normal special symbol pre-determination table 1 that is referenced when the game is in a normal game state and there is no jackpot history information in the main RAM 110c, or when there is jackpot history information and the number of times the special symbol has changed up to the third time-saving game state is 51 or more, and FIG. 23(b) is a normal special symbol pre-determination table 2 that is referenced when the game is in a normal game state and there is jackpot history information in the main RAM 110c and the number of times the special symbol has changed up to the third time-saving game state is 50 or less.

In addition, FIG. 23(c) is a special pattern pre-determination table 1 for time-saving that is referenced during the time-saving game state (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state) after the end of a jackpot game with the first special pattern, and FIG. 23(d) is a special pattern pre-determination table 2 for time-saving that is referenced during the time-saving game state (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state) after the end of a jackpot game with the second special pattern or during the third time-saving game state.

As shown in FIG. 23, the special symbol advance determination table associates the game state, the type of special symbol (starting hole), the result of the jackpot determination (random number value for jackpot determination), the result of the special symbol determination (random number value for special symbol determination), the random number value for reach determination, the random number value for special symbol fluctuation pattern determination, the planned special symbol fluctuation pattern as the determination result, and the look-ahead information corresponding to the planned special symbol fluctuation pattern, and the performance content is listed for reference.

Therefore, the "special symbol planned change pattern" and "preview information" can be said to be capable of identifying at least the type of special symbol, the result of the jackpot determination, the type of special symbol, and the planned special symbol change pattern. In addition, as will be described in detail later, since a jackpot game or a small jackpot game is executed depending on the type of special symbol, it can also be said to be capable of identifying the type (number of rounds) of a jackpot game or a small jackpot game. In addition, since the number of time-saving game states (time-saving number of times) is set at the end of a jackpot game depending on the type of special symbol, it can also be said to be capable of identifying the number of time-saving number of times.

(Special pattern change processing on the main control board)
The special symbol variation process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to Fig. 24. Fig. 24 is a flow chart showing the special symbol variation process in the main control board 110.

First, in step S320-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether the change time set in the special symbol change pattern determination process described above has elapsed. If the change time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S320-2, and if the change time has not elapsed, the current special symbol change process is terminated.

In step S320-2, the main CPU 110a stops the display of the special symbol determined in the jackpot determination process described above, and in step S320-3, sets the stop time according to the game status in a specified area of the main RAM 110c. Specifically, if the display shows the final variation in the time-saving game state, 8.0 seconds is set, and if the display shows any other variation, 0.5 seconds is set.

In step S320-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether a time-saving flag (either the first time-saving flag, the second time-saving flag, or the third time-saving flag) is set in the main RAM 110c. If the time-saving flag is set, the process proceeds to step S320-5 to update the remaining number of time-saving special drawings (J) and/or the remaining number of time-saving small wins (Z), and if the time-saving flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S320-11 to not update the remaining number of time-saving special drawings (J) and/or the remaining number of time-saving small wins (Z).

In step S320-5, the main CPU 110a subtracts "1" from the remaining number of times the time-saving special symbol is played (J), which is the number of times the time-saving special symbol is played, saved in the main RAM 110c, regardless of whether the stopped special symbol is the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and in step S320-6, determines whether the remaining number of times the time-saving special symbol is played (J) has become "0". If the remaining number of times the time-saving special symbol is played becomes "0", the time-saving game state is terminated and processing proceeds to step S320-10, and if the remaining number of times the time-saving special symbol is not "0", processing proceeds to step S320-7.

In step S320-7, the main CPU 110a determines whether the stopped special symbol is a small win special symbol. If it is not a small win special symbol, the process proceeds to step S320-11, assuming that the condition for terminating the time-saving game state other than for a big win has not been met. If it is a small win special symbol, in step S320-8, the remaining number of time-saving small wins (Z), which is the number of time-saving times for the small win game saved in the main RAM 110c, is decremented by "1".

In step S320-9, the main CPU 110a determines whether the remaining number of short-time wins (Z) has become "0." If the remaining number of short-time wins (Z) has become "0," the time-saving game state is to be ended and processing proceeds to step S320-10. If the remaining number of short-time wins (Z) has not become "0," the condition for ending the time-saving game state other than for a big win is not met and processing proceeds to step S320-11.

In step S320-10, the main CPU 110a clears the time-saving flag and each remaining number of time-saving reels (remaining number of time-saving special reels (J), remaining number of time-saving small wins (Z), remaining number of time-saving regular reels (G)) from the main RAM 110c, ends the time-saving game state, and transitions to the normal game state.

In step S320-11, the main CPU 110a determines whether the special symbol that has stopped and been displayed is a special jackpot symbol. If it is not a special jackpot symbol, the process proceeds to step S320-13. If it is a special jackpot symbol, in step S320-12, the time-saving flag and each remaining number of time-saving plays (remaining number of time-saving special symbols (J), remaining number of time-saving small wins (Z), remaining number of time-saving normal symbols (G)) are cleared from the main RAM 110c, the time-saving play state is ended, and a transition to the normal play state (low-probability non-time-saving play state) is made.

In step S320-13, the main CPU 110a determines whether the number of variations (the combined number of consecutive miss variations of the first special symbol and the second special symbol) saved in the main RAM 110c has reached a specified number (750 times). If the number of variations has reached the specified number, the third time-saving game state is to be started and processing proceeds to step S320-14. If the number of variations has not reached the specified number, the third time-saving game state is not to be started and processing proceeds to step S320-17.

In step S320-14, the main CPU 110a sets the remaining number of time-saving plays for the third time-saving game state in the main RAM 110c (remaining number of time-saving special plays (J) = 10, remaining number of time-saving small wins (Z) = 3, remaining number of time-saving regular plays (G) = 999), and in step S320-15, sets the third time-saving flag in the main RAM 110c to transition to the third time-saving game state, and in step S320-16, sets a time-saving play count designation command in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. This causes the time-saving play count designation command to be sent to the performance control board 130, which then updates the remaining number of time-saving plays and notifies the player of the remaining number of time-saving plays.

In step S320-17, the main CPU 110a sets the special symbol special signal processing data to "2", and in step S320-18, sets a game state designation command corresponding to the current game state (the game state identified from the presence or absence of the time-saving flag) in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. This causes the game state designation command to be sent to the performance control board 130, and processing to update the game state is performed on the performance control board 130. When this processing is completed, the current special symbol variation processing ends.

In this way, when the remaining number of times for the time-saving special symbol (J) becomes "0" during the time-saving play state, the time-saving play state (first time-saving play state, second time-saving play state, third time-saving play state) ends even if the remaining number of times for the time-saving small win symbol (Z) or the remaining number of times for the time-saving normal symbol (G) remain. Therefore, the time-saving play state can be ended according to the progress of the game (the execution status of the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol), which makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, regardless of whether the first or second special symbol is displayed during the time-saving game state, the remaining number of times the time-saving special symbol can be displayed (J) is subtracted. This makes it possible to provide a fair game by preventing the player from gaining an advantage in the game results depending on the playing method used by the player, and to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, when the remaining number of times for the time-saving small win (Z) becomes "0" during the time-saving play state, the time-saving play state (first time-saving play state, second time-saving play state, third time-saving play state) is ended even if the remaining number of times for the time-saving special pattern (J) or the remaining number of times for the time-saving normal pattern (G) remains. Therefore, even if the player tries to play advantageously (whether to pass the game ball through the specific area 53 in a small win game or aim for an advantageous jackpot) by referring to the type of the special pattern (combination of the performance patterns 70a) displayed in the pre-reading performance or the stop display, it is possible to prevent the player from gaining an excessive advantage depending on the play method during the time-saving play state, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, when the total number of consecutive times of the first special symbol and the second special symbol missing variable display executed from the establishment of the first condition (RWM clear) reaches a specified number (the specified number of times of the special symbol variable display is a missing result), and when the total number of consecutive times of the first special symbol and the second special symbol missing variable display executed from the establishment of the second condition (the number of variations is cleared to 0 due to the end of the jackpot game) reaches a specified number (the specified number of times of the special symbol variable display is a missing result), it is possible to generate a third time-saving game state for a specified period (until any of the remaining number of time-saving special symbols (J), the remaining number of time-saving small jackpots (Z), and the remaining number of time-saving normal symbols (G) reaches "0"). Therefore, it is possible to give the player the unexpectedness of the time-saving state occurring without going through a jackpot game, which makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, the remaining number of times (J) for the time-saving special symbols, which is set when the third time-saving game state occurs, is set to a value greater than the upper limit of the number of memories "4" in the first reserved memory (U1) and the second reserved memory (U2). Therefore, it is possible to prevent inconveniences such as the third time-saving game state ending due to the execution of the variable display of the special symbol based on the reserved memory stored at the time the third time-saving game state occurs, and it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

In addition, the remaining number of short-time wins (Z) that is set when the third time-saving game state occurs is a value greater than 1. This prevents inconveniences such as a short-time win being executed without the player understanding the situation after the third time-saving game state occurs, and the player being unable to pass the game ball through the specific area 53, resulting in the third time-saving game state ending, making it possible to increase interest in the game.

In addition, when the third time-saving game state occurs, the number of fluctuations stored in the main RAM 110c is not cleared to 0. Therefore, the third time-saving game state will not occur again between big wins (after the special time-saving game state starts or ends), which ensures a balance of profits between the gaming facility and the player, and also makes it possible to increase interest in the game.

When the third time-shortened game state occurs, the number of fluctuations stored in the main RAM 110c may be cleared to 0, and a third time-shortened game state occurring flag indicating that the third time-shortened game state has occurred may be set in the main RAM 110c. In this case, if the third time-shortened game state occurring flag is not present when the number of fluctuations reaches the specified number (750 times), the number of fluctuations may be cleared to 0 to cause the third time-shortened game state to occur, and if the third time-shortened game state occurring flag is present, the number of fluctuations may be cleared to 0 to prevent the third time-shortened game state from occurring.

When the third time-saving game state occurs, the remaining number of times for the time-saving special game (J) is set to 10 times so that the third time-saving game state does not end immediately, but it may be more than the upper limit memory number "4" of the first reserved memory (U1) and the second reserved memory (U2), and it may be more than 10 times or less. When the third time-saving game state occurs, the remaining number of times for the time-saving small win is set to 3 times so that the third time-saving game state does not end immediately, but it may be more than 1 time, and it may be more than 3 times or less. When the third time-saving game state occurs, the remaining number of times for the time-saving normal game (G) is set to 999 times, but it may be a value different from the remaining number of times for the time-saving special game (J) and the remaining number of times for the time-saving small win (Z), and it may be more than 999 times or less.

In addition, during the special symbol change process (when the special symbol starts to stop displaying), the third time-saving game state is generated and various time-saving game states are terminated, but during the special symbol stop process (when the special symbol stops displaying), which will be described later, the third time-saving game state may be generated and various time-saving game states may be terminated.

(Special pattern stop processing of main control board)
The special symbol stop processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to Fig. 25. Fig. 25 is a flow chart showing the special symbol stop processing in the main control board 110.

First, in step S330-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether the stop time set in the special symbol variation process described above has elapsed. If the stop time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S330-2, and if the stop time has not elapsed, the current special symbol stop process is terminated.

In step S330-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a special jackpot symbol is displayed. If it is, the process proceeds to step S330-3. If it is not (it is) a special jackpot symbol (it is) a special small jackpot symbol or a special miss symbol, the process proceeds to step S330-5.

In step S330-3, the main CPU 110a performs a jackpot opening transition process, such as selecting jackpot game control data (maximum number of rounds, maximum number of winnings, opening time, etc.) corresponding to the stop special symbol data (special jackpot symbol) from the jackpot game jackpot opening control data determination table (see FIG. 26(a)) for executing a jackpot game, and in step S330-4, sets "3" to the special symbol special power processing data in order to transition to jackpot game processing, and proceeds to step S330-8. Details of the jackpot game jackpot opening control data determination table will be described later.

In step S330-5, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a small win special symbol is displayed. If it is a small win special symbol, the process proceeds to step S330-6. If it is not a small win special symbol (if it is a losing special symbol), the process proceeds to step S330-10.

In step S330-6, the main CPU 110a performs a small win opening transition process, such as selecting control data (maximum number of winnings, opening time, etc.) for the small win game corresponding to the stop special symbol data (special small win symbol) from the large win port control data determination table for small win game (see FIG. 26(b)) for executing the small win game, and in step S330-7, sets "4" to the special symbol special power processing data to transition to the small win game, and proceeds to step S330-8.

In step S330-8, the main CPU 110a sets the opening time corresponding to the selected control data in the main RAM 110c, and in step S330-9, sets the opening designation command in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. This causes the opening designation command to be sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to execute the opening performance of the big win game or small win game. When this processing is completed, the current special pattern stop processing ends.

In step S330-10, the main CPU 110a sets the special symbol special signal processing data to "0" to move processing to the special symbol memory determination process, and ends this special symbol stop process.

(Control Data Table)
Figure 26(a) is a diagram showing a large prize opening control data judgment table for jackpot play for controlling the large prize opening during jackpot play (special play), Figure 26(b) is a diagram showing a large prize opening control data judgment table for small prize play for controlling the large prize opening during small prize play, and Figure 26(c) is a diagram showing a specific area control data judgment table for small prize play for controlling a specific area during small prize play.

As shown in FIG. 26(a), the big prize opening control data judgment table for big prize play corresponds to the special stop data of the special pattern, the maximum number of rounds in a big prize play, the maximum number of winning balls in a big prize opening in one round play, the opening time from the start of a big prize play until the first round play is executed, the type of big prize opening that opens in each round play, the maximum number of openings of the big prize opening in each round play, the opening time of the big prize opening for one opening of each round play, the interval time during which the big prize opening is closed after the end of a round play (the time required to eject the game balls from the big prize opening), and the ending time from the end of the final round play until the end of the big prize play.

When the special stop data is "01", a first jackpot game is played in which five rounds of play are played, when the special stop data is "02", five rounds of play are played and a second jackpot game is played in which the state after the jackpot game is more favorable to the player than the first jackpot game, when the special stop data is "03" or "11", ten rounds of play are played and a third jackpot game is played in which the state after the jackpot game is more favorable to the player than the first or second jackpot game.

In addition, when the stop special chart data is "12", the remaining five rounds of play are played via the small win game, which is the first round of play, and the fourth jackpot game is executed, in which the state after the jackpot game is more disadvantageous to the player than the third jackpot game.

The big prize entry port control data judgment table for big prize games shown in FIG. 26(a) has the feature that it is easier to play the maximum number of rounds (10 rounds) of big prize games when playing a big prize game (fourth to fifth big prize games) based on winning at the second start port 47 than when playing a big prize game based on winning at the first start port 45. By doing this, it is possible to make the gameplay different between when the game ball wins at the first start port 45 and when the game ball wins at the second start port 47, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

As shown in FIG. 26(b), the large prize opening control data judgment table for small prize games associates the special stop data of the special pattern (type of small prize game), the maximum number of times the large prize opening can be opened in a small prize game, the maximum number of prizes won into the large prize opening in a small prize game, the opening time until the large prize opening is converted to an open state, the type of large prize opening to be opened, the opening time of the large prize opening for one opening, the interval time during which the large prize opening is closed (the time required to eject the game balls from inside the large prize opening), and the ending time from the final closure of the large prize opening to the end of the small prize game.

The large prize opening control data judgment table for small prize games shown in FIG. 26(b) has the following feature: the interval time during which the first large prize opening 50 is closed is set to a time during which at least one game ball is rolling on the top surface of the first large prize opening opening/closing member 51 from the start to the end of the interval (0.82 seconds for an interval of 0.67 seconds). By doing this, the opening time of the first large prize opening 50 can be shortened, and the number of times the first large prize opening is opened can be increased within the predetermined maximum opening time of the large prize opening in small prize games (1.8 seconds), making the game more interesting.

As shown in FIG. 26(c), the specific area control data judgment table for small win games associates the special stop data of the special pattern (type of small win game), the maximum number of times the specific area 53 opens in a small win game, the opening timing of the specific area 53, and the closing timing of the specific area 53.

In a small win game, regardless of the type of small win game, the specific area 53 is converted to an open state when the large prize winning opening is opened in the small win game, and the specific area 53 is converted to a closed state when the large prize winning opening is closed.

The specific area control data judgment table for small win games shown in FIG. 26(c) has the following feature: the timing for opening and closing the specific area 53 is set so that a game ball that enters the first large winning port 50 during a small win game passes through the specific area 53 with a probability of nearly 100% (1/1). This allows the player to play the small win game with peace of mind, making it possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

In addition, instead of opening and closing the specific area 53 so that the game ball that enters the first large winning port 50 during a small win game passes through the specific area 53 with a probability of almost 100% (1/1), the specific area 53 may be opened and closed with a probability of 50% (1/2) or 25% (1/4).

In addition, there may be multiple types of small prize games, and depending on the type of small prize game, there may be a case where the specific area 53 is opened or closed so that a game ball that has entered the first large prize opening 50 has a probability of passing through the specific area 53 of approximately 100% (1/1) (e.g., a second small prize game), and a case where the specific area 53 is opened or closed so that a game ball that has entered the first large prize opening 50 has a probability of passing through the specific area 53 of 25% (1/4) (e.g., a third small prize game).

(Jackpot Game Processing on the Main Control Board)
The big win game processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to Fig. 27. Fig. 27 is a flow chart showing the big win game processing in the main control board 110.

First, in step S340-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the opening is currently in progress. Specifically, it determines whether or not the opening time set in the special symbol stop process described above is equal to or greater than "0". If the opening is in progress, the process proceeds to step S340-2, and if the opening is not in progress, the process proceeds to step S340-5.

In step S340-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether the opening time set in the special symbol stop process described above has elapsed. If the opening time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S340-3. If the opening time has not elapsed, the current jackpot game process is terminated.

In step S340-3, the main CPU 110a performs a round play transition process. Specifically, it adds "1" to the number of round play times (R) stored in the main RAM 110c, and sets a round in progress flag in the main RAM 110c to indicate that a round play is in progress.

In step S340-4, the main CPU 110a sets a round designation command corresponding to the number of rounds played (R) in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and ends the current jackpot game processing. This causes the round designation command to be sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to execute a round performance corresponding to the current round of play.

In step S340-5, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a round of play is currently in progress. Specifically, it determines whether or not a round-in-progress flag is set in the main RAM 110c. If a round of play is in progress, the process proceeds to step S340-6. If a round of play is not in progress, the process proceeds to step S340-12.

In step S340-6, the main CPU 110a determines whether the conditions for opening the large prize opening have been met. Specifically, it determines whether the time elapsed since the start of the current round of play has reached the timing for opening the large prize opening specified by the control data for the large prize game. If the conditions for opening the large prize opening have been met, the process proceeds to step S340-7. If the conditions for opening the large prize opening have not been met, the process proceeds to step S340-8.

The main CPU 110a performs a large prize opening process in step S340-7. Specifically, it identifies the type of large prize opening to be opened (first large prize opening 50 or second large prize opening 56) and the opening time of the current large prize opening (first large prize opening 50 or second large prize opening 56) from the control data for the large prize game, and sets the opening time of the large prize opening and the drive data for the large prize opening opening solenoid (first large prize opening opening solenoid 51b or second large prize opening opening solenoid 57b) in the main RAM 110c. This converts the large prize opening into an open state.

In step S340-8, the main CPU 110a determines whether the conditions for closing the large prize opening have been met. Specifically, it determines whether the current opening of the large prize opening is the opening before the final opening in the current round of play, and whether that opening time has elapsed. If the conditions for closing the large prize opening have been met, processing proceeds to step S340-9, and if the conditions for closing the large prize opening have not been met, processing proceeds to step S340-10.

The main CPU 110a performs a large prize opening closing process in step S340-9. Specifically, it identifies the interval time (closing time) of the current large prize opening (first large prize opening 50 or second large prize opening 56) from the control data for the large prize game, sets the interval time (closing time) of the large prize opening in the main RAM 110c, and clears the drive data for the large prize opening opening/closing solenoid set in the main RAM 110c. This converts the large prize opening to a closed state.

In step S340-10, the main CPU 110a determines whether the condition for transitioning to an interval has been met. Specifically, it determines whether the number of game balls that have entered the large prize opening (first large prize opening 50 or second large prize opening 56) in the current round of play has reached the maximum number of winning balls or whether the opening time for the final opening of the large prize opening in the current round of play has elapsed. If the condition for transitioning to an interval has been met, processing proceeds to step S340-11, and if the condition for transitioning to an interval has not been met, processing for the current large prize game is terminated.

The main CPU 110a performs interval transition processing in step S340-11. Specifically, it identifies the current interval time (the time when the large prize opening is closed) from the control data for the large prize game, sets the interval time in a specified area of the main RAM 110c, and clears the drive data for the large prize opening solenoid set in the main RAM 110c. This converts the large prize opening into a closed state. It also sets an interval in progress flag, indicating that an interval is in progress, in place of the round in progress flag stored in the main RAM 110c. When the interval transition processing is completed, the current large prize game processing is terminated.

In step S340-12, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the current time is during an interval. Specifically, it determines whether or not an interval flag is set in the RWM area of the main RAM 110c. If the current time is during an interval, the process proceeds to step S340-13. If the current time is not during an interval, the process proceeds to step S340-19.

In step S340-13, the main CPU 110a determines whether the interval time has elapsed. If the interval time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S340-14. If the interval time has not elapsed, the process for this jackpot game ends.

In step S340-14, the main CPU 110a determines whether the final round of play in the current jackpot game has ended. If the final round of play has ended, the process proceeds to step S340-17. If the final round of play has not ended, the process proceeds to step S340-15.

The main CPU 110a performs a round play transition process in step S340-15. Specifically, it adds "1" to the number of round play times (R) stored in the RWM area of the main RAM 110c. It also sets a round play in progress flag in place of the interval in progress flag stored in the RWM area of the main RAM 110c.

In step S340-16, the main CPU 110a sets a round designation command corresponding to the number of rounds played (R) in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and ends the current jackpot game processing. This causes the round designation command to be sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to execute a round performance corresponding to the current round of play.

The main CPU 110a performs ending transition processing in step S340-17. Specifically, it identifies the current ending time from the control data for the big win game, and sets the ending time in the RWM area of the main RAM 110c. It also sets an ending in progress flag, indicating that the ending is in progress, in place of the interval in progress flag stored in the main RAM 110c.

In step S340-18, the main CPU 110a sets an ending designation command indicating that this is the ending of the jackpot game in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and ends the current jackpot game processing. This causes the ending designation command to be sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to execute an ending performance that corresponds to the current jackpot game or small jackpot game.

In step S340-19, the main CPU 110a determines whether the game is currently ending. Specifically, it determines whether the ending flag is set in the RWM area of the main RAM 110c. If the game is currently ending, the process proceeds to step S340-20. If the game is not currently ending, the current jackpot game process ends.

In step S340-20, the main CPU 110a determines whether the ending time has elapsed. If the ending time has not elapsed, the current jackpot game processing is terminated. If the ending time has elapsed, in step S340-21, the special chart special signal processing data is set to "5" to move processing to the jackpot game termination processing, and the current jackpot game processing is terminated.

(Small win game processing of the main control board)
The small win game processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to Fig. 28. Fig. 28 is a flow chart showing the small win game ending processing in the main control board 110.

First, in step S350-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the opening is currently in progress. Specifically, it determines whether or not the opening time set in the special symbol stop process described above is equal to or greater than "0". If the opening is in progress, the process proceeds to step S350-2, and if the opening is not in progress, the process proceeds to step S350-4.

In step S350-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether the opening time set in the special symbol stop processing described above has elapsed. If the opening time has elapsed, in step S350-3, an open/close game in progress flag is set in the main RAM 110c to indicate that an open/close game in which the large prize opening is opened and closed is in progress, and if the opening time has not elapsed, the current small prize game processing is terminated.

In step S350-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the special prize opening is being opened or closed. If it is being opened or closed, the process proceeds to step S350-5. If it is not being opened or closed, the process proceeds to step S350-21.

In step S350-5, the main CPU 110a determines whether the conditions for opening the large prize opening have been met. Specifically, it determines whether the opening or interval of the small prize game has ended. If the conditions for opening the large prize opening have been met, the process proceeds to step S350-6. If the conditions for opening the large prize opening have not been met, the process proceeds to step S350-7.

The main CPU 110a performs a large prize opening process in step S350-6. Specifically, it specifies the type of large prize opening to be opened (first large prize opening 50 or second large prize opening 56) from the control data for the small prize game shown in FIG. 28(b) and the opening time of the current large prize opening (first large prize opening 50 or second large prize opening 56), and sets the opening time of the large prize opening and the drive data for the large prize opening opening solenoid (first large prize opening opening solenoid 51b or second large prize opening opening solenoid 57b) in the main RAM 110c. This causes the large prize opening to be converted into an open state.

In step S350-7, the main CPU 110a determines whether the conditions for opening the specific area 53 have been met. Specifically, it determines whether the timing for opening the specific area 53 specified by the control data for the specific area shown in FIG. 26(c) (here, the timing for opening the large prize opening) has arrived. If the conditions for opening the specific area 53 have been met, processing proceeds to step S350-8; if the conditions for opening the specific area 53 have not been met, processing proceeds to step S350-9.

The main CPU 110a performs a specific area opening process in step S350-8. Specifically, the drive data for the specific area opening/closing solenoid 53b is set in the RWM area of the main RAM 110c. This causes the specific area 53 to be converted to an open state.

In step S350-9, the main CPU 110a determines whether the conditions for closing the specific area 53 have been met. Specifically, it determines whether the timing for closing the specific area 53 (here, the timing for closing the large prize opening) specified by the control data for the specific area shown in FIG. 26(c) has arrived. If the conditions for closing the specific area 53 have been met, processing proceeds to step S350-10; if the conditions for closing the specific area 53 have not been met, processing proceeds to step S350-11.

The main CPU 110a performs a specific area closing process in step S350-10. Specifically, it clears the drive data for the specific area opening/closing solenoid 53b that is set in the RWM area of the main RAM 110c. This causes the specific area 53 to be converted to a closed state.

In step S350-11, the main CPU 110a determines whether the conditions for closing the large prize opening have been met. Specifically, it determines whether the opening time for the large prize opening has elapsed and whether the number of prizes won through the large prize opening has reached the maximum number of prizes. If the conditions for closing the large prize opening have been met, processing proceeds to step S350-12; if the conditions for closing the large prize opening have not been met, processing proceeds to step S350-13.

The main CPU 110a performs the large prize opening closing process in step S350-12. Specifically, it identifies the interval time (closing time) from the control data for the small prize game shown in FIG. 28(b), sets the interval time for the large prize opening in the main RAM 110c, and clears the drive data for the large prize opening opening solenoid set in the main RAM 110c. This converts the large prize opening to a closed state.

In step S350-13, the main CPU 110a determines whether the final interval time in the small win game has elapsed. If the final interval time has elapsed, in step S350-14, the open/close game in progress flag set in the main RAM 110c is cleared, and if the final interval time has not elapsed, the current small win game processing is terminated.

In step S350-15, the main CPU 110a determines whether the above-mentioned specific area passing flag has been saved in the main RAM 110c. If the specific area passing flag has been saved, the process proceeds to step S350-16 assuming that a jackpot game will be executed when the game ball passes through the specific area 53 during the open/close game, and if the specific area passing flag has not been saved, the process proceeds to step S350-19 assuming that an ending will be executed when the game ball does not pass through the specific area 53 during the open/close game.

The main CPU 110a clears the specific area passing flag saved in the main RAM 110c in step S350-16, and performs a jackpot game transition process in step S350-17. Specifically, the main CPU 110a selects control data (maximum number of rounds, maximum number of winnings, opening time, etc.) corresponding to the stopped special symbol data (stopped special symbol) from the big prize winning port control data judgment table for jackpot games shown in FIG. 26(a), clears the time-saving flag and each remaining number of time-saving symbols (remaining number of time-saving special symbols (J), remaining number of time-saving small wins (Z), remaining number of time-saving normal symbols (G)) saved in the main RAM 110c, and ends the time-saving game state, transitioning to the normal game state (low-probability non-time-saving game state), etc.

In step S350-18, the main CPU 110a sets the special chart special electric processing data to "3" to move processing to the big win game processing, and ends this small win game processing.

The main CPU 110a performs ending transition processing in step S350-19. Specifically, it identifies the current ending time from the control data for the small win game, and sets the ending time in the RWM area of the main RAM 110c.

In step S350-20, the main CPU 110a sets an ending designation command indicating that this is the ending of the small win game in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and ends the current small win game processing. This causes the ending designation command to be sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to execute an ending performance corresponding to the current small win game (such as a disappointment notification performance that notifies players that the game ball did not pass through the specific area 53 during the small win game, more specifically during the open/close game).

In step S350-21, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the game is currently ending. Specifically, it determines whether or not the ending time set in step S350-19 is equal to or greater than "0". If the game is currently ending, the process proceeds to step S350-22. If the game is not currently ending, the current small win game process ends.

In step S350-22, the main CPU 110a determines whether the ending time set in step S350-19 described above has elapsed. If the ending time has not elapsed, the current small win game processing is terminated, and if the ending time has elapsed, in step S350-23, the special symbol special power processing data is set to "0" to move processing to the special symbol memory determination processing, and then the current small win game processing is terminated.

In this way, even if the game ball passes through the specific area 53 during a small win game, the big win game will not be executed until the small win game (conversion game) ends (the first big win opening is opened ten times or ten game balls win). Therefore, the player will not be put at a disadvantage depending on the timing when the game ball passes through the specific area 53, which makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, if the game ball passes through the specific area 53 during a small win game, the big win game is executed without ending the small win game. This prevents the time between the small win game and the big win game from being prolonged, making the game more interesting. Note that the big win game may be executed after the ending of the small win game.

(Main control board jackpot game end processing)
The big win game ending process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to Fig. 29. Fig. 29 is a flow chart showing the big win game ending process in the main control board 110.

First, in step S360-1, the main CPU 110a obtains the special stop symbol data saved in the main RAM 110c, and in step S360-2, it determines whether the special stop symbol data is a special jackpot symbol. If it is a special jackpot symbol, the process proceeds to step S360-3, and if it is not a special jackpot symbol (it is a special small jackpot symbol), the process proceeds to step S360-5.

In step S360-3, the main CPU 110a acquires the game state information at the time of winning the jackpot that is saved in the main RAM 110c, and in step S360-4, selects a first game state setting table (see FIG. 30(a)) for setting the game state after the jackpot based on the game state information at the time of winning the jackpot, and proceeds to step S360-7. Details of the first game state setting table will be described later.

In step S360-5, the main CPU 110a acquires the game state information at the time of passing the specific area saved in the main RAM 110c, and in step S360-6, selects a second game state setting table (see FIG. 30(b)) for setting the game state after the big win based on the game state information at the time of passing the specific area, and proceeds to step S360-7. Details of the second game state setting table will be described later.

In step S360-7, the main CPU 110a compares the acquired game status information, etc. with the selected game status setting table, determines the game status flags (normal flag, first time-saving flag, second time-saving flag) and the remaining number of time-saving plays (remaining number of time-saving special games (J), remaining number of time-saving small wins (Z), remaining number of time-saving normal games (G)) as the game status after the big win, and sets them in the main RAM 110c, and in step S360-8, sets a game status designation command corresponding to the game status flag in the performance transmission data storage area. As a result, the game status designation command is sent to the performance control board 130, and processing to update the game status is performed on the performance control board 130.

In step S360-9, the main CPU 110a sets the special symbol special signal processing data to "0" to move processing to the special symbol memory determination process, and ends the current jackpot game end process.

In this way, at the end of a big win game that is executed when the game ball passes through the specific area 53 during a small win game, it is possible to perform a predetermined process (specifically, a process of determining the game conditions after the big win game (game state, number of time-saving rounds, number of remaining small wins) and setting the determined game conditions in the main RAM 110c) based on the game state when the game ball passed through the specific area during the small win game. Therefore, it is possible to control the game (set the game conditions) by utilizing events that occur during the actual game, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, at the end of a jackpot game that does not go through a small jackpot game, it is possible to carry out a predetermined process (specifically, a process of determining the game conditions after the jackpot game (game state, number of time-saving rounds, number of remaining small jackpots) and setting the determined game conditions in the main RAM 110c) based on the game state when the jackpot was determined. Therefore, it is possible to make the gameplay different depending on whether it is a jackpot game that goes through a small jackpot game or a jackpot game that does not go through a small jackpot game, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, at the end of a big win game that does not involve a small win game, a predetermined process may be performed based on the game state when the big win special symbol is displayed, rather than performing a predetermined process based on the game state when the big win is determined.

(Game Status Setting Table)
Figure 30(a) is a diagram showing a first game status setting table for setting the game status after the end of a jackpot game that does not involve a small win, and Figure 30(b) is a diagram showing a second game status setting table for setting the game status after the end of a jackpot game that involves a small win.

As shown in Figures 30(a) and 30(b), the game status setting table associates the special stop symbol data of the jackpot special symbol, the game status information at the time of winning the jackpot indicating the game status at the time of winning the jackpot, the game status flags to be set (a normal flag indicating a normal game status, a first time-saving flag indicating a first time-saving game status, and a second time-saving flag indicating a second time-saving game status), the remaining number of time-saving special symbols (J) which is the number of times the variable display of the special symbol that ends the time-saving game status, the remaining number of time-saving small jackpots (G) which is the number of small jackpot games that end the time-saving game status, and the remaining number of time-saving normal symbols (G) which is the number of times the variable display of the normal symbol that ends the time-saving game status.

The first feature of the game state setting table shown in FIG. 30 is that there is a jackpot game (first jackpot game) that does not enter a time-saving game state after the jackpot game ends, and there are jackpot games (second to fourth jackpot games) that enter a time-saving game state. This makes it possible to attract the player's interest in the types of jackpot games and increase the excitement of the game.

The second feature of the game state setting table shown in FIG. 30 is that there are jackpot games (second jackpot game, third jackpot game, fourth jackpot game) in which the remaining number of time-saving small wins (Z) set when executed in the time-saving game state is greater than the remaining number of time-saving small wins (Z) set when executed in the normal game state. By doing this, the remaining number of time-saving small wins (Z) set can be made different depending on the type of jackpot game, improving playability and making the game more interesting.

The third feature of the game state setting table shown in FIG. 30 is that there is a jackpot game (fourth jackpot game) in which the number of remaining times for time-saving normal drawings (G) set when executed in the time-saving game state is greater than the number of remaining times for time-saving normal drawings (G) set when executed in the normal game state. By doing this, the number of remaining times for time-saving normal drawings (G) set can be made different depending on the type of jackpot game, improving playability and making the game more interesting.

The fourth feature of the game state setting table shown in FIG. 30 is that, in the time-saving game state, the number of times that the normal symbols change (the number of times that the first game event occurs) reaches a predetermined number (50 or 100 times, in other words, G=0), the number of times that the special symbols change (the number of times that the second game event occurs) reaches a predetermined number (5 times, in other words, J=0), and the number of times that the small win judgment (the number of times that the third game event occurs) that determines that a small win game will be executed reaches a predetermined number (Z=0) can be used to end the time-saving game state. This makes it possible to give the player a sense of excitement about when the time-saving game state will end, and also to suppress the act of selecting a type of small win game (type of big win game) that is directly connected to a big win game and executing a big win game, which is a violation of fair play, and makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The fifth feature of the game state setting table shown in FIG. 30 is that the number of times the special symbol changes (the number of times the second game event occurs = 5 times) that ends the time-saving game state is set to be less than the number of times the normal symbol changes (the number of times the first game event occurs = 50 or 100 times) that ends the time-saving game state. This encourages the player to execute the normal symbol change display rather than the special symbol change display so that the time-saving game state does not end prematurely, providing an unprecedented and innovative time-saving game state playability and making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The sixth feature of the game state setting table shown in FIG. 30 is that the number of times the special symbol changes (number of occurrences of the second game event = 5 times) that ends the time-saving game state is greater than the upper limit of reserved memory (first reserved memory, second reserved memory) memory, which is 4. This makes it possible to avoid the inconvenience of the time-saving game state ending early due to the first reserved memory (U1) that may remain when switching from the normal game state to the time-saving game state being consumed, and makes the game more interesting.

There is only one type of remaining time-saving special symbol count, which is the number of times the special symbol changes to end the time-saving game state, but for example, a first remaining time-saving special symbol count (J1), which is the number of times the first special symbol changes to end the time-saving game state, and a second remaining time-saving special symbol count (J2), which is the number of times the second special symbol changes to end the time-saving game state, may be provided, or a third remaining time-saving special symbol count (J3), which is the number of times the combined first and second special symbols change to end the time-saving game state, may be provided. Even in this case, each remaining time-saving special symbol count J1 to J3 may be set to a smaller value than the remaining time-saving normal symbol count.

In addition, when a jackpot game (first to third jackpot games) that does not involve a small jackpot game is played, the number of times the special symbol changes and displays (remaining number of time-saving special symbols) that ends the time-saving game state does not change regardless of the game state before the jackpot game is played (whether it is a normal game state or a time-saving game state), and when a jackpot game (first to third V jackpot games) that involves a small jackpot game is played, the number of times the special symbol changes and displays (second number of time-saving symbols) that ends the normal time-saving game state may change depending on the game state before the jackpot game is played.

Also, the time-saving game state may be generated after all jackpot games have ended, or in connection with providing multiple small jackpot games, multiple jackpot games that pass through small jackpot games may be provided, and the time-saving game state may not be generated after the jackpot game that passes through the first small jackpot game has ended, and the time-saving game state may be generated after the jackpot game that passes through the second small jackpot game has ended.

(Game state referenced at the end of a big win game without going through a small win game)
Figure 31 is a diagram showing the game state referenced at the end of a jackpot game that does not go through a small jackpot game, where Figure 31(a) is a timing chart when a jackpot variation display is executed in a normal game state, Figure 31(b) is a timing chart when a jackpot variation display is executed in a time-saving game state (before final variation: remaining number of time-saving special charts (J) > 0), and Figure 31(c) is a timing chart when a jackpot variation display is executed in a time-saving game state (final variation: remaining number of time-saving special charts (J) = 0).

The game state that is referenced to set the game conditions (game state, number of time-saving rounds, number of remaining small wins) at the end of a jackpot game that does not involve a small win game is the timing at which a jackpot is determined to have occurred (when the jackpot is won).

As shown in FIG. 31(a), when the jackpot fluctuation display is executed in the normal game state, at the end of the jackpot game at T4, the game conditions (game state, number of various time-saving turns, number of remaining small wins) are set by referring to the game state at the start of the jackpot fluctuation display at T1, that is, at the time when the jackpot was won. In this case, the timing of T1 is the normal game state.

As shown in FIG. 31(b), when the jackpot variation display is executed in the time-saving game state (before the final variation: remaining number of time-saving special charts (J)>0), at the end of the jackpot game at T4, the game conditions (game state, various time-saving number of times, remaining number of small wins) are set by referring to the game state at the start of the jackpot variation display at T1, that is, at the time when the jackpot was won. In this case, the timing of T1 is the time-saving game state.

As shown in FIG. 31(c), when the jackpot variation display is executed in the time-saving game state (final variation: remaining number of time-saving special charts (J) = 0), at the end of the jackpot game at T4, the game conditions (game state, number of various time-saving times, remaining number of small wins) are set by referring to the game state at the start of the jackpot variation display at T1, that is, at the time when the jackpot was won. In this case, the timing of T1 is the time-saving game state.

(Game state referenced at the end of a big win game via a small win game)
Figure 32 is a diagram showing the game state referenced at the end of a big win game that goes through a small win game, where Figure 32(a) is a timing chart when a small win variable display is executed in a normal game state, Figure 32(b) is a timing chart when a small win variable display is executed in a time-saving game state where the time-saving end condition is not met (remaining number of time-saving small wins (Z) > 0), and Figure 32(c) is a timing chart when a small win variable display is executed in a time-saving game state where the time-saving end condition is met (remaining number of time-saving small wins (Z) = 0).

The game state that is referenced to set the game conditions (game state, number of time-saving rounds, number of remaining small wins) at the end of a big win game that has gone through a small win game is the timing when the game ball passes through the specific area 53 during the small win game (when transitioning to the big win game).

As shown in FIG. 32(a), when the small win variable display is executed in the normal game state, at the end of the big win game of T6, the game state when the game ball passed through the specific area 53 during the small win game of T4 is referenced and the game conditions (game state, number of various time-saving times, number of remaining small wins) are set. In this case, since the normal game state has been in place since the start of the small win variable display, the timing of T4 is the normal game state.

As shown in FIG. 32(b), when a small win variable display is executed that does not satisfy the time-saving end condition (remaining number of time-saving small wins (Z)>0) in the time-saving game state, the game state when the game ball passed through the specific area 53 during the small win game of T4 is referenced at the end of the big win game of T6, and the game conditions (game state, various time-saving number of times, remaining number of small wins) are set. In this case, since the various time-saving number of times and the remaining number of small wins are not "0" when the small win variable display of T2 is stopped and the time-saving game state is maintained, the timing of T4 is the time-saving game state. Note that when the game ball passes through the specific area 53 at the timing of T4, a big win game starts and the game transitions to the normal game state, but the time of passing through the specific area 53 is considered to be the time-saving game state before transitioning to the normal game state.

As shown in FIG. 32(c), when a small win variable display is executed in a time-saving game state that satisfies the time-saving end condition (remaining number of time-saving small wins (Z) = 0), at the end of the big win game of T6, the game state when the game ball passed through the specific area 53 during the small win game of T4 is referenced and the game conditions (game state, various number of time-saving times, remaining number of small wins) are set. In this case, when the small win variable display of T2 stops, one of the time-saving times becomes "0", the time-saving game state ends and transitions to the normal game state, so the timing of T4 is the normal game state.

As shown in Figures 31 and 32, the sampling timing (acquisition timing) of the game state referenced to set the game conditions (game state, various time-saving counts, remaining number of small wins) at the end of a jackpot game differs between when the jackpot variation display is executed and a jackpot game is played, and when the small win variation display is executed and a jackpot game is played. Therefore, the gameplay can be made different depending on whether it is a jackpot or a small win, making the game more interesting.

(Main control board general-purpose power control processing)
33, the normal power control process of the main control board 110 will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the normal power control process in the main control board 110.

First, in step S401, the main CPU 110a loads the value of the normal map normal power processing data, and in step S402, references the branch destination address from the loaded normal map normal power processing data, executes the process corresponding to the branch destination address, and ends the current normal map normal power control process.

Specifically, if the normal pattern normal electricity processing data = 0, a normal pattern change process (step S410) is executed to perform a process for executing a change display of the normal pattern based on the reserved memory (normal pattern determination information) and a process for changing the normal pattern normal electricity processing data to "1". Details of the normal pattern change process will be described later.

If the normal map/normal power processing data = 1, auxiliary game processing (step S420) is executed to execute a process for executing an auxiliary game that opens the second starting hole 47 in a predetermined manner, or to change the normal map/normal power processing data to "0", etc.

(Main control board normal pattern change processing)
The normal symbol variation process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to Fig. 34. Fig. 34 is a flow chart showing the normal symbol variation process in the main control board 110.

In step S410-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the normal pattern is being displayed in a changing state. If the normal pattern is being displayed in a changing state, the process proceeds to step S410-19. If the normal pattern is not being displayed in a changing state, the process proceeds to step S410-2.

In step S410-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether the regular symbol reserved memory (F) is 1 or greater. If the regular symbol reserved memory (F) is 1 or greater, the process proceeds to step S410-3, and if the regular symbol reserved memory (F) is not 1 or greater, the regular symbol variation process is terminated.

In step S410-3, the main CPU 110a updates the regular map reserve memory (F) by subtracting "1", and in step S410-4, sets a regular map reserve number designation command corresponding to the number in the regular map reserve memory (F) after subtraction in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the regular map reserve number designation command is sent to the performance control board 130, and the image display device displays the reserve corresponding to the regular map reserve memory (F) (displaying the regular map reserve icon, displaying the regular map reserve number display area).

In step S410-5, the main CPU 110a sets a game state designation command corresponding to the current game state in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. This causes the game state designation command to be sent to the performance control board 130, which updates the game state as understood by the performance control board 130 and performs a performance according to the updated game state.

In step S410-6, the main CPU 110a performs a shift process on the data stored in the normal symbol reserve memory area, and shifts the normal symbol determination information stored in the first to fourth memory units to the previous memory unit.

For example, the ordinary map judgment information stored in the fourth memory section of the ordinary map judgment information holding memory area is shifted to the third memory section of the ordinary map judgment information holding memory area. In addition, the ordinary map judgment information stored in the first memory section of the ordinary map judgment information holding memory area is shifted to the zeroth memory section, which is the ordinary map judgment information execution memory area, and the ordinary map judgment information used in the previous game that was stored in the zeroth memory section is erased.

The main CPU 110a performs a win determination process in step S410-7. Specifically, using a win determination table for normal symbols (see FIG. 35(a)), it determines whether or not a win has occurred based on the game state and the win determination random number value stored in the normal symbol execution memory area. Details of the win determination table for normal symbols will be described later.

The main CPU 110a performs normal symbol determination processing in step S410-8. Specifically, using a normal symbol determination table (see FIG. 35(b)), the stopped normal symbol data of the normal symbol that is stopped and displayed as a result of the variable display is determined based on the game state, the win determination result, and the normal symbol determination random number value. Details of the normal symbol determination table will be described later.

In step S410-9, the main CPU 110a sets a normal symbol designation command corresponding to the type of normal symbol determined in the normal symbol determination process in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. This causes the normal symbol designation command to be sent to the performance control board 130, making it possible for the performance control board 130 to grasp the stop normal symbol data.

The main CPU 110a performs a normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination process in step S410-10. Specifically, using a normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination table (see FIG. 35(c) or FIG. 35(d)) according to the game state, the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) for displaying the normal symbol in a fluctuating manner is determined based on the game state, the win determination result, and the normal symbol fluctuation pattern random number value. Details of the normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination table will be described later.

In step S410-11, the main CPU 110a sets a normal map fluctuation pattern designation command corresponding to the normal map fluctuation pattern determined in the normal map fluctuation pattern determination process in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. This causes the normal map fluctuation pattern designation command to be sent to the performance control board 130, making it possible for the performance control board 130 to grasp the normal map fluctuation pattern.

In step S410-12, the main CPU 110a sets the normal pattern fluctuation time corresponding to the normal pattern fluctuation pattern determined in the normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination process in a specified area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S410-13 starts the normal pattern fluctuation display and ends this normal pattern fluctuation process. As a result, LED lighting data for executing the normal pattern fluctuation display is created in the data creation process of step S700 above, and is output in the output control process of step S800 above, thereby causing the normal pattern fluctuation display to be performed on the normal pattern display 62.

In step S410-14, the main CPU 110a determines whether a time-saving flag (either the first time-saving flag, the second time-saving flag, or the third time-saving flag) is set in the main RAM 110c. If the time-saving flag is set, the process moves to step S410-15 to update the remaining number of time-saving regular patterns (G), and if the time-saving flag is not set, the process ends with the remaining number of time-saving regular patterns (G) not being updated.

In step S410-15, the main CPU 110a subtracts "1" from the remaining number of time-saving normal symbols (G), which is the number of time-saving normal symbols saved in the main RAM 110c, and in step S420-16, it determines whether the remaining number of time-saving normal symbols (G) has become "0." If the remaining number of time-saving normal symbols (G) has become "0," it transfers processing to step S410-17, assuming that the time-saving game state is to be ended, and if the remaining number of time-saving normal symbols (G) has not become "0," it transfers processing to step S410-18, assuming that the condition for ending the time-saving game state is not met.

In step S410-17, the main CPU 110a clears the time-saving flag and each remaining number of time-saving reels (remaining number of time-saving special reels (J), remaining number of time-saving small wins (Z), remaining number of time-saving normal reels (G)) from the main RAM 110c, ends the time-saving game state, transitions to the normal game state, and ends this normal pattern change process.

In step S410-18, the main CPU 110a sets a time-saving number designation command corresponding to the remaining number of time-saving normal symbol repetitions (G), which is the remaining number of time-saving normal symbol repetitions, in the performance electrical data storage area. This causes the time-saving number designation command to be sent to the performance control board 130, making it possible for the performance control board 130 to grasp the remaining number of time-saving normal symbol repetitions. When this process is completed, the current normal symbol variation process is terminated.

In step S410-19, the main CPU 110a determines whether the normal pattern change time has elapsed. If the change time has not elapsed, the current normal pattern change process is terminated, and if the change time has elapsed, in step S410-20, the normal pattern change display is stopped, and in step S410-21, a normal pattern confirmation command is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. This causes the normal pattern confirmation command to be sent to the performance control board 130, making it possible to know that the normal pattern has stopped being displayed on the performance control board 130.

In step S410-22, the main CPU 110a determines whether the stopped normal symbol is a winning normal symbol (a winning win). If it is not a winning normal symbol, the current normal symbol variation process is terminated, and if it is a winning normal symbol, in step S410-23, auxiliary game control data for controlling the auxiliary game is obtained from the auxiliary game control table (see FIG. 37(f)). Details of the auxiliary game control table will be described later.

In step S410-24, the main CPU 110a sets an opening designation command corresponding to the type of auxiliary game in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM. This causes the opening designation command to be sent to the performance control board 130, making it possible for the performance control board 130 to recognize that the opening of the auxiliary game has begun.

In step S410-25, the main CPU 110a sets the opening time corresponding to the auxiliary game control data acquired in step S410-23 in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S410-26, sets the normal symbol/normal power processing data to "1", terminating this normal symbol variation process.

In this way, when the remaining number of times for the time-saving normal symbols (G) becomes "0" during the time-saving play state, the time-saving play state (first time-saving play state, second time-saving play state, third time-saving play state) ends even if the remaining number of times for the time-saving special symbols (J) or the remaining number of times for the time-saving small wins (Z) remain. This creates a novel gameplay experience in which the time-saving play state ends not with the number of times the variable display of the special symbols, which determines whether or not a jackpot has been determined, but with the number of times the variable display of the normal symbols, which does not determine whether or not a jackpot has been determined, and makes the game more interesting.

In addition, when the remaining number of times (G) for time-saving normal symbols becomes "0" during the time-saving play state and the time-saving play state is ended, the time-saving play state ends when the display of the normal symbols starts to change (immediately after the start), not when the normal symbols are stopped and the normal symbol change time has elapsed or when the stop time has elapsed. Therefore, the time-saving play state can be ended at a timing that is easy for the player to grasp, regardless of the change time of the normal symbols, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

Even when the variable display of normal symbols is executed, a game state designation command is sent from the main control board 110 to the presentation control board 130, just as when the variable display of special symbols is executed. Therefore, when the remaining number of times of the time-saving normal symbols (G) becomes "0" and the game transitions from the time-saving game state to the normal game state, the game state can be notified to the presentation control board 130, and a presentation according to the game state can be executed, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, regardless of whether the game is in a normal game state in which a normal pattern variation presentation accompanied by a variation display of the presentation pattern 70a in response to the variation display of the normal pattern is not executed, or in a time-saving game state in which a normal pattern variation presentation accompanied by a variation display of the presentation pattern 70a in response to the variation display of the normal pattern is executed, when the variation display of the normal pattern is executed, a command related to the variation display of the normal pattern (a normal pattern designation command, a normal pattern variation pattern designation command) is sent. Therefore, it is possible to know that the variation display of the normal pattern is being executed on the presentation control board 130, and it is possible to execute a presentation corresponding to the variation display of the normal pattern (for example, a variation display of the special pattern TZ).

When the remaining number of times for the time-saving special symbols (J) becomes "0" during the time-saving play state and the time-saving play state is terminated, the time-saving play state is terminated when the time for the special symbols to change has elapsed and the special symbols are displayed stationary. Similarly, when the remaining number of times for the time-saving normal symbols (G) becomes "0" and the time-saving play state is terminated, the time-saving play state may be terminated when the time for the normal symbols to change has elapsed and the normal symbols are displayed stationary, or when the time for the normal symbols to stop has elapsed.

In addition, the game status designation command is sent before updating the remaining number of times for the time-saving regular drawing (G), but it is also possible to send the game status designation command after updating the remaining number of times for the time-saving regular drawing (G), that is, after the game status has changed.

In addition, a command indicating the remaining number of times for the time-saving normal drawing (G) is sent as the time-saving number designation command, but it is also possible to send a command including not only the remaining number of times for the time-saving normal drawing (G) but also the remaining number of times for the time-saving special drawing (J) or the remaining number of times for the time-saving small win (Z).

In this way, the number of commands (game state designation command, normal pattern designation command, normal pattern change pattern designation command, time-saving count designation command) sent from the main control board 110 to the presentation control board 130 when a normal pattern change display is executed during a time-saving play state is greater than the number of commands (game state designation command, normal pattern designation command, normal pattern change pattern designation command) sent from the main control board 110 to the presentation control board 130 when a normal pattern change display is executed during a normal play state. Therefore, the presentation control board 130 can properly grasp the remaining number of time-saving times, and can perform processing such as notifying the remaining number of time-saving times.

(Winning judgment table for normal symbols)
Figure 35 (a) is a hit determination table for normal symbols that is referenced when determining a hit based on normal symbol determination information obtained based on the passage of the gaming ball through the normal symbol gate 44.

As shown in FIG. 35(a), the hit determination table for normal symbols associates the game state when a hit determination is made, the random number value for hit determination, and the result of the hit determination (win, miss), and for reference, the approximate probability of winning is listed in the rightmost column.

A "win" is a judgment result in which the auxiliary game will be played, and a "lose" is a judgment result in which the auxiliary game will not be played.

The first feature of the winning judgment table for normal symbols shown in Figure 35 (a) is that the probability (proportion) of being judged as a winning is the same regardless of the game state. By doing so, it is possible to make players expect that the auxiliary game will be executed regardless of the game state, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, the probability (proportion) of determining a win may be higher in the time-saving game state than in the normal game state (generating a normal probability variation).

(Normal symbol determination table)
Figure 35 (b) is a normal symbol determination table which is referenced when determining the normal symbol stopping symbol based on the normal symbol determination information obtained based on the passage of the gaming ball through the normal symbol gate 44.

As shown in FIG. 35(b), the normal symbol determination table associates the game state when the determination is made, the result of the win determination (win, miss), a random number value for winning symbol determination, the result of the normal symbol determination, stopping normal symbol data indicating this determination result, and a normal symbol designation command indicating the result of the normal symbol determination.

The normal symbol "0" is a losing normal symbol that does not result in an auxiliary game being executed.
The normal patterns "1" and "2" are winning normal patterns which execute an auxiliary game in which the second starting hole 47 opens once short at a time value where it is difficult for the game ball to enter (almost no win, no win at all) or an auxiliary game in which the second starting hole 47 opens twice long at a time value where it is easy for the game ball to enter, depending on the game state.
The normal symbol "3" is a winning normal symbol for executing an auxiliary game in which the second starting hole 47 is opened twice at a time value that makes it easy for a game ball to enter, regardless of the game state.

The first feature of the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 35(b) is that the number of types of normal symbols that are stopped and displayed differs between the normal game state and the time-saving game state. By doing so, it is possible to vary the playability of the normal symbols depending on the game state, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The types of normal symbols displayed in the normal game state and the time-saving game state may be the same. In this case, the auxiliary game may be executed in the same manner as normal symbol 1, for example, even when normal symbol 2 and normal symbol 3 are displayed, so that the normal game state is at a disadvantage compared to the time-saving game state.

(Normal map fluctuation pattern determination table)
Figure 35 (c) is a normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination table for normal use which is referred to when determining the fluctuation pattern of normal symbols in the normal game state, and Figure 35 (d) is a time-saving normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination table for time-saving use which is referred to when determining the fluctuation pattern of normal symbols in the time-saving game state.

As shown in Figures 35(c) to 35(d), the normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination table associates the game state, the result of the hit determination, the type of normal symbol, the normal symbol fluctuation pattern random number value, the type of normal symbol fluctuation pattern that is the determination result, and the fluctuation time of each normal symbol fluctuation pattern, and also lists the performance content and average fluctuation time for reference.

As for the presentation contents shown in the normal pattern variation pattern determination table shown in Figures 35(c) to 35(d), "normal variation" and "shortened variation" mean that a variation presentation is executed in which the three presentation patterns 70a vary at high speed and stop displaying various losing numbers without reaching a winning combination.

"Chance fluctuation" means that when the three performance symbols 70a are fluctuating at high speed, it is a chance to win (an auxiliary game in which the second starting hole 47 opens long is executed), specifically, the effective period of the performance button 17 occurs, and an operation performance is executed in which the result of the judgment is notified according to the operation of the performance button 17 during the effective period (in the case of a win, the first movable member 73a moves down to the performance position and then stops and displays the three performance symbols in a line, and in the case of a loss, the first movable member 73a does not move and the three performance symbols stop and display in a state of forming a reach loss).

"False losing variation" means that, despite a winning situation, an auxiliary game is executed in which the second starting hole 47 is short-opened at a time value at which it is difficult for the game ball to enter (effectively no winning), resulting in a variation effect in which the three performance symbols 70a change at high speed and stop displaying various losing numbers instead of reaching a winning state.

When the remaining number of times for the time-saving normal symbol (G) becomes "0" and the time-saving play state ends, if the display of the normal symbol changes to a miss or a win in which the game ball opens in the second starting hole 47 in a short opening pattern that makes it difficult for the ball to win (effectively not win), a result display is displayed showing the game results (number of consecutive jackpot games, number of balls dispensed, etc.) in the consecutive advantageous period favorable to the player (the period during which the advantageous state for the player continues, starting from the so-called first jackpot game or the third time-saving play state).

The first feature of the normal symbol variation pattern determination table shown in Figures 35(c) to 35(d) is that in the normal game state, where the variation performance of the performance symbol 70a is not executed during the variation display of the normal symbol (the second starting hole 47 does not open long even if the auxiliary game is executed), the variation time of the normal symbol is the same regardless of whether it is a miss or a win, in the normal game state. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the amount of data required for the variation display of the normal symbol in the normal game state, and it is possible to efficiently control the variation display of the normal symbol. Also, it is possible to prevent the player from having excessive expectations, and to increase the interest of the game.

The second feature of the normal pattern variation determination table shown in Figures 35(c) to 35(d) is that when an auxiliary game is played in which a short is opened at a time value that makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting hole 47 (effectively no winning), a fake miss variation is executed in which the three performance patterns 70a are displayed stopped separately to fake a miss. By doing this, it is possible to prevent the player from getting their hopes up when an auxiliary game is played in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting hole 47 (effectively no winning), and it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

The third feature of the normal game pattern determination table shown in Figures 35(c) to 35(d) is that when there is a possibility of a long opening in the second starting hole 47 during the time-saving game state, which makes it easier for the game ball to win, a chance variation is executed accompanied by the player's operation of the performance button 17 (the occurrence of a valid period). By doing so, it is possible to effectively improve the performance effect during the time-saving game state, and to increase the interest in the game.

The fourth feature of the normal pattern variation determination table shown in FIG. 35(c) to FIG. 35(d) is that when an auxiliary game is executed in a time-saving game state in which the second start hole 47 is short-opened at a time value in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter (effectively no winning), an effect is executed that suggests that the result is unfavorable to the player (a false loss variation in which the three performance symbols 70a are stopped and displayed with different losing numbers), whereas when an auxiliary game is executed in which the second start hole 47 is long-opened at a time value in which it is easy for the game ball to enter (almost winning), an effect is executed that suggests that the result is favorable to the player (a chance variation in which the three performance symbols 70a are stopped and displayed with all three performance symbols 70a aligned). By doing so, it becomes easier to distinguish between a case in which an auxiliary game in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second start hole 47 is executed and a case in which an auxiliary game in which it is easy for the game ball to enter the second start hole 47 is executed, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The fifth feature of the normal pattern variation determination table shown in FIG. 35(c) to FIG. 35(d) is that the combination of effect symbols (missing number where the three effect symbols 70a are scattered) displayed when an auxiliary game is executed in which the second start hole 47 is short-opened at a time value where it is difficult for the game ball to enter (effectively no winning) in the time-saving game state is different from the combination of effect symbols (winning number where the three effect symbols 70a are aligned) displayed when an auxiliary game is executed in which the second start hole 47 is long-opened at a time value where it is easy for the game ball to enter (almost winning). By doing so, it becomes easier to distinguish between the case where an auxiliary game is executed in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second start hole 47 and the case where an auxiliary game is executed in which it is easy for the game ball to enter the second start hole 47, making the game more interesting.

The sixth feature of the normal symbol variation pattern determination table shown in Figures 35(c) to 35(d) is that in the time-saving game state, the normal symbol variation display (variation presentation) can be executed with a time value longer than the time value (5 seconds) of the normal symbol variation display (variation presentation) executed in the normal game state, but the average variation time of the normal symbol variation display is shorter than the average variation time of the normal symbol variation display in the normal game state. By doing so, it becomes easier to stimulate the player's sense of expectation in the time-saving game state, and the normal symbol variation display can be executed in a manner that is more advantageous to the player in the time-saving game state than in the normal game state, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The seventh feature of the normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination table shown in Figures 35(c) to 35(d) is that the average fluctuation time of the normal symbol differs depending on the type of time-saving game state. By doing so, it is possible to bring out the characteristics of each time-saving game state, and to increase the interest of the game.

The eighth feature of the normal map fluctuation pattern determination table shown in Figures 35(c) to 35(d) is that it is easier to determine a normal map fluctuation pattern with a shorter fluctuation time in the time-saving game state than in the normal game state. By doing so, it is possible to give the table characteristics such as different performance depending on the type of game state, which makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The ninth feature of the normal pattern change pattern determination table shown in Figures 35(c) to 35(d) is that, when determining the change pattern of the special pattern, it is possible to switch the special pattern change pattern determination table when the number of times the special pattern changes after the establishment of a predetermined condition (RWM clear, end of jackpot play) reaches a predetermined number, whereas when determining the change pattern of the normal pattern during normal play or time-saving play, the switching of the normal pattern change pattern determination table is restricted. By doing so, it is possible to improve the efficiency of control when executing the change display of the normal pattern. Also, while it is possible to enhance the change display of the special pattern that is directly linked to the jackpot, it is possible to make the change display of the normal pattern that is not directly linked to the jackpot play simple and easy to understand, which makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The tenth feature of the normal symbol variation pattern determination table shown in Figures 35(c) to 35(d) is that it is possible to switch between the normal symbol variation pattern determination table for determining the variation pattern of the normal symbol between the normal game state and the time-saving game state. By doing so, it is possible to differentiate between the normal game state in which the second starting hole 47 only opens in a short opening pattern that makes it difficult for the game ball to enter (effectively no winning), and the time-saving game state in which the second starting hole 47 can be opened in a long opening pattern that makes it easy to enter, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

An eleventh feature of the normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination table shown in Figures 35(c) to 35(d) is that there are more types of normal symbol fluctuation patterns (two types) used to display a losing normal symbol fluctuation in the time-saving play state than there are types of special symbol fluctuation patterns (one type each) used to display a losing normal symbol fluctuation in the first special symbol or second special symbol in the time-saving play state. By doing this, it is possible to improve the presentation effect in the time-saving play state, where the normal symbol fluctuation display is important, and to increase the interest in the game.

The twelfth feature of the normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination table shown in Figures 35(c) to 35(d) is that the average fluctuation time due to the normal symbol fluctuation pattern used to display a losing fluctuation of the normal symbol in the time-saving game state is longer than the average fluctuation time due to the special symbol fluctuation pattern used to display a losing fluctuation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol in the time-saving game state. By doing so, it is possible to improve the presentation effect in the time-saving game state where the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is important, and it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

The thirteenth feature of the normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination table shown in Figures 35(c) to 35(d) is that in the time-saving play state, there are more types of normal symbol fluctuation patterns (three types) used to display the winning fluctuation of the normal symbol than there are types of special symbol fluctuation patterns (one type each) used to display the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol. By doing this, it is possible to improve the presentation effect in the time-saving play state, where the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is important, and it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

In the case where an auxiliary game is executed in which the second starting hole 47 is short-opened at a time value where it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting hole 47 (effectively no winning), the chance performance is not executed, but the chance performance may be executed. In this case, it is preferable to execute the chance performance at a rate different from that in the case of a miss or when an auxiliary game is executed in which the second starting hole 47 is long-opened at a time value where it is easy for the game ball to enter the second starting hole 47. Specifically, the chance performance may be executed at a rate lower than that in the case of a miss, or at a rate higher than that in the case of a miss but lower than that in the case of a hit and when an auxiliary game is executed in which the second starting hole 47 is long-opened at a time value where it is easy for the game ball to enter the second starting hole 47.

In addition, although there is only one type of chance effect, multiple types may be provided by varying the operation mode of the effect button 17. In the case of the first chance effect, the judgment result may be notified by hitting the effect button 17 once during the valid period or by the expiration of the valid period, and in the case of the second chance effect, the judgment result may be notified by hitting the effect button 17 a predetermined number of times during the valid period or by the expiration of the valid period. In the case of an auxiliary game in which the second starting hole 47 is long-opened at a time value that makes it easy for a game ball to enter, the rate at which the first chance effect is executed may be different from the rate at which the second chance effect is executed (for example, the second chance effect may be executed more easily than the first chance effect, or vice versa).

In addition, in the chance performance, the performance pattern 70a is designed not to form a reach state, but an operation performance (decisive performance) that generates a valid period in a reach state may be executed, or a reach variation performance may be executed separately from the chance performance. In this case, the execution rate of the reach variation performance may be made different in the case of a miss, a hit in which an auxiliary game is executed in which the second start hole 47 is short-opened at a time value that makes it difficult for the game ball to enter (effectively does not enter), and a hit in which an auxiliary game is executed in which the second start hole 47 is long-opened at a time value that makes it easy for the game ball to enter. Specifically, the reach variation effect may be executed at a lower rate when the auxiliary game is executed in which the second starting hole 47 is short-opened at a time value where it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting hole 47 (effectively no winning) than when it is a miss, or at a higher rate when the auxiliary game is executed in which the second starting hole 47 is short-opened at a time value where it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting hole 47 (effectively no winning) than when it is a miss, but at a lower rate when the auxiliary game is executed in which the second starting hole 47 is short-opened at a time value where it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting hole 47 (effectively no winning) than when it is a hit and the auxiliary game is executed in which the second starting hole 47 is long-opened at a time value where it is easy for the game ball to enter the second starting hole 47.

In addition, the same time-saving normal map fluctuation pattern determination table is used to determine the normal map fluctuation pattern regardless of the type of time-saving game state, but a separate time-saving game state fluctuation pattern determination table may be provided for each type of time-saving game state to determine the normal map fluctuation pattern, or separate time-saving game state fluctuation pattern determination tables may be provided for a time-saving game state that goes through a jackpot game (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state) and a time-saving game state that does not go through a jackpot game (third time-saving game state) to determine the normal map fluctuation pattern, or a time-saving normal map fluctuation pattern determination table may be provided for each type of time-saving game state to determine the normal map fluctuation pattern.

(Auxiliary Game Control Table)
FIG. 35(e) is an auxiliary game control table used to control the auxiliary game based on the type of winning normal symbol.

As shown in FIG. 35(e), the auxiliary game control table associates the game state when the auxiliary game occurs, the stop map data, the number of times the second start port 47 is opened, the opening time of the auxiliary game, the first opening time of the second start port 47, the interval time between openings, the second opening time of the second start port 47, and the ending time of the auxiliary game, and also lists the long opening ratio of the second start port 47 for reference.

For example, in the first time-saving game state, if the stop map data is "01", the second start hole 47 is opened once, and an auxiliary game is executed in which the hole is short-opened for 0.07 seconds, during which it is difficult for the game ball to win (effectively no win occurs), and if the stop map data is "03", the second start hole 47 is opened twice, and an auxiliary game is executed in which the hole is long-opened for 3 seconds (total of 6 seconds), during which it is easy for the game ball to win.

The first feature of the auxiliary game control table shown in FIG. 35(e) is that when an auxiliary game is executed in the normal game state, only an auxiliary game in which the game ball is short-opened into the second start hole 47 at a time value that makes it difficult for the game ball to win (effectively no winning) is executed, and when an auxiliary game is executed in the time-saving game state, an auxiliary game in which the game ball is long-opened into the second start hole 47 at a time value that makes it easy for the game ball to win can be executed. In this way, since the game ball basically does not win into the second start hole 47 in the normal game state, but the game ball can win into the second start hole 47 in the time-saving game state, it is possible to vary the playability depending on the game state and to increase the interest of the game.

The second feature of the auxiliary game control table shown in FIG. 35(e) is that the probability (proportion) of an auxiliary game in which a game ball is released into the second start hole 47 at a time value (long release pattern) that makes it easier for the ball to enter varies depending on the type of time-saving game state; in other words, the probability of a game ball entering the second start hole 47 and a big win game via a small win being played varies. In this way, it is possible to vary the playability depending on the type of time-saving game state, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The third feature of the auxiliary game control table shown in FIG. 35(e) is that the probability (proportion) of an auxiliary game being played in which a game ball is released into the second start hole 47 at a time value (long release pattern) that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second start hole 47 is different between the first time-saving game state and the second time-saving game state that go through a jackpot game, and the third time-saving game state that does not go through a jackpot game; in other words, the probability that a game ball will enter the second start hole 47 and a jackpot game via a small jackpot is played is different. In this way, the playability of the time-saving game state can be made different depending on whether or not a jackpot game has been played, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The fourth feature of the auxiliary game control table shown in FIG. 35(e) is that even with the same winning normal symbol (for example, normal symbol 01), depending on the type of time-saving game state, there are cases where an auxiliary game is executed in which the second starting hole 47 is short-opened at a time value that makes it difficult for the game ball to enter (effectively no winning), and cases where an auxiliary game is executed in which the second starting hole 47 is opened at a time value that makes it easy for the game ball to enter (long-opening pattern). In this way, it is possible to realize a variety of gameplay features without excessively increasing the types of winning normal symbols, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The fourth feature of the auxiliary game control table shown in FIG. 35(e) is that a winning normal pattern (normal pattern 03) is set to execute an auxiliary game in which the game ball is released into the second starting hole 47 at a time value (long release pattern) that makes it easy to win, regardless of the type of time-saving game state. By doing so, it is possible to attract the player's interest in the type of winning normal pattern, and to increase the excitement of the game.

In addition, in the normal game state, the normal pattern 02 or the normal pattern 03 is determined, and even in the normal game state, an auxiliary game is executed in which the game ball is released into the second start hole 47 at a time value (long release pattern) that makes it easier to win, at a rate lower than in the time-saving game state. In other words, the game ball may enter the second start hole 47 and a big win game via a small win may be executed.

In addition, when an auxiliary game is executed in which the second starting hole 47 is opened at a time value (long opening pattern) that makes it easy for a game ball to enter the game, the second starting hole 47 is opened twice, but it may be opened for a long time of 6 seconds each time, or it may be opened for a long time of 6 seconds more than twice, or if the second starting hole 47 is opened multiple times (including twice), the opening time of the second starting hole 47 may be different for each opening (for example, if it is opened twice, the first time may be 2 seconds and the second time may be 4 seconds, or vice versa).

In addition, the opening time and ending time of the auxiliary game are the same when an auxiliary game is executed in which the second starting hole 47 is short-opened at a time value at which it is difficult for the game ball to enter (effectively no winning) and when an auxiliary game is executed in which the second starting hole 47 is opened at a time value at which it is easy for the game ball to enter (long opening pattern). However, the opening time and/or ending time of the auxiliary game may be shorter when an auxiliary game is executed in which the second starting hole 47 is short-opened at a time value at which it is difficult for the game ball to enter (effectively no winning) than when an auxiliary game is executed in which the second starting hole 47 is opened at a time value at which it is easy for the game ball to enter (long opening pattern).

(General map advance judgment table)
Figure 36 is a general map pre-judgment table that is referenced when pre-judging (reading ahead) the general map judgment information obtained based on the entry of a game ball into the general map gate.

Specifically, FIG. 36(a) is a normal map pre-determination table for normal use that is referenced when executing a normal map pre-reading process in normal game mode, and FIG. 36(b) is a time-saving normal map pre-determination table for time-saving game mode that is referenced when executing a normal map pre-reading process in time-saving game mode.

As shown in FIG. 36, the normal symbol advance judgment table associates the game state, the result of the hit judgment, the result of the normal symbol judgment (stop normal symbol data), the normal symbol fluctuation pattern random number value, the normal symbol planned fluctuation pattern as the judgment result, and the pre-reading information corresponding to the normal symbol planned fluctuation pattern, and the performance content is listed for reference.

Therefore, the "planned normal symbol variation pattern" and "prediction information" can be said to be capable of identifying at least the type of normal symbol, the result of the hit determination, the type of normal symbol, and the normal symbol variation pattern to be executed. In addition, as will be described in detail later, because the auxiliary game is executed depending on the type of normal symbol, it can also be said to be capable of identifying the type of auxiliary game (auxiliary game in which the second start hole 47 opens short, auxiliary game in which the second start hole 47 opens long).

(Main control board customer waiting control process)
The special pattern special voltage control process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to Fig. 37. Fig. 37 is a flowchart showing the special pattern special voltage control process of the main control board 110.

In step S450-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a big win or small win game is currently being played. If it is, the process proceeds to step S450-10. If it is not, the process proceeds to step S450-2. It determines whether or not a special symbol is being displayed in a changing state. If it is, the process proceeds to step S450-10. If it is not, the process proceeds to step S450-3. It determines whether or not both the first reserved memory (U1) and the second reserved memory (U2) are "0". If it is not "0", the process proceeds to step S450-10. If it is "0", the process proceeds to step S450-4.

In step S450-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the game is currently in a normal game mode. If it is in a normal game mode, the game is assumed to be in a customer waiting state and the process proceeds to step S450-7. If the game is not in a normal game mode (if the game is in a time-saving game mode), the game determines whether or not a normal pattern is being displayed in a changing state in step S450-5. If a normal pattern is being displayed in a changing state, the process proceeds to step S450-10. If a normal pattern is not being displayed in a changing state, the game determines whether or not the normal pattern reserve memory (F) is "0" in step S450-6. If it is "0", the game is assumed to be in a customer waiting state and the process proceeds to step S450-7. If it is not "0", the process proceeds to step S450-10.

In step S450-7, the main CPU 110a determines whether a customer waiting state flag indicating that the machine is waiting for customers is set in a specified area of the main RAM 110c. If the customer waiting state flag is set, the current customer waiting control process is terminated, and if the customer waiting state flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S450-8.

In step S450-8, the main CPU 110a sets a customer waiting state flag in a specified area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S450-9, sets a customer waiting state designation command indicating that the machine is in a customer waiting state in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and ends the current customer waiting control process. This causes the customer waiting state designation command to be sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to execute customer waiting performances to appeal to the player (such as customer waiting demo performances to encourage the player to play, and adjustment guidance performances to guide the player in adjusting the volume and light intensity by operating the cross key 19).

When the machine enters a waiting state during normal play, the adjustment information display is executed after 5 seconds have passed, and the waiting demo display is executed after 60 seconds have passed. However, when the machine enters a waiting state during time-saving play, the adjustment information display is executed after 5 seconds have passed, and the waiting demo display is executed after 120 seconds have passed.

In step S450-10, the main CPU 110a clears the customer waiting state flag to end the customer waiting state, and ends this customer waiting control process.

In this way, when in normal game mode, even if the normal symbol variable display is being executed or the number of reserved normal symbols is not "0", it is possible to execute customer waiting effects to appeal to the player (customer waiting demo effects to encourage the player to play, adjustment guide effects to guide the player on adjusting the volume or light intensity, etc.). Therefore, customer waiting effects can be executed at appropriate times according to the game situation, making it possible to achieve the intended appealing effect on the player.

In addition, when in the time-saving game mode, if the normal symbol variable display is being executed or the number of reserved normal symbols is not "0", waiting-for-customers effects to appeal to the player (such as waiting-for-customers demo effects to encourage the player to play, and adjustment guide effects to guide the player in adjusting the volume or light intensity) are not executed, and when the normal symbol variable display is not executed and the number of reserved normal symbols is "0", waiting-for-customers effects can be executed. Therefore, waiting-for-customers effects can be executed at the appropriate timing for the game situation (when the normal symbol variable display, which is important in the time-saving game mode, is not being executed), making it possible to achieve the intended appealing effect on the player.

In addition, the execution of the "waiting for customers" effect is more restricted when the waiting for customers state occurs during the time-saving game state than when the waiting for customers state occurs during the normal game state (the time until the waiting for customers demo effect is executed is longer). Therefore, it is possible to execute the "waiting for customers" effect appropriately according to the situation where the player is likely to have secured the gaming machine, that is, the time-saving game state that is advantageous to the player.

Even during normal play, the waiting for customers effect may not be executed if the normal symbol is changing or the number of reserved normal symbols is not "0." During time-saving play, the waiting for customers effect may not be executed. During time-saving play, either the adjustment information effect or the waiting for customers demo effect may not be executed.

In addition, during normal game play, the execution of the waiting for customers effect may be restricted when the variable display of the special symbol is being executed, and during time-saving game play, the waiting for customers effect may be executed even if the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed.

(Timing chart when time-saving game state occurs after big win game ends)
FIG. 38 is a timing chart showing a case where a time-saving game state occurs after the end of a big win game.

First, at timing T1, the display of the special symbols that will result in a jackpot starts to change. At this time, since the game is in normal play mode, all information is collected (counted), such as the number of normal payouts and the number of normal outs to calculate the normal base value, and the total number of outs to set the play area.

Next, at the timing of T2, the display of the winning normal symbol begins. This display is done in the normal normal symbol display pattern.

After that, at the timing of T3, the stop display of the special symbol starts, and at the timing of T4, when the stop time N of the special symbol (0.5 seconds for a jackpot) has elapsed, the jackpot game (opening) starts, the right-hit indicator 67 lights up, and the output of a jackpot signal indicating that a jackpot game is in progress and an advantageous state signal indicating that the player is in an advantageous state that is more advantageous for the player than the normal game state starts. In addition, the tallying (counting) of the number of payouts during normal play and the number of outs during normal play for calculating the normal base value stops, and the tallying (counting) of the total number of outs for setting the play period continues (the calculation of the normal base value and the display of the normal base value also continue).

Then, at the timing T5, the stopped display of the normal symbols starts, and at the timing T6, when the stopped time of the normal symbols has elapsed, the auxiliary game starts. However, because the variable display of the normal symbols started during the normal game state, the auxiliary game is executed in which the second starting hole 47 opens (short opening) in a short opening pattern in which it is difficult for the game ball to win (effectively no winning).

In addition, at the timing of T7, the auxiliary game ends without the game ball entering the second starting hole 47, and the display of the normal pattern begins, which is a losing game. This display of the normal pattern begins during the jackpot game (low probability non-time-saving game state), so it is displayed in the normal normal pattern display pattern.

Next, at the timing of T8, the normal symbols start to be displayed stationary, and at the timing of T9, when the stop time of the normal symbols has elapsed, the system goes into a standby state, and at the timing of T10, the display of the normal symbols that will result in a win starts to change. This display of the changes is performed in the normal normal symbol change pattern, since it started during a jackpot game (low probability non-time-saving game state). Then, at the timing of T11, when the jackpot game (ending) ends, a time-saving game state (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state) starts, and the output of the jackpot signal stops.

In addition, at the timing of T12, the stopped display of the normal symbols starts, and at the timing of T13, when the stopped time of the normal symbols has elapsed, the auxiliary game starts. However, because the variable display of the normal symbols started during a jackpot game (low probability non-time-saving game state), the auxiliary game is executed in which the second starting hole 47 opens (short opening) in a short opening pattern in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter (effectively no winning).

Next, at the timing of T14, the auxiliary game ends without the game ball entering the second starting hole 47, and the display of the normal symbol, which is a winning symbol, begins (the first time in the time-saving game mode). This display of the symbol changes in the time-saving game mode because it was started during the time-saving game mode.

After that, at the timing of T15, the normal symbols start to be displayed as stopped, and at the timing of T16, when the stop time of the normal symbols has elapsed, the auxiliary game starts, but the auxiliary game is executed in which the second start hole 47 is opened (short opening) in a short opening pattern that makes it difficult for the game ball to enter. Then, at the timing of T17, when the auxiliary game ends without the game ball entering the second start hole 47, the variable display of the normal symbols, which is a losing combination (the second time in the time-saving game state), starts. This variable display is performed in the normal symbol variable pattern for time-saving, because it started during the time-saving game state. Also, at the timing of T18, the normal symbols start to be displayed as stopped.

Here, we have shown an example in which the time-saving game state occurs while the normal symbol is changing, but even if the time-saving game state occurs while the normal symbol is stopped or during auxiliary play, the time-saving normal symbol changing pattern will be used from the next normal symbol changing display.

In this way, if a time-saving game state occurs after the end of a jackpot game, the time-saving game state occurs a predetermined period of time after the special symbol that results in a jackpot has stopped displaying (after the end of the jackpot game). This makes it possible to prevent players from gaining an excessive advantage during a jackpot game, and ensures a balance of benefits between the gaming establishment and the player.

In addition, if a time-saving game state occurs after the end of a jackpot game, the right-hit indicator 67 is turned on a predetermined period of time before the time-saving game state occurs (when the stop time of the jackpot special symbol has elapsed and the jackpot game, which is in a low-probability time-saving game state, begins). This makes it possible to prevent the player from suffering disadvantages related to the occurrence of the time-saving game state, and to increase the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, if a time-saving game state occurs after the end of a jackpot game, the tallying (counting) of the normal payout number and normal out number for calculating the normal base value is stopped (interrupted) a predetermined period before the time-saving game state occurs (when the stop time of the special jackpot pattern has elapsed and the jackpot game, which is a low-probability time-saving game state, begins). This makes it possible to calculate an appropriate normal base value, and to accurately grasp the performance of the gaming machine from the displayed normal base value.

In addition, even when the tallying (counting) of the normal payout number and normal out number for calculating the normal base value is stopped (interrupted), the calculation of the normal base value and the display of the normal base value continue, making it possible to accurately grasp the performance of the gaming machine from the displayed normal base value.

In addition, if a time-saving game state occurs after the end of a jackpot game, an advantageous state signal is output from a predetermined period before the time-saving game state occurs (the time when the jackpot game, which is a low-probability time-saving game state, begins after the stop time of the jackpot special symbol has elapsed). Therefore, an advantageous state signal can be output accurately throughout the advantageous state period, making it possible to accurately grasp the state of the gaming machine externally.

In addition, if a time-saving game state occurs during the variable display of normal symbols, regardless of whether or not auxiliary play is being performed, the next variable display of normal symbols will be displayed in a normal symbol variable pattern for time saving. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load by eliminating the need for complex processing such as changing the control of the variable display of normal symbols midway due to the occurrence of a time-saving game state.

In addition, if a time-saving game state occurs during the execution of an auxiliary game, the next normal symbol change display will be followed by a time-saving normal symbol change display, and the next auxiliary game will be played to open the second start opening 47 with a time-saving opening pattern. This makes it possible to reduce the processing burden by eliminating the need for complex processing such as changing the control of the normal symbol change display or the control of the auxiliary game midway due to the occurrence of a time-saving game state.

(Timing chart when the remaining number of times for the time-saving special game becomes 0 and the time-saving game state ends)
FIG. 39 is a timing chart showing the case where the remaining number of times (J) of the time-saving special charts reaches 0 and the time-saving game state ends.

First, at timing T1, the display of the losing variation of the first special symbol, which is the final time in the time-saving play state, begins. At this time, since the time-saving play state is in effect, the right-hit indicator 67 is lit and an advantageous state signal is being output. Also, since the time-saving play state is in effect, the information compilation (counting) of the normal payout number and normal out number for calculating the normal base value is stopped (interrupted), while the information compilation (counting) of the total out number for setting the play period is being executed.

Next, at the timing of T2, the display of the winning normal symbol begins. This display is performed in a time-saving normal symbol pattern. Then, at the timing of T3, the display of the normal symbol begins to stop, and at the timing of T4, when the normal symbol stop time has elapsed, the auxiliary game begins, but the auxiliary game is executed by opening (short opening) the second starting hole 47 in a short opening pattern that makes it difficult for the game ball to enter (effectively no winning).

After that, at the timing of T5, when the auxiliary game ends without the game ball entering the second starting hole 47, the display of the normal symbol, which is a losing symbol, begins to change. This change is made in the normal symbol change pattern for time saving. Then, at the timing of T6, the display of the normal symbol starts to stop, and at the timing of T7, the normal symbol stops for a while, and the game goes into standby mode.

Next, at the timing of T8, the display of the normal winning symbols begins. This display is performed in a normal symbol display pattern for time-saving. Then, at the timing of T9, when the display of the special symbols begins, the time-saving game state ends and the normal game state begins, the right-hit indicator 67 goes out, and the output of the advantageous state signal stops. Also, since the game has entered the normal game state, the tallying (counting) of the normal payout number and the normal out number for calculating the normal base value resumes. Also, the display of the normal symbols begins to stop.

After that, at the timing of T10, the normal symbol stops and the auxiliary game starts when the normal symbol stops and the auxiliary game starts at the timing of T11. However, because the variable display of the normal symbol starts during the short play state, the auxiliary game is executed in which the second start hole 47 opens in a long opening pattern (long opening) that makes it easier for the game ball to enter. In addition, the right hit indicator 67 lights up.

Then, at the timing of T12, when the auxiliary game ends without the game ball entering the second starting hole 47, the display of the normal winning symbol begins. Since this display of the symbols begins during the normal game state, it is performed in the normal normal symbol display pattern. In addition, the right-hit indicator 67 goes out.

After that, at the timing of T13, when the stop time M of the special symbol (8.0 seconds when the time-saving feature ends) has elapsed, the first missing variable display of the first special symbol begins, which is the first time in the normal game state. Then, at the timing of T14, the stop display of the normal symbol is displayed, and at the timing of T15, when the stop time of the normal symbol has elapsed, the auxiliary game begins. However, because the variable display of the normal symbol has begun during the normal game state, the auxiliary game is executed in which the second start hole 47 opens in a short opening pattern (short opening) in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter (effectively no winning). Then, at the timing of T15, the auxiliary game ends without the game ball entering the second start hole 47.

Here, we have shown an example in which the time-saving game state ends while the normal symbol is changing, but even if the time-saving game state ends while the normal symbol is stopped or during auxiliary play, the normal symbol change pattern will be used from the next normal symbol change.

In addition, when the special symbol changes display for the specified number of times from the start of the time-saving play state (remaining number of time-saving special symbols = 0), the losing special symbol is displayed stationary, and the time-saving play state ends. Therefore, the right-hit display 67 goes out, the output of the favorable state signal stops, and the tallying (counting) of the number of normal payouts and the number of normal outs to calculate the normal base value is resumed.

In this way, when a losing special symbol is displayed as a result of the variable display of the special symbol a specified number of times from the start of the time-saving play state (remaining number of time-saving special symbols = 0), the time-saving play state that is advantageous to the player ends even if there are remaining number of time-saving small wins (Z) or remaining number of time-saving normal symbols (G). Therefore, the time-saving play state can be ended in a way that ensures a balance of profits between the gaming establishment and the player, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, when a losing special symbol is displayed as a result of the variable display of the special symbol a specified number of times (remaining number of time-saving special symbols = 0) from the start of the time-saving play state, the time-saving play state ends and the right-hit display 67 goes out. This makes it possible to prevent the player from suffering any disadvantages related to the end of the time-saving play state, and to increase the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, when a missing special symbol is displayed as a result of the variable display of the special symbol a specified number of times from the start of the time-saving game state (remaining number of time-saving special symbols = 0), the time-saving game state ends and the tallying (counting) of the number of normal payouts and the number of normal outs to calculate the normal base value is resumed. Therefore, the appropriate normal base value can be calculated, and the performance of the gaming machine can be accurately grasped from the displayed normal base value.

In addition, when a losing special symbol is displayed as a result of the variable display of the special symbol a specified number of times from the start of the time-saving game state (remaining number of time-saving special symbols = 0), the time-saving game state ends and the output of the advantageous state signal is stopped. Therefore, the advantageous state signal can be output accurately throughout the advantageous state period, making it possible to accurately grasp the state of the gaming machine externally.

In addition, if the time-saving game state ends while the normal symbol is being displayed, the next normal symbol will be displayed in the normal normal symbol display pattern regardless of whether or not the auxiliary game is being played. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load by eliminating the need for complex processing such as changing the control of the normal symbol display when the time-saving game state ends.

In addition, if the time-saving game state ends while an auxiliary game is being played, the next normal symbol change display will be followed by a normal normal symbol change display, and the next auxiliary game will open (short open) the second starting hole 47 in a short opening pattern that makes it difficult for the game ball to win (effectively no winning). This makes it possible to reduce the processing burden by eliminating the need for complex processing such as changing the control of the normal symbol change display or the control of the auxiliary game midway due to the occurrence of the time-saving game state.

The right-hit indicator 67 is turned off when the time-saving play state transitions to the normal play state (at T9), but the right-hit indicator 67 may be kept on (delayed) until the auxiliary play that is executed as a result of the variable display of the normal symbol that is a winning symbol that is started during the time-saving play state ends, and the right-hit indicator 67 may be turned off when the auxiliary play ends.

In addition, if the normal symbol variable display started during the time-saving play state is a miss, the right-hit indicator 67 may be turned off at the timing of transition to the normal play state (timing T9). In addition, if an auxiliary game in which the second start hole 47 is short-opened is executed as a result of the normal symbol variable display started during the time-saving play state, the right-hit indicator 67 may be turned off at the timing of transition to the normal play state (timing T9), and if an auxiliary game in which the second start hole 47 is long-opened is executed as a result of the normal symbol variable display started during the time-saving play state, the right-hit indicator 67 may be turned off at the timing of the end of the auxiliary game.

In addition, the output of the advantageous state signal is stopped at the timing when the time-saving play state is switched to the normal play state (timing T9), but the output of the advantageous state signal may be continued (delayed) until the auxiliary game that is executed as a result of the variable display of the normal pattern that is a winning combination that is started during the time-saving play state is completed, and the output of the advantageous state signal may be stopped at the timing when this auxiliary game is completed.

In addition, if the variable display of the normal symbol started during the time-saving game state is a miss, the output of the advantageous state signal may be stopped at the timing of transition to the normal game state (timing T9). In addition, if an auxiliary game in which the second start port 47 is short-opened is executed as a result of the variable display of the normal symbol started during the time-saving game state, the output of the advantageous state signal may be stopped at the timing of transition to the normal game state (timing T9), and if an auxiliary game in which the second start port 47 is long-opened is executed as a result of the variable display of the normal symbol started during the time-saving game state, the output of the advantageous state signal may be stopped at the timing of completion of the auxiliary game.

(Timing chart when a small win game is followed by a big win game and the time-saving game state ends)
FIG. 40 is a timing chart for when a big win game starts from a small win game and the time-saving game state ends.

First, at timing T1, the 78th winning normal symbol variation display in the time-saving play state begins. This variation display is performed in the time-saving normal symbol variation pattern. At this time, since the time-saving play state is in effect, the right-hit indicator 67 is lit and an advantageous state signal is being output. Also, since the time-saving play state is in effect, the information compilation (counting) of the normal payout number and normal out number for calculating the normal base value is stopped (interrupted), while the information compilation (counting) of the total out number for setting the play period is being executed.

Next, at the timing of T2, the normal symbol stops and the auxiliary game starts when the normal symbol stops and the auxiliary game starts at the timing of T3. The auxiliary game is executed by opening the second start hole 47 in a long opening pattern (long opening) that makes it easier for the game ball to enter. Then, at the timing of T4, when the game ball enters the second start hole 47, the small win variable display of the second special symbol starts (ultra-short variation in which the normal symbol variable display and the auxiliary game are not executed multiple times during the variable display and the second reserved memory cannot be stocked).

After that, at the timing of T5, the special symbols start to stop and when the auxiliary play ends, the display of the normal symbols that will result in a loss (the 79th time in the time-saving play mode) starts. This display is done in the normal symbol change pattern for the time-saving mode. Then, at the timing of T6, when the stopping time of the special symbols has elapsed, the small win game starts. Also, the display of the normal symbols starts to stop.

Next, at the timing between T6 and T7, the game ball that entered the first large prize slot 50 enters the specific area 53, and at the timing of T7, when the small prize game ends, the large prize game (opening) starts, the game becomes a low probability non-time-limited game state, and the output of the large prize signal starts. Also, when the stopping time of the normal pattern has elapsed, the game goes into a standby state.

Then, at the timing of T8, the display of the normal symbols, which will result in a loss, begins. This display of the symbols begins during a big win (low probability non-time-saving play state), so it is performed in the normal normal symbol display pattern. Then, at the timing of T9, the display of the normal symbols begins to stop, and at the timing of T10, the display goes into standby mode once the normal symbols have stopped for a certain amount of time.

After that, at the timing of T11, the display of the winning normal symbol starts. This display starts during a jackpot game (low probability non-time-saving game state), so it is performed in the normal normal symbol change pattern. Then, at the timing of T12, the display of the stopped normal symbol starts, and when the jackpot game (ending) ends at the timing of T13, the time-saving game state starts and the output of the jackpot signal stops. In addition, when the stopping time of the normal symbol has elapsed, the auxiliary game starts, but because the display of the changing normal symbol started during a jackpot game (low probability non-time-saving game state), the auxiliary game is executed in which the second starting hole 47 opens (short opening) in a short opening pattern in which it is difficult for the game ball to win (effectively no winning).

Next, at the timing of T14, the auxiliary game ends without the game ball entering the second starting hole 47, and the display of the normal symbol (the first time in the time-saving game state) begins, resulting in a loss. Since this display of the symbol is started during the time-saving game state, it is performed in the normal symbol display pattern for time-saving. Then, at the timing of T15, the display of the normal symbol is started to stop, and at the timing of T16, the normal symbol stops for a while, and the game goes into standby mode.

After that, at the timing of T17, the display of the losing normal symbol (for the second time in the time-saving play state) begins. Because this display of the symbol begins during the time-saving play state, it is performed in the time-saving normal symbol display pattern. Then, at the timing of T18, the display of the stopped normal symbol begins, and at the timing of T19, once the stopping time of the normal symbol has elapsed, the game enters a standby state.

In this way, when a jackpot game is executed during the time-saving game state, the right-hit indicator 67 continues to light up and the output of the advantageous state signal continues. Therefore, there is no need to temporarily turn off the right-hit indicator 67 or temporarily stop the output of the advantageous state signal, which simplifies control.

(Timing chart when the remaining number of times in the time-saving normal game becomes 0 and the time-saving game state ends)
FIG. 41 is a timing chart showing the case where the remaining number of times (G) for the time-saving normal game becomes 0 and the time-saving game state ends.

First, at timing T1, the 78th winning normal symbol variation display in the time-saving play state begins. This variation display is performed in the time-saving normal symbol variation pattern. At this time, since the time-saving play state is in effect, the right-hit indicator 67 is lit and an advantageous state signal is being output. Also, since the time-saving play state is in effect, the information compilation (counting) of the normal payout number and normal out number for calculating the normal base value is stopped (interrupted), while the information compilation (counting) of the total out number for setting the play period is being executed.

Next, at the timing of T2, the normal symbol stops and the auxiliary game starts when the normal symbol stops and the auxiliary game starts at the timing of T3. The auxiliary game is executed by opening the second start hole 47 in a long opening pattern (long opening) that makes it easier for the game ball to enter. Then, at the timing of T4, when the game ball enters the second start hole 47, the small win variable display of the second special symbol starts (a stock chance variation that allows the second reserved memory to be stocked (increased) by executing the normal symbol variable display and auxiliary game multiple times during the variable display).

After that, at the timing of T5, the auxiliary game ends without the game ball entering the second starting hole 47, and the normal symbol miss variation display (the 79th time in the time-saving game state) begins. This variation display is performed in the normal symbol variation pattern for time-saving. Then, at the timing of T6, the normal symbol stops and the normal symbol stops, and at the timing of T7, the game goes into standby mode once the normal symbol stop time has elapsed.

Next, at the timing of T8, a normal symbol winning variation display (80th time in time-saving game mode) is started. This variation display is performed in the normal symbol variation pattern for time-saving. Then, at the timing of T9, a stopped normal symbol display is started, and at the timing of T10, an auxiliary game is executed in which the second starting hole 47 is opened (short opening) in a short opening pattern in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter (effectively no winning). Then, at the timing of T11, the auxiliary game ends without the game ball entering the second starting hole 47.

After a predetermined time has elapsed, at the timing of T12, a winning variation display of the normal symbol (the 99th time in the time-saving game mode) begins. This variation display is performed in the normal symbol variation pattern for time-saving. Then, at the timing of T13, a stopped display of the normal symbol begins, and at the timing of T14, an auxiliary game is executed in which the second start hole 47 opens (long opening) in a long opening pattern that makes it easier for the game ball to enter. Then, if a game ball enters the second start hole 47 between the timings of T14 and T15, the second reserved memory (reserved memory that will almost always result in a small win or a big win) is stocked (increased).

At the timing of T15, the auxiliary game ends and the display of the winning normal symbol variation starts. This variation display is performed in the normal symbol variation pattern for time-saving. The time-saving game state ends and the normal game state starts, the output of the advantageous state signal stops, the right-hit indicator 67 goes out, and all information collection for calculating the normal base value is resumed.

Then, at the timing of T16, the normal symbols start to stop and the auxiliary game starts when the normal symbols stop for a certain period of time at the timing of T17. However, because the variable display of the normal symbols started during the time-saving game state, the auxiliary game is executed in which the second start hole 47 opens in a long opening pattern (long opening) that makes it easier for the game ball to enter. Also, the right-hand hit indicator 67 lights up. Then, if the game ball enters the second start hole 47 between the timing of T17 and the timing of T18, the second reserved memory (reserved memory that is almost always a small win or a big win) is stocked (increased).

Next, at the timing of T18, the auxiliary game ends and the display of the normal symbol's missing variation starts. This variation is performed in the normal normal symbol variation pattern. The right-hit display 67 also goes out. Then, at the timing of T19, the normal symbol starts to stop and the special symbol is displayed.

After that, at the timing of T20, the stop time of the normal symbol has elapsed, and the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, and the small win game begins. Then, at the timing between the timing of T20 and the timing of T21, the game ball that entered the first large winning slot 50 enters the specific area 53, and at the timing of T21, when the small win game ends, the big win game (opening) begins, and the game enters a low probability non-time-limited game state, the output of the big win signal and the output of the advantageous state signal begin, and the right-hit indicator 67 lights up. Also, the normal symbol's losing fluctuation display begins.

In this way, when the small win variation display (stock chance variation) of the second special symbol starts during the time-saving play state, it is possible to stock (increase) the second reserved memory by executing the normal symbol variation display or auxiliary play multiple times during the special symbol variation display. Therefore, it is possible to make the player eager to execute the normal symbol variation display, which can stock (increase) the second reserved memory, which is almost always a small win or a big win, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

The right-hit indicator 67 is turned off when the time-saving play state transitions to the normal play state (at the timing of T15). However, the right-hit indicator 67 may be kept on (delayed) until the auxiliary play that is executed as a result of the variable display of the normal symbol that is a winning symbol that is started during the time-saving play state ends, and the right-hit indicator 67 may be turned off when the auxiliary play ends.

In addition, if the normal symbol variable display started during the time-saving play state is a miss, the right-hit indicator 67 may be turned off at the timing of transition to the normal play state (at the timing of T15). In addition, if an auxiliary game in which the second start hole 47 is short-opened is executed as a result of the normal symbol variable display started during the time-saving play state, the right-hit indicator 67 may be turned off at the timing of transition to the normal play state (at the timing of T15), and if an auxiliary game in which the second start hole 47 is long-opened is executed as a result of the normal symbol variable display started during the time-saving play state, the right-hit indicator 67 may be turned off at the timing of the end of the auxiliary game.

In addition, the output of the advantageous state signal is stopped at the timing when the time-saving play state is switched to the normal play state (timing T15), but the output of the advantageous state signal may be continued (delayed) until the auxiliary game that is executed as a result of the variable display of the normal pattern that is a winning combination that is started during the time-saving play state is completed, and the output of the advantageous state signal may be stopped at the timing when this auxiliary game is completed.

In addition, if the variable display of the normal symbol started during the time-saving game state is a miss, the output of the advantageous state signal may be stopped at the timing of transition to the normal game state (timing T15). In addition, if an auxiliary game in which the second start port 47 is short-opened is executed as a result of the variable display of the normal symbol started during the time-saving game state, the output of the advantageous state signal may be stopped at the timing of transition to the normal game state (timing T15), and if an auxiliary game in which the second start port 47 is long-opened is executed as a result of the variable display of the normal symbol started during the time-saving game state, the output of the advantageous state signal may be stopped at the timing of completion of the auxiliary game.

(Main processing of the production control section)
The main processing of the performance control unit 130m will be described with reference to Fig. 42. Fig. 42 is a flowchart of the main processing in the performance control unit 130m.

First, the sub-CPU 130a disables all interrupts in step E1, performs initial CPU settings such as setting internal registers in step E2, and allows access to the RWM area of the sub-RAM 130c in step E3.

In step E4, the sub-CPU 130a initializes (clears to 0) all RWM areas (work area, stack area, unused area) of the sub-RAM 130c, in step E5 it starts the CTC (counter timer circuit) to generate a timer interrupt (4 milliseconds), and in step E6 it enables all interrupts.

In step E7, the sub-CPU 130a performs a sub-random number update process. Specifically, it performs a process to update the various random numbers stored in the RWM area of the sub-RAM 130c. Thereafter, the process of step E7 is repeated.

(Timer interrupt processing of the production control unit)
The timer interruption process of the performance control unit 130m will be described with reference to Fig. 43. Fig. 43 is a flowchart of the timer interruption process in the performance control unit 130m. This timer interruption process is executed by inputting a clock pulse every predetermined period (4 milliseconds) from a reset clock pulse generating circuit provided in the performance control unit 130m.

First, in step E100, the sub-CPU 130a saves the information stored in the registers to the stack area of the RWM area of the sub-RAM 130c, and in step E200, performs timer update processing. Specifically, it performs processing to update various timer counters required for the execution of the performance.

In step E300, the sub-CPU 130a performs command analysis processing. Specifically, the sub-CPU 130a performs processing to analyze the commands (sent from the main control board 110 or the payout control unit 121) stored in the receive buffer in the RWM area of the sub-RAM 130c. Details of the command analysis processing will be described later.

The sub-CPU 130a performs customer waiting control processing in step E400. Specifically, in a customer waiting state where no special symbol variation display or special games (big win game, small win game) are being executed, the sub-CPU 130a judges whether or not the customer waiting time (e.g., 60 seconds) has elapsed, and performs processing to execute a customer waiting demo performance to stimulate the player's desire to play based on the elapse of the customer waiting time.

In step E500, the sub-CPU 130a performs processing for executing the operation-based presentation. Specifically, the sub-CPU 130a executes a promotion presentation that prompts the player to operate the presentation button 17 during a valid period that occurs during the variable presentation, and executes a jackpot advance presentation of the operation-based presentation that suggests the likelihood of a jackpot game being played (provides the player with the expectation that a jackpot game will be played) in response to the operation of the presentation button 17 during this valid period.

There are four types of "operation-related jackpot prediction effects": line prediction effects that suggest the likelihood of a jackpot game being played by the type of line or display mode displayed on the image display device; cut-in prediction effects that suggest the likelihood of a jackpot game being played by the type of cut-in image or display mode displayed on the image display device; and winning/losing determination effects that suggest whether or not a special game will be played by a success effect where the likelihood of a jackpot game being played is 100% or a failure effect where the likelihood of a jackpot game being played is 0%.

In step E600, the sub-CPU 130a performs processing for executing a lamp light-emitting effect. Specifically, the sub-CPU 130a performs processing for executing a lamp light-emitting effect that indicates the likelihood of a jackpot game being played by changing the light-emitting state of the start-gate lamp 75 in response to changes in the hold icon displayed on the image display device and the display state of the icon.

In step E700, the sub-CPU 130a performs a presentation mode update process. Specifically, it determines whether or not an update condition (change in game state, winning a mode update lottery, execution of a SP/SPSP reach presentation that results in a loss, etc.) for the presentation mode (presentation stage) that specifies the presentation elements (background image, presentation image, presentation sound, etc.) in the sound output device 9, the first image display device 70, the second image display device 71, etc., has been met, and if the update condition has been met, it performs a process to update the presentation mode to one of the multiple presentation modes.

The "presentation modes" include normal presentation modes A to D, which are set in the normal game state (non-time-saving game state), countdown mode, time-saving presentation mode A, which is set in the first time-saving game state, time-saving presentation mode B, which is set in the second time-saving game state, and time-saving presentation mode C, which is set in the third time-saving game state.

"Normal presentation modes A to D" are presentation modes that can be set when the normal special chart variation pattern determination table 1 shown in Figure 21 (a) is selected.
The "countdown mode" is a presentation mode that can be set when the normal special chart variation pattern determination table 2 shown in Figure 21 (b) is selected.

In addition, in normal presentation modes A to D and countdown mode, the presentation pattern 70a is displayed in a display format that includes characters and numbers. Also, the difference between normal presentation modes A to D and countdown mode is whether or not the remaining number of times the special pattern will change display until at least the third time-saving game state occurs is displayed, and in this embodiment, the background image, background music, etc. are also different.

The "time-saving performance modes A to B" are performance modes that can be set when the special chart fluctuation pattern determination table for time-saving shown in Figure 22(a) or the special chart fluctuation pattern determination table 2 for time-saving shown in Figure 22(b) is selected.
The "time-saving presentation mode C" is a presentation mode that can be set when the special chart change pattern determination table 2 for time-saving shown in Figure 22 (b) is selected.

In time-saving modes A to C, the effect pattern 70a is displayed in a manner that shows only numbers without characters. Also, the difference between time-saving modes A to C is that the background images and background music are different.

The sub-CPU 130a performs a third time-saving effect process in step E750. Specifically, the sub-CPU 130a performs processes such as judging whether or not to execute a third time-saving effect (such as an RWM clear negation effect that indicates that the RWM has not been cleared (is stationary), as described below, or an activation counter display that indicates the number of times the game will change before transitioning to the third time-saving game state) to suggest information related to the occurrence of the third time-saving game state. Details of the third time-saving effect process will be described later.

In step E800, the sub-CPU 130a performs output control processing. Specifically, it performs processing to transmit various commands set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c to the general control unit 141 and the lamp control unit 150.

In step E900, the sub-CPU 130a restores the registers that were saved to the RWM area of the sub-RAM 130c in step E100 described above, and ends this timer interrupt process.

(Mode flow showing the transition of game modes)
FIG. 44(a) is a mode flow showing the transition of game modes from a normal game state, and FIG. 44(b) is a mode flow showing the transition of game modes from a time-saving game state.

As shown in FIG. 44(a), when the jackpot variable display of the special symbol ends in the normal game state, either the first jackpot game, the second jackpot game, or the third jackpot game is executed, and when the first jackpot game ends, the game transitions to normal presentation mode A (initial presentation mode), which is the normal game state, and when the second jackpot game ends, the game transitions to time-saving presentation mode A, which is the first time-saving game state, and when the third jackpot game ends, the game transitions to time-saving presentation mode B, which is the second time-saving game state.

On the other hand, when the number of times the special symbol changes when the missing change display ends in the normal game state reaches a specified number (750 times), the game will transition to the third time-saving game state, time-saving presentation mode C, without going through the jackpot game.

As shown in FIG. 44(b), when the normal symbol starts displaying a missing variation during time-saving play, the remaining number of times the time-saving normal symbol appears (G) becomes "0". If the second special symbol is not displaying a variation or the second special symbol is displaying a missing variation at this time, a result display is executed to show the results of the game during the series of advantageous periods (while the time-saving play or jackpot play is in progress) that are favorable to the player. When the normal symbol displaying a missing variation ends, the game transitions to normal presentation mode D (a mode exclusive to the end of time-saving play), which is the normal play state. If the mode transition condition is then met (for example, 10 special symbol variations are displayed, or the mode transition lottery is won), the game transitions to normal presentation mode A.

In addition, if the remaining number of time-saving special symbols or the remaining number of time-saving small wins (Z) becomes "0" during time-saving play, and at this time the normal symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner, or the normal symbol is being displayed in a variable manner when an auxiliary play in which the second starting hole 47 is short-opened is being executed, the result display for the series of advantageous zones is not executed, and the game transitions to normal presentation mode A, which is the normal play state.

In addition, in the time-saving game state, the small win game is executed after the small win variation display of the second special symbol starts with an ultra-shortened variation, and if the game ball does not enter the specific area 53 during this small win game and the small win game ends with the remaining number of time-saving special symbols (J), the remaining number of time-saving small wins (Z), or the remaining number of time-saving normal symbols (G) remaining at "0", the result display in the series of advantageous zones is not executed and the game transitions to normal presentation mode A, which is the normal game state.

On the other hand, in the time-saving game state, if the small win variation display of the second special symbol starts with an ultra-shortened variation and then the small win game is executed, and the game ball does not enter the specific area 53 during this small win game, if the remaining number of time-saving special symbols (J), the remaining number of time-saving small wins (Z), and the remaining number of time-saving normal symbols (G) are greater than "0", the game will return to the original time-saving presentation mode (either time-saving presentation mode A, time-saving presentation mode B, or time-saving presentation mode C) in the time-saving game state after the small win game ends.

In addition, in the time-saving game state, the small win game is executed after the small win variation display of the second special pattern starts with an ultra-short variation, and if the game ball enters the specific area 53 during this small win game, the fourth big win game is executed after the small win game ends, and after the fourth big win game ends, the game transitions to the time-saving presentation mode A, which is the first time-saving game state.

In addition, when the jackpot or small jackpot variation display of the second special symbol starts with a stock chance variation during the time-saving game state, a stock chance mode presentation is performed. Even if the remaining number of time-saving normal symbol plays (G) becomes "0" due to the normal symbol variation display being executed during this stock chance mode, the stock chance mode continues. In addition, when the jackpot variation display of the second special symbol with the stock chance variation ends, a third jackpot game is executed, and after the third jackpot game ends, the game transitions to time-saving presentation mode B, which is the second time-saving game state.

Furthermore, when the display of the small win variation of the second special symbol in the stock chance variation ends, a small win game is executed, and even if the game ball does not enter the specific area 53 during this small win game, if the remaining number of time-saving special symbols (J), the remaining number of time-saving small win symbols (Z), and the remaining number of time-saving normal symbols (G) are greater than "0", the game returns to the original time-saving presentation mode (either time-saving presentation mode A, time-saving presentation mode B, or time-saving presentation mode C) which is the time-saving game state after the small win game ends. On the other hand, if a game ball enters the specific area 53 during this small win game, a fourth big win game is executed after the small win game ends, and after the fourth big win game ends, the game transitions to time-saving presentation mode A which is the first time-saving game state.

(Command analysis process of the production control unit)
The command analysis process of the performance control unit 130m will be described with reference to Fig. 45. Fig. 45 is a flowchart showing the command analysis process in the performance control unit 130m.

First, in step E301, the sub-CPU 130a refers to the receive buffer of the sub-RAM 130c to determine whether or not a command has been received. If a command has been received, the process proceeds to step E302; if a command has not been received, the current command analysis process is terminated.

In step E302, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the received command is a setting change command. If it is a setting change command, the process proceeds to step E303. If it is not a setting change command, the process proceeds to step E304.

In step E303, the sub-CPU 130a performs a setting change notification process. Specifically, the sub-CPU 130a performs a process of setting a notification instruction command for starting the setting change notification described above in a transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c. As a result, the notification instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing is performed to execute the setting change notification.

In step E304, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the received command is a setting confirmation command. If it is a setting confirmation command, the process proceeds to step E305. If it is not a setting confirmation command, the process proceeds to step E306.

In step E305, the sub-CPU 130a performs a setting check notification process. Specifically, the sub-CPU 130a performs a process of setting a notification instruction command for starting the above-mentioned setting check notification in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c. As a result, the notification instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing is performed to execute the setting check notification.

In step E306, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the received command is a power-on command or a power restoration command. If it is a power-on command or a power restoration command, the process proceeds to step E307. If it is not a power-on command or a power restoration command, the process proceeds to step E308.

In step E307, the sub-CPU 130a performs a power-on notification process. Specifically, if the received command is a power-on command, the sub-CPU 130a sets a notification command for executing the above-mentioned power-on notification in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c, and if the received command is a power restoration command, the sub-CPU 130a performs a process of setting a notification command for executing the above-mentioned power restoration notification in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c. As a result, the notification command is sent to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing is performed to execute the power-on notification or power restoration notification, and processing is performed to execute an initial operation for operating the movable performance device 73 (first movable member 73a, second movable member 73b) in a predetermined manner and an initial light emission for emitting light from the board lighting device 74 in a predetermined manner.

In step E308, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the received command is an error-related command. If it is an error-related command, the process proceeds to step E309. If it is not an error-related command, the process proceeds to step E310.

"Error-related designation commands" include commands for designating unrecoverable errors, commands for designating improper winning errors, commands for designating abnormal winning errors, commands for designating magnetic errors, commands for designating radio wave errors, commands for designating the start of door opening errors, commands for designating the end of door opening errors, and commands for designating operational errors.

The sub-CPU 130a performs error notification processing in step E309. Specifically, it performs processing to set a notification instruction command in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c in order to execute an error notification (unrecoverable error notification, improper winning error notification, abnormal winning error notification, magnetic error notification, radio wave error notification, door open error notification, operation error notification, etc.) according to the type of error specification command received. As a result, the notification instruction command is sent to the display control unit 140 and lamp control unit 150, and processing is performed to execute various types of error notifications.

In step E310, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the received command is a game state designation command. If it is a game state designation command, the process proceeds to step E311. If it is not a game state designation command, the process proceeds to step E312.

In step E311, the sub-CPU 130a performs a game state setting process. Specifically, the sub-CPU 130a performs a process to update the game state stored in the sub-RAM 130c to a game state corresponding to the game state designation command.

In step E312, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the received command is a special drawing reservation number designation command or a regular drawing reservation number designation command. If it is a special drawing reservation number designation command or a regular drawing reservation number designation command, the process proceeds to step E313, and if it is not a special drawing reservation number designation command or a regular drawing reservation number designation command, the process proceeds to step E314.

In step E313, the sub-CPU 130a performs a reserved number update process. Specifically, when a special reserved number designation command (first special reserved number designation command, second special reserved number designation command) is received, the sub-CPU 130a updates the reserved number of special reserved items stored in the sub-RAM 130c, and performs a process of setting a performance instruction command to update (increase or decrease) the first reserved icon in the first reserved icon display area 70B, the reserved number display in the first reserved number display area 70E, and the second reserved number display area 70F in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c. As a result, the performance instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and a process is performed to update (increase or decrease) the reserved icon in the first reserved icon display area 70B, and the reserved number display in the first reserved number display area 70E, and the second reserved number display area 70F.

The display (update) of the first hold icon in the first hold icon display area 70B is performed when the game is in normal play mode, but is not performed when the game is in time-saving play mode. The update of the hold number display in the first hold number display area 70E and the second hold number display area 70F is performed regardless of the play mode.

In addition, when a command to specify the number of reserved regular maps is received, the number of reserved regular maps stored in the sub-RAM 130 is updated, and a performance instruction command is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c to update (increase or decrease) the regular map reserved icon in the regular map reserved icon display area 70D and the reserved number display in the regular map reserved number display area 70G. This causes the performance instruction command to be sent to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing is performed to update (increase or decrease) the regular map reserved icon in the regular map reserved icon display area 70D and the reserved number display in the regular map reserved number display area 70G.

The display (update) of the regular reserved icon in the regular reserved icon display area 70D is performed when the game is in the time-saving game mode, but is not performed when the game is in the normal game mode. The display of the reserved number in the regular reserved number display area 70G is updated regardless of the game mode.

In step E314, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the received command is a special drawing pre-reading command or a normal drawing pre-reading command. If it is a special drawing pre-reading command or a normal drawing pre-reading command, the received pre-reading command (special drawing planned change pattern, normal drawing planned change pattern) is set in a pre-reading memory area of the sub-RAM 130c (described later) and then the process proceeds to step E315. If it is not a pre-reading command (first special drawing pre-reading command, second special drawing pre-reading command, normal drawing pre-reading command), the process proceeds to step E318.

The "look-ahead memory area" is divided into a first look-ahead memory section for sequentially storing look-ahead information (such as planned special chart change patterns) based on a first special chart look-ahead command, a second look-ahead memory section for sequentially storing pending information based on a second special chart look-ahead command, and a memory section (0th memory section) for storing look-ahead information corresponding to the currently executing change display (change performance), and the first look-ahead memory section and the second look-ahead memory section are each divided into 1st to 4th memory sections.

The first to fourth memory sections of the first look-ahead memory section correspond to the first to fourth memory sections of the first special pattern determination information reserved memory area described above, and when a first special pattern look-ahead designation command is received, the look-ahead information is stored in the memory section corresponding to the first reserved memory. The look-ahead information stored in each memory section is moved (shifted) to the memory section with the next lower number each time a variable display (variable performance) of the first special pattern is executed.

The first to fourth memory sections of the second look-ahead memory section correspond to the first to fourth memory sections of the second special symbol determination information reserved memory area described above, and when a second special symbol look-ahead designation command is received, the look-ahead information is stored in the memory section corresponding to the second reserved memory. The look-ahead information stored in each memory section is moved (shifted) to the memory section with the next lower number each time a variable display (variable performance) of the second special symbol is executed.

This memory unit (the 0th memory unit) corresponds to the special pattern determination information execution memory area described above, and when the variable display of the first special pattern is executed, the pre-reading information moved (shifted) from the first memory unit of the first pre-reading memory unit is stored, and when the variable display of the second special pattern is executed, the pre-reading information moved (shifted) from the first memory unit of the second pre-reading unit is stored.

In step E315, the sub-CPU 130a performs an icon change effect determination process. Specifically, the sub-CPU 130a performs a process to determine whether or not to perform an icon change effect that suggests the expectation (possibility) of a favorable result for the player (a big win game will be executed, a small win game will be executed, or a supplementary game will be executed) by displaying the reserved icon or the icon displayed on the image display device in a special display mode (special icon, specific icon) that is different from the normal display mode (normal icon), and to determine the presentation mode of the icon change effect to be executed. Details of the icon change effect determination process will be described later.

In step E316, the sub-CPU 130a performs a process for determining the light-emitting effect to be used when a winning ball enters the starting hole. Specifically, when the game ball enters the starting hole, the top lamp 10b located at the top center of the glass frame 4 of the frame lighting device 10 is illuminated in a special light-emitting mode different from the normal light-emitting mode, thereby determining whether or not to execute a light-emitting effect when a winning ball is won, which indicates the expectation of a favorable result for the player (a big win game will be played, a small win game will be played, or a supplementary game will be played), and the mode of the light-emitting effect to be executed when a winning ball is won.

In step E317, the sub-CPU 130a performs a process of determining a consecutive performance of a look-ahead. Specifically, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether or not to perform a consecutive performance of a look-ahead that will give the player the expectation (suggesting the possibility of a big win game being played) of a favorable result (a big win game being played, a small win game being played, or a supplementary game being played) by performing a predetermined performance over the variable display (variable performance) of one or more special symbols, and determines the type of consecutive performance of a look-ahead to be performed, and performs a process of setting a performance instruction command in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c to perform the consecutive performance of a look-ahead. As a result, the performance instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and a process of executing the consecutive performance of a look-ahead is performed. The details of the process of determining a consecutive performance of a look-ahead will be described later.

In step E318, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the received command is a special symbol designation command or a normal symbol designation command. If it is a special symbol designation command or a normal symbol designation command, the process proceeds to step E319. If it is not a special symbol designation command or a normal symbol designation command, the process proceeds to step E320.

In step E319, the sub-CPU 130a performs a pattern data determination process. Specifically, the sub-CPU 130a performs a process to determine the effect patterns to be displayed on the image display device as a result of the variable effect, i.e., the arrangement (combination) of the effect patterns to be displayed on a predetermined pay line.

In step E320, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the received command is a special chart variation pattern designation command or a normal chart variation pattern designation command. If it is a special chart variation pattern designation command or a normal chart variation pattern designation command, the process proceeds to step E321. If it is not a special chart variation pattern designation command, the process proceeds to step E325.

In step E321, the sub-CPU 130a performs a variable performance pattern determination process. Specifically, based on the contents of the received special chart variable pattern designation command or normal chart variable pattern designation command, it determines a variable performance pattern, which is the performance mode of the variable performance executed by the performance device including the image display device, and performs a process of setting a performance instruction command indicating the variable performance pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c. As a result, the performance instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing is performed to execute the variable performance. The details of the variable performance pattern determination process will be described later.

In step E322, the sub-CPU 130a performs a preview performance determination process. Specifically, based on the variable performance pattern determined in step E321, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether or not to execute a preview performance that gives the player the expectation of a favorable result (a big win game will be executed, a small win game will be executed, or a supplementary game will be executed), and determines the performance mode (pattern) of the preview performance to be executed, and performs a process of setting the execution information of the preview performance in a specified area of the sub-RAM 130c.

In step E323, the sub-CPU 130a performs an icon display mode update process. Specifically, the sub-CPU 130a performs a process to start the icon change effect determined in the icon change effect determination process in step E315, and to change the display mode of the pending icon or the icon that is already displayed.

In step E324, the sub-CPU 130a performs a look-ahead continuous performance execution process. Specifically, the sub-CPU 130a performs a process of setting a performance instruction command for starting the look-ahead continuous performance determined in the look-ahead continuous performance determination process in step E317 or for changing the performance mode in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c. As a result, the performance instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing is performed to execute the look-ahead continuous performance.

In step E325, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the received command is a special symbol confirmation command or a normal symbol confirmation command. If it is a special symbol confirmation command or a normal symbol confirmation command, the process proceeds to step E326. If it is not a special symbol confirmation command or a normal symbol confirmation command, the process proceeds to step E327.

In step E326, the sub-CPU 130a performs a process of stopping the effect symbols. Specifically, the process performs a process of setting an effect instruction command in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c to stop the display of the effect symbols that are in a temporarily stopped state and end the variable effect. As a result, the effect instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and a process of ending the variable effect is performed.

In step E327, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the received command is a special game command. If it is a special game command, the process proceeds to step E328. If it is not a special game command, the sub-CPU 130a ends the current command analysis process.

"Special game designation commands" include a big win opening designation command, a big win round designation command, a big win ending designation command, a small win opening designation command, a small win ending designation command, etc.

In step E328, the sub-CPU 130a performs a special game performance determination process. Specifically, in the case of an opening designation command, a process is performed in which a performance instruction command for determining an opening performance for a big win game or a small win game and executing the opening performance is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c. In the case of a round designation command, a process is performed in which a performance instruction command for determining a round performance for a round game and executing the round performance is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c. In the case of an ending designation command, a process is performed in which a performance instruction command for determining an ending performance for a big win game or a small win game and executing the ending performance is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c, and the current command analysis process is terminated. As a result, the performance instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing is performed to execute the opening performance, round performance, or ending performance.

(Icon change performance determination process of the performance control unit)
The icon change effect determination process of the effect control unit 130m will be described with reference to Fig. 46. Fig. 46 is a flowchart showing the icon change effect determination process in the effect control unit 130m.

In step E315-1, the sub-CPU 130a refers to the look-ahead designation commands (first special chart look-ahead designation command, second special chart look-ahead designation command, normal chart look-ahead designation command) received from the main control board 110, and in step E315-2, determines whether or not the current time is a period during which an icon change performance can be executed. If the current time is a period during which an icon change performance can be executed, the process proceeds to step E315-3. If the current time is not a period during which an icon change performance can be executed, the process proceeds to step E315-7, assuming that the icon change performance based on the currently received look-ahead designation command will not be executed.

The "period during which the icon change effect can be executed" refers to a period during which a jackpot game is not being played, a normal game state is being played when a first special symbol pre-read command based on a win at the first start gate 45 is received, and a time-saving game state (specific game state) is being played when a normal symbol pre-read command based on a win at the normal symbol gate 44 is received. Note that when a second special symbol pre-read command based on a win at the second start gate 47 is received, the icon change effect is not executed.

In step E315-3, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether or not there is a change scenario in the advance reservation (in the case of a first special chart pre-reading designation command, the reserved memory corresponding to the first special chart pre-reading designation command received earlier is the target, and in the case of a normal chart pre-reading designation command, the reserved memory corresponding to the first normal chart pre-reading designation command received earlier is the target), that is, whether or not a change scenario has been set in the pre-reading information storage area. If there is a change scenario, the process proceeds to step E315-7 assuming that the icon change performance based on the currently received pre-reading designation command will not be executed, and if there is no change scenario, the process proceeds to step E315-4.

In step E315-4, the sub-CPU 130a acquires a random number value for determining the final display mode of the icon to be additionally displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display), and in step E315-5, selects an icon final display mode determination table (see FIG. 47) for determining the final display mode of the icon. Details of the icon final display mode determination table will be described later.

The sub-CPU 130a determines the final icon display mode in step E315-6. Specifically, the sub-CPU 130a refers to the final icon display mode determination table shown in FIG. 47 and determines one of the multiple final icon display modes based on the game state (normal game state, time-saving game state), the type of symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol, normal symbol), the type of pre-reading command (expected change pattern), and the selection rate (%) of each final icon display mode.

In step E315-7, the sub-CPU 130a determines the normal icon (white icon), which is the normal display mode, as the final icon display mode.

In step E315-8, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the determined final icon display mode is a special icon (either a blue icon, a red icon, or a rainbow icon) that executes an icon change performance. If it is a special icon that executes an icon change performance, the process proceeds to step E315-9, and if it is not a display mode that executes an icon change performance, the process proceeds to step E315-12.

In step E315-9, the sub-CPU 130a selects a change scenario determination table (see FIG. 48) for determining the change scenario of the icon change presentation. Details of the change scenario determination table will be described later. This change scenario indicates the transition of the display mode from when the reserved icon appears to when it disappears.

In step E315-10, the sub-CPU 130a determines a change scenario and sets it in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub-RAM 130c corresponding to the reserved memory number counter. Specifically, the sub-CPU 130a refers to the reserved icon change scenario determination table (special reserved icon change scenario determination table or regular reserved icon change scenario determination table) shown in FIG. 48, and determines one change scenario from among multiple change scenarios based on the final icon display mode, the reserved memory number of the patterns (first special pattern, regular pattern) corresponding to the look-ahead designation command, and the selection rate (%) of each change scenario.

In step E315-11, the sub-CPU 130a identifies the winning icon, which is the display mode of the icon that is first displayed on the first image display device 70 (main LCD), from the determined change scenario, sets the icon display command for that winning icon in the transmission buffer, and ends this icon change presentation determination process.

As a result, the icon display command is sent to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and a pending icon in a display mode corresponding to the icon display command of the winning icon is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main LCD), and a predetermined sound effect (a first winning sound when displayed as a normal icon, and a second winning sound when displayed as a special icon or a specific icon) is output.

In step E315-12, the sub-CPU 130a determines a non-change scenario in which no icon change performance is performed, and sets this in the pre-read information storage area of the sub-RAM 130c corresponding to the pending memory number counter.

In step E315-13, the sub-CPU 130a sets the icon display command for the normal icon in the transmission buffer and ends the icon change presentation determination process. This causes the icon display command to be sent to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and a reserved icon with a display mode corresponding to the icon display command for the normal icon is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main LCD) and a predetermined sound effect (first winning sound) is output.

In the icon change effect determination process of this embodiment, an icon change effect (pending icon change effect, the icon change effect) is executed when there is no change scenario in the advance hold, but an icon change effect may be executed when the advance hold does not perform a reach effect, and an icon change effect may not be executed when the advance hold performs a reach effect. In this way, no change in the display mode of the pending icon occurs during the change effect corresponding to the advance hold in which a reach effect is executed, and a change in the display mode of the pending icon occurs during the change effect corresponding to the advance hold in which a reach effect is not executed, so that the icon change effect will not hinder the reach effect, and it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

In addition, even if the advance holds include one that performs a reach effect, the icon change effect may be executed, but the icon change effect may be executed more easily (executed at a higher rate) when the advance holds do not include one that performs a reach effect than when the advance holds include one that performs a reach effect.

In addition, when a normal map pre-reading command is received during time-saving play, an icon change effect is executed, but it is also possible not to execute the icon change effect even if a normal map pre-reading command is received during time-saving play. In this case, the icon may be displayed but the icon change effect may not be executed, or the icon itself may not be displayed and the icon change effect may not be executed.

In addition, even if a second special chart pre-reading command is received during the time-saving play state, the icon change effect is not executed. However, in the time-saving play state, the number of reserved icons corresponding to the second reserved memory (U2) may be displayed, and the icon change effect may be executed when the second special chart pre-reading command is received. On the other hand, the number of reserved icons corresponding to the second reserved memory (U2) may be displayed, but the icon change effect may not be executed.

(Icon Final Display Mode Determination Table)
FIG. 47 is a diagram showing an icon final display mode determination table which is referred to when determining the icon final display mode.

The icon final display mode determination table associates the game state (normal game state, time-saving game state), the type of pattern (first special pattern, second special pattern, normal pattern), the type of look-ahead command (special pattern planned change pattern, normal pattern planned change pattern), the selection rate (%) of each icon final display mode, and the selected icon final display mode, and for reference, the performance content of the planned change pattern corresponding to the look-ahead command is also listed.

The final icon display modes are set to normal icons (white icons) that do not indicate the likelihood of a big or small win, and special icons (blue icons, red icons, rainbow icons) that indicate the likelihood of a big or small win. The likelihood of a big or small win associated with the special icons increases in the following order: (white icon <) blue icon < red icon < rainbow icon (guaranteed big win).

The first feature of the icon final display mode determination table shown in FIG. 47 is that when the first special pattern pre-reading command indicates a jackpot, a rainbow icon may be determined as the icon final display mode, whereas when the normal pattern pre-reading command indicates a jackpot, a rainbow icon is not determined as the icon final display mode. By doing this, players will not be given false hope when an auxiliary game is played when it is not yet confirmed that a jackpot game will be played, and it is possible to increase the excitement of the game.

A second feature of the icon final display mode determination table shown in FIG. 47 is that the icon change effect is more likely to be executed (the icon is more likely to become blue or red) when the normal map pre-read command is a hit than when it is a miss. This makes it easier to heighten the player's sense of anticipation when an auxiliary game (opening of the second start hole 47) that is likely to lead to a jackpot is executed, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

The third feature of the icon final state determination table shown in FIG. 47 is that the icon change effect is more likely to be executed (more likely to become a blue icon or a red icon) when the normal map planned change pattern specified by the normal map pre-reading designation command is a chance change (miss) than when it is a shortened change (miss). By doing this, it becomes easier to increase the player's expectations when a chance change, which has a higher probability of winning than a shortened change, is executed, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

The fourth feature of the icon final display mode determination table shown in FIG. 47 is that, even if the normal map planned variation pattern specified by the normal map pre-reading designation command is the same win, the icon change effect is more likely to be executed (the icon is more likely to become blue or red) when the normal map planned variation pattern specified by the normal map pre-reading designation command is a chance variation (win), which is a variation pattern when an auxiliary game in which the second starting port 47 is long-opened (easy-to-win opening) is executed, than when the normal map planned variation pattern specified by the normal map pre-reading designation command is a chance variation (win), which is a variation pattern when an auxiliary game in which the second starting port 47 is long-opened (easy-to-win opening) is executed, even if the normal map planned variation pattern specified by the normal map pre-reading designation command is the same win, than when the normal map planned variation pattern specified by the normal map pre-reading designation command is a chance variation (win), which is a variation pattern when an auxiliary game in which the second starting port 47 is long-opened (easy-to-win opening) is executed. By doing this, it is easier to increase the player's expectations when an auxiliary game that is likely to lead to a jackpot (opening of the second starting port 47) is executed, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

The fifth feature of the icon final state determination table shown in FIG. 47 is that the icon change effect is more likely to be executed (the icon is more likely to become blue) when a false miss change (win), which is the change pattern when an auxiliary game is executed, is executed than when a shortened change (miss), which is the change pattern when an auxiliary game is not executed, is executed.

The sixth feature of the icon final mode determination table shown in FIG. 47 is that when a jackpot game is executed or when an auxiliary game that is likely to lead to a jackpot (an auxiliary game in which the second starting hole 47 is opened for a long time) is executed, an icon change effect (display of a rainbow icon) that suggests in advance that a jackpot game will be executed can be executed even before a specified period (e.g., one change before) of the variable effect in which the jackpot game or auxiliary game is executed, but because whether or not the third time-saving game state will occur is not subject to judgment, an icon change effect that suggests in advance that the third time-saving game state will occur is not executed. By doing so, it is possible to increase the player's expectations for a jackpot while avoiding the inconvenience of the third time-saving game state occurring in vain, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, if the normal map pre-reading designation command indicates a win, the rainbow icon is not determined as the final icon display mode. However, if there is a chance variation (win) when an auxiliary game in which the second starting hole 47 is long-opened is executed, as long as the game ball is hit to the right, there is an almost 100% probability that the ball will enter the second starting hole 47, resulting in a small win or a big win, so the rainbow icon may be determined as the final icon display mode. In this way, it is possible to increase the player's awareness of the auxiliary game in which the second starting hole 47 is long-opened, and to increase the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, if the rainbow icon is determined when the general map pre-read command indicates a win, it is advisable to make the rate at which the rainbow icon is determined as a jackpot higher than the rate at which the rainbow icon is determined as a win. This makes it possible to differentiate between jackpots and wins that are not confirmed to be jackpots, making the game more interesting.

(Change Scenario Decision Table)
Figure 48 (a) is a diagram showing a special map reserve icon change scenario determination table which is referenced when determining the change scenario of the first reserve icon, and Figure 48 (b) is a diagram showing a regular map reserve icon change scenario determination table which is referenced when determining the change scenario of the regular map reserve icon.

Each change scenario determination table corresponds to the final display mode of the icon, the number of reserved special or normal symbols corresponding to the look-ahead designation command (first special symbol look-ahead designation command, normal symbol look-ahead designation command), the selection rate (%) of each change scenario, and the change scenario to be selected, and for reference, the advance changes in each change scenario and the icon update mode in that change are listed.

"Pre-change" refers to a change display (change performance) that is executed based on special map judgment information or ordinary map judgment information that was stored before the special map judgment information or ordinary map judgment information that corresponds to the newly received look-ahead specification command, and "the change" refers to a change display (change performance) that is executed based on the special map judgment information or ordinary map judgment information that corresponds to the newly received look-ahead specification command.

The change scenarios include scenarios (e.g., scenario 01, etc.) in which the display mode of the icon does not change while the pre-change is being performed (the pending icon change performance is not executed) but changes while the change is being performed (the relevant icon change performance is executed), scenarios (e.g., scenario 04, etc.) in which the display mode of the icon changes while the pre-change is being performed (the pending icon change performance is executed) but does not change while the change is being performed (the relevant icon change performance is not executed), and scenarios (e.g., scenario 15, etc.) in which the display mode of the icon changes while the pre-change is being performed and while the change is being performed (the pending icon change performance and the relevant icon change performance are executed).

The first feature of the change scenario determination table shown in FIG. 48 is that the rate at which a special reserve icon changes to a special reserve icon with a higher expectation after a win is different from the rate at which a regular reserve icon changes to a regular reserve icon with a higher expectation after a win is different. By doing this, it is possible to differentiate the tendency of the icon change between the special reserve icon and the regular reserve icon, making the game more interesting.

The second feature of the change scenario determination table shown in FIG. 48 is that the percentage at which the special reserve icon is displayed in the final icon display mode when a prize is won is different from the percentage at which the regular reserve icon is displayed in the final icon display mode when a prize is won. By doing this, the tendency of the icon change can be made different between the special reserve icon and the regular reserve icon, making the game more interesting.

A third feature of the change scenario determination table shown in FIG. 48 is that even if the final display mode of the icon is the same (e.g., blue icon, red icon), the number of change scenarios (change patterns) for the special reserved icon is different from the number of change scenarios (change patterns) for the regular reserved icon. By doing this, it is possible to make the icon change tendencies different between the special reserved icon and the regular reserved icon, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

When the third time-saving play state occurs, an icon change effect that suggests in advance that the third time-saving play state will occur is not executed, but an icon change effect that suggests that the third time-saving play state will occur (for example, displaying a yellow flashing icon, outputting a change sound, etc.) may be executed. In this case, before a specified period of the change effect in which a jackpot play is executed (for example, one change before), execution of the icon change effect that suggests that the third time-saving play state will occur may be restricted (for example, not executed, or even if executed, no change sound is output, etc.).

(Winning light-emitting effect determination process of the effect control unit)
The process of determining the light-emitting effect to be used when a prize is won by the effect control unit 130m will be described with reference to Fig. 49. Fig. 49 is a flow chart showing the process of determining the light-emitting effect to be used when a prize is won by the effect control unit 130m.

In step E316-1, the sub-CPU 130a refers to the look-ahead designation command (first special chart look-ahead designation command, second special chart look-ahead designation command, normal chart look-ahead designation command) received from the main control board 110, and in step E316-2, determines whether or not the current time is a period during which the light-emitting effect at the time of winning can be executed. If the current time is a period during which the light-emitting effect at the time of winning can be executed, the process moves to step E316-3, and if the current time is not a period during which the light-emitting effect at the time of winning can be executed, the process ends, assuming that the light-emitting effect at the time of winning based on the look-ahead designation command received this time will not be executed.

The "period during which the light-emitting effect can be executed when a winning jackpot" refers to a state in which a jackpot game is not being played, a state in which a normal game is being played if a command to specify a first special symbol look-ahead based on a winning jackpot at the first starting gate 45 is received, and a state in which a time-saving game is being played if a command to specify a second special symbol look-ahead based on a winning jackpot at the second starting gate 47 or a command to specify a normal symbol look-ahead based on a winning jackpot at the normal gate 44 is received, etc.

In step E316-3, the sub-CPU 130a acquires a random number value for determining the winning light-emitting performance pattern to be executed by the top lamp 10b of the frame lighting device 10, and in step E316-4, selects a winning light-emitting performance pattern determination table (see FIG. 50) for determining the winning light-emitting performance pattern. Details of the winning light-emitting performance pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E316-5, the sub-CPU 130a determines the winning light-emitting performance pattern. Specifically, the sub-CPU 130a refers to the winning light-emitting performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. 50, and determines one winning light-emitting performance pattern from among multiple winning light-emitting performance patterns based on the type of symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol, normal symbol), the type of pre-read command (expected change pattern), and the selection rate (%) of each winning light-emitting performance pattern.

In step E316-6, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the determined winning light-emitting effect pattern is a pattern that executes a winning light-emitting effect. If it is a pattern that executes a winning light-emitting effect, the process proceeds to step E316-7. If it is a pattern that does not execute a winning light-emitting effect, the process ends.

In step E316-7, the sub-CPU 130a sets the winning light-emitting effect execution command corresponding to the determined winning light-emitting effect pattern in the transmission buffer, and ends this winning light-emitting effect determination process. This causes the winning light-emitting effect execution command to be sent to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the winning light-emitting effect is executed in the effect mode corresponding to the winning light-emitting effect execution command.

(Winning Light Emitting Pattern Determination Table)
FIG. 50 shows a winning light-emitting effect pattern determination table that is referenced when determining a winning light-emitting effect pattern.

The winning light-emitting performance pattern determination table associates the type of symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol, normal symbol), the type of pre-reading command (planned change pattern), the selection rate (%) of each winning light-emitting performance pattern, and the winning light-emitting performance pattern to be selected, and for reference, the performance format for each winning light-emitting performance pattern is also listed.

The winning light-emitting performance patterns include winning light-emitting performance pattern 00, which does not execute the winning light-emitting performance, and winning light-emitting performance patterns 01 and 02, which execute the winning light-emitting performance. In winning light-emitting performance patterns 01 and 02, the top lamp 10b of the frame lighting device 10 emits white or yellow light and a specified sound effect is output from the audio output device 9.

The first feature of the winning light-emitting effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 50 is that a winning light-emitting effect is more likely to be executed with a special chart pre-reading command (planned fluctuation pattern) that has a high expectation of a favorable result for the player than with a special chart pre-reading command (planned fluctuation pattern) that has a low expectation of a favorable result for the player (expectation of a small win or a big win). In this way, it becomes easier to increase the player's expectations for the execution of a fluctuation effect that has a high expectation of a favorable result for the player, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

The second feature of the winning light-emitting effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 50 is that the winning light-emitting effect is more likely to be executed in the case of a big win or a win (a big win is expected to occur after winning the second starting hole 47 and going through a small win) than in the case of a miss. This can increase the player's anticipation for a big win or a win (a big win is expected after winning the second starting hole 47 and going through a small win), making the game more enjoyable.

The third feature of the winning light pattern determination table shown in FIG. 50 is that when a big win game or auxiliary game (a big win via a small win is expected after winning the second start port 47) is executed, a winning light-emitting effect (rainbow light emission & sound effect output) that suggests in advance that a big win game or auxiliary game (a big win via a small win is expected after winning the second start port 47) will be executed can be executed even before a predetermined period (for example, one change before) of the variable effect in which the big win game or auxiliary game (a big win via a small win after winning the second start port 47) is executed, while when the third time-saving game state occurs, a winning light-emitting effect that suggests in advance that the third time-saving game state will occur is not executed. By doing so, it is possible to increase the player's expectations for a big win or win (a big win via a small win after winning the second start port 47) while avoiding the inconvenience of the third time-saving game state occurring without a win, and to increase the interest in the game.

The fourth feature of the winning light pattern determination table shown in FIG. 50 is that the winning light effect can be executed with the same winning light effect pattern in both the case of a big win and a win (where the player wins the second starting hole 47 and is expected to win the big win via a small win). This effectively heightens the player's sense of expectation, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

It is also possible to provide a winning illumination pattern that guarantees a jackpot (for example, the top lamp 10b illuminates in rainbow colors and the audio output device 9 outputs a confirmation sound). In this case, it is advisable to determine the winning illumination pattern that guarantees a jackpot with the lowest probability when a full rotation reach is executed.

In addition, when the third time-saving game state occurs, a winning light-emitting effect that suggests in advance that the third time-saving game state will occur is not executed, but a winning light-emitting effect that suggests that the third time-saving game state will occur (e.g., flashing blue, output of sound effects, etc.) may be executed. In this case, before a predetermined period (e.g., one fluctuation) of the variable effect in which a jackpot game or auxiliary game (which is expected to win a jackpot via a small jackpot after winning the second starting port 47) is executed, the execution of the winning light-emitting effect that suggests that the third time-saving game state will occur may be restricted (e.g., not executed, or even if executed, sound effects may not be output, etc.).

(Preview read-ahead continuous performance decision processing of the performance control unit)
The look-ahead continuous performance determination process in the performance control unit 130m will be described with reference to Fig. 51. Fig. 51 is a flowchart showing the look-ahead continuous performance determination process in the performance control unit 130m.

In step E317-1, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether or not a first special chart pre-reading command has been received from the main control board 110. If a first special chart pre-reading command has been received, the process proceeds to step E530-2, and if a first special chart pre-reading command has not been received, the process for determining the pre-reading continuous performance is terminated.

In step E317-2, the sub-CPU 130a refers to the received first special chart pre-read command and determines whether or not a jackpot has been reached, the type of jackpot game, and the presentation content (planned variation pattern).

In step E317-3, it is determined whether or not the current period is one in which the look-ahead zone performance can be executed. If the current period is one in which the look-ahead zone performance can be executed, the process proceeds to step E317-4. If the current period is not one in which the look-ahead zone performance can be executed, the process proceeds to step E317-6, assuming that the look-ahead zone performance based on the currently received first special chart look-ahead designation command will not be executed.

The "look-ahead zone effect" is an effect that continuously suggests the expectation of a special game being executed by using background images, text information, and color information (expectation value information) by performing in-zone effects (displaying a look-ahead zone background image, displaying a blue zone image or a red heat zone image, and outputting zone BGM or heat zone BGM) across one or more variable effects, and is a type of look-ahead continuous effect.

The "period during which the look-ahead zone effect can be executed" includes a period when there is no pre-emption that executes the look-ahead zone effect, when a jackpot is not being played, when the normal game mode is in effect, etc. Therefore, while the look-ahead zone effect can be executed in the normal game mode, the look-ahead zone effect cannot be executed in the time-saving game mode.

In step E317-4, the sub-CPU 130a selects a look-ahead zone performance scenario determination table (see FIG. 52) for determining the scenario of the look-ahead zone performance. Details of the look-ahead zone performance scenario determination table will be described later.

In step E317-5, the sub-CPU 130a determines the look-ahead zone performance scenario. Specifically, the sub-CPU 130a refers to the look-ahead zone performance scenario determination table shown in FIG. 52, and determines one look-ahead zone performance scenario from among multiple look-ahead zone performance scenarios based on the number of reserved first special symbols, the type of expected fluctuation pattern indicated by the look-ahead designation command, and the selection rate (%) of each preview scenario.

In step E317-6, the sub-CPU 130a determines a non-execution scenario for the look-ahead zone presentation as a presentation scenario in which the look-ahead zone presentation is not executed.

In step E317-7, the sub-CPU 130a sets the determined look-ahead zone performance scenario in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub-RAM 130c, which corresponds to the reserved number counter. As a result, the look-ahead zone performance scenario is referenced in the look-ahead continuous performance execution process of step E324 described above, and processing is performed to execute the look-ahead zone performance.

In step E317-8, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether or not the current period is one in which the look-ahead countdown performance can be executed. If the current period is one in which the look-ahead countdown performance can be executed, the process proceeds to step E317-9. If the current period is not one in which the look-ahead countdown performance can be executed, the process proceeds to step E317-11, assuming that the look-ahead countdown performance based on the currently received look-ahead designation command will not be executed.

The "pre-reading countdown effect" is an effect that uses text and sound information to intermittently indicate the likelihood of a special game being played by performing a countdown effect (displaying a counting image and outputting a counting sound) over one or more variable effects, and is a type of pre-reading continuous effect.

The "period during which the look-ahead countdown effect can be executed" includes periods when there are no reserved balls that execute the look-ahead countdown effect, when a jackpot game is not in progress, when the game is in a time-saving game mode, etc. Therefore, the look-ahead countdown effect is not executed in the normal game mode, but the look-ahead countdown effect can be executed in the time-saving game mode.

In step E317-9, the sub-CPU 130a selects a look-ahead countdown performance scenario determination table (see FIG. 53) for determining the scenario for the look-ahead countdown performance. Details of the look-ahead countdown performance scenario determination table will be described later.

In step E317-10, the sub-CPU 130a determines a look-ahead countdown performance scenario. Specifically, the sub-CPU 130a refers to the look-ahead countdown performance scenario determination table shown in FIG. 53, and determines one look-ahead countdown performance scenario from among multiple look-ahead countdown performance scenarios based on the number of reserved first special symbols, the type of expected variation pattern indicated by the look-ahead designation command, and the selection rate (%) of each performance scenario.

In step E317-11, the sub-CPU 130a determines a non-execution scenario for the look-ahead countdown performance as a performance scenario in which the look-ahead countdown performance is not executed.

In step E317-12, the sub-CPU 130a sets the determined look-ahead countdown performance scenario in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub-RAM 130c, which corresponds to the reserved number counter. This causes the look-ahead countdown performance scenario to be referenced in the look-ahead continuous performance execution process of step E324 described above, and processing is performed to execute the look-ahead countdown performance. When this process ends, the current look-ahead continuous performance determination process ends.

In this way, when a variable performance corresponding to the first special symbol is executed, a look-ahead continuous performance is executed, whereas when a variable performance corresponding to a normal symbol is executed, a look-ahead continuous performance is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to differentiate between the case where a variable performance corresponding to the first special symbol is executed and the case where a variable performance corresponding to a normal symbol is executed, which makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, when a variable performance corresponding to the first special symbol is executed, a look-ahead continuous performance is executed, whereas when a variable performance corresponding to the second special symbol (such as a variable performance of only special symbols) is executed, a look-ahead continuous performance is not executed. This makes it possible to differentiate between the case where a variable performance corresponding to the first special symbol is executed and the case where a variable performance corresponding to the second special symbol is executed, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, a look-ahead continuous performance may be executed when a performance corresponding to a normal symbol is executed. In this case, the execution rate may be lower when a winning performance corresponding to a normal symbol is executed than when a big win performance corresponding to a first special symbol is executed, or vice versa. Also, the execution rate may be lower when a losing performance corresponding to a normal symbol is executed than when a losing performance corresponding to a first special symbol is executed, or vice versa.

(Look-ahead zone performance scenario decision table)
FIG. 52 shows a look-ahead zone presentation scenario determination table that is referred to when determining a look-ahead zone presentation scenario.

The look-ahead zone performance scenario determination table associates the number of reserved first special symbols, the expected change pattern indicated by the first special symbol look-ahead designation command, the selection rate (%) of the performance scenario for each look-ahead zone performance, and the performance scenario for the selected look-ahead zone performance, and for reference, the advance changes in each performance scenario and the performance mode of the look-ahead zone performance in that change are listed.

"Pre-change" refers to a change display (change performance) that is executed based on special chart determination information stored before the special chart determination information corresponding to the newly received first special chart pre-reading command, and "the change" refers to a change display (change performance) that is executed based on the special chart determination information corresponding to the newly received first special chart pre-reading command.

"Zone" refers to the execution of normal zone effects (display of a look-ahead zone background image, display of a blue zone image, output of zone background music), while "hot zone" refers to the execution of heat zone effects (display of a look-ahead zone background image, display of a red heat zone image, output of heat zone background music) which have a higher chance of winning than normal zone effects.

The look-ahead zone performance scenarios include a non-execution scenario in which the look-ahead zone performance is not executed (e.g., scenario 00), a scenario in which the zone performance is not executed during pre-change but is executed during the change (e.g., scenario 01), and a scenario in which the zone performance is executed during both pre-change and the change (e.g., scenario 02).

The first feature of the look-ahead zone performance scenario determination table shown in FIG. 52 is that it sets a performance scenario in which the performance mode of the performance during the zone does not progress (change) to a performance mode with a high expectation of special play, and a performance scenario in which the performance mode of the performance during the zone progresses (changes) to a performance mode with a high expectation of special play. By doing so, it is possible to make the player anticipate whether or not the performance mode of the performance during the zone will progress (change), making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The second feature of the look-ahead zone presentation scenario determination table shown in FIG. 52 is that the presentation mode of the look-ahead zone presentation is more likely to progress (change) with the current change than with prior change. This makes it easier to maintain the player's sense of expectation for a long period of time, and can bring the player's sense of expectation to a climax with the current change, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The third feature of the look-ahead zone performance scenario determination table shown in FIG. 52 is that it does not execute look-ahead zone performances that suggest that a jackpot game will definitely be executed, nor look-ahead zone performances that suggest that a third time-saving game state will definitely occur. By doing this, it is possible to attract the player's interest in the results of the look-ahead zone performances, and it is possible to increase the player's anticipation of a jackpot while also improving the enjoyment of the game.

It is also possible to execute a look-ahead zone presentation that suggests that a jackpot game will definitely be played, but it is also possible not to execute a look-ahead zone presentation that suggests that a third time-saving game state will definitely occur.

(Preview countdown performance scenario decision table)
FIG. 53 shows a look-ahead countdown performance scenario determination table that is referenced when determining a look-ahead countdown performance scenario.

The look-ahead countdown performance scenario determination table associates the number of reserved first special symbols, the expected change pattern indicated by the first special symbol look-ahead designation command, the selection rate (%) of the performance scenario for each look-ahead countdown performance, and the performance scenario for the look-ahead countdown performance to be selected, and for reference, the advance changes in each performance scenario and the performance mode of the look-ahead countdown performance in that change are listed.

"Pre-change" refers to a change display (change performance) that is executed based on special chart determination information stored before the special chart determination information corresponding to the newly received first special chart pre-reading command, and "the change" refers to a change display (change performance) that is executed based on the special chart determination information corresponding to the newly received first special chart pre-reading command.

"Count 3" means that a count image showing "3" is displayed and a count sound is output, "Count 2" means that a count image showing "2" is displayed and a count sound is output, "Count 1" means that a count image showing "1" is displayed and a count sound is output, and "Count 0" means that a count image showing "0" is displayed and a count sound is output.

The first feature of the look-ahead countdown performance scenario determination table shown in FIG. 53 is that it does not execute a look-ahead countdown performance that suggests that a jackpot game will be played, nor a look-ahead countdown performance that suggests that a third time-saving game state will occur. This makes it possible to attract the player's interest in the results of the look-ahead countdown performance, heightening the player's anticipation of a jackpot while also improving the enjoyment of the game.

It is also possible to execute a look-ahead countdown effect that suggests that a jackpot game will definitely be played, but it is also possible not to execute a look-ahead countdown effect that suggests that a third time-saving game state will definitely occur.

(Summary of the various tables shown in Figures 47 to 53)
Here, the first feature of the various tables related to the look-ahead performance shown in Figures 47 to 53 is that during the normal game state, the execution of a predetermined look-ahead performance (icon change performance, winning light performance, etc.) that suggests the result of the normal pattern variable display (normal pattern reserved memory (F)) in advance is restricted, and during the time-saving game state, it is possible to execute a predetermined look-ahead performance (icon change performance, winning light performance, etc.) that suggests the result of the normal pattern variable display (normal pattern reserved memory (F)). By doing so, it is possible to improve the performance effect in the time-saving game state where the variable display of the normal pattern is important, and to increase the interest in the game.

A second feature of the various tables relating to the look-ahead effects shown in Figures 47 to 53 is that there are fewer types of look-ahead effects (icon change effects, winning light effects) that suggest in advance the outcome of the variable display of the normal symbols executed in the time-saving game state than there are types of look-ahead effects (icon change effects, look-ahead zone effects, look-ahead countdown effects, winning light effects) that suggest in advance the outcome of the variable display of the first special symbol executed in the normal game state. By doing this, while improving the effect of the normal game state, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling annoyed by the look-ahead effects in the time-saving game state, making the game more interesting.

A third feature of the various tables relating to the look-ahead effects shown in Figures 47 to 53 is that when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed regardless of the game state, the execution of the icon change effect that suggests the result of the variable display of the second special symbol (second reserved memory (U2)) in advance is restricted. By doing so, in the time-saving game state, it becomes easier to attract the player's interest in the variable display of the normal symbol than in the variable display of the second special symbol, making it possible to increase the excitement of the game.

A fourth feature of the various tables relating to the look-ahead effects shown in Figures 47 to 53 is that there are more types of look-ahead effects (icon change effects, light-emitting effects when winning) that suggest in advance the outcome of the variable display of the normal symbols executed in the time-saving play state than there are types of look-ahead effects (light-emitting effects when winning) that suggest in advance the outcome of the variable display of the second special symbols executed in the time-saving play state. By doing this, it becomes easier to attract the player's interest in the variable display of the normal symbols than in the variable display of the second special symbols in the time-saving play state, making it possible to increase the excitement of the game.

(Variable performance pattern determination process of the performance control unit)
The variable performance pattern determination process of the performance control unit 130m will be described with reference to Fig. 54. Fig. 54 is a flowchart of the variable performance pattern determination process in the performance control unit 130m.

First, in step E321-1, the sub-CPU 130a refers to the received variation pattern designation command, and in step E321-2, determines whether or not the current state is normal gameplay. If it is normal gameplay, the process proceeds to step E321-3. If it is not normal gameplay (time-saving gameplay), the process proceeds to step E321-4.

In step E321-3, the sub-CPU 130a selects the normal variable performance pattern determination table (see FIG. 55(a)) and moves the process to step E321-5. Details of the normal variable performance pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E321-4, the sub-CPU 130a selects the time-saving variable performance pattern determination table (see FIG. 55(b)) and moves the process to step E321-5.

In step E321-5, the sub-CPU 130a refers to the selected variable presentation pattern determination table to determine one variable presentation pattern from among the multiple variable presentation patterns, and sets it in a specified area of the sub-RAM 130c.

In step E321-6, the sub-CPU 130a sets the variable performance pattern instruction command corresponding to the determined variable performance pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c, and ends this variable performance pattern determination process. This causes the variable performance pattern instruction command to be sent to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing is performed to execute the variable performance.

(Variable performance pattern determination table)
Figure 55 is a diagram showing a normal variable presentation pattern determination table which is referenced when determining a variable presentation pattern in the normal game state, and Figure 56 is a diagram showing a time-saving variable presentation pattern determination table which is referenced when determining a variable presentation pattern in the time-saving game state.

As shown in Figures 55 and 56, the variable performance pattern determination table associates the type of symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol, normal symbol), the type of special pattern corresponding to the variable pattern designation command (special symbol variable pattern designation command, normal symbol variable pattern designation command), the selection rate (%) of each variable performance pattern, and the variable performance pattern to be selected, and for reference, the performance configuration for each variable performance pattern is listed. Note that in variable performances other than the "special symbol change" described below, both the variable display of the performance symbol 70 and the variable display of the special symbol TZ are performed.

"Variation" in the performance configuration column indicates that a normal variation display is executed in which no reach state is formed by the performance pattern 70a.
"Shortened variation" indicates that a shortened variation display is executed that is shorter than the normal variation display and does not result in a reach state.

"Pseudo failure" refers to the execution of a pseudo consecutive failure effect in which the pseudo consecutive effect is not executed after a performance pattern 70a is temporarily stopped during the display of a single changing special pattern and then changed again, which indicates whether or not the pseudo consecutive effect will be executed.
"Pseudo success" indicates that after a presentation is performed to hint at whether or not a pseudo consecutive performance will be performed, a pseudo consecutive success performance is performed, which results in the pseudo consecutive performance being performed.
"(Variation → Pseudo Success) x 2" indicates that two sets of effects are performed, one of which is a teasing effect to hint at whether or not a pseudo consecutive performance will be executed, followed by a pseudo consecutive success performance that results in a pseudo consecutive performance.
"(Variation → Pseudo Success) x 3" indicates that three sets of effects are performed, each of which involves a teasing effect to hint at whether or not a pseudo consecutive performance will be performed, followed by a pseudo consecutive success performance that results in a pseudo consecutive performance being performed.

"Change (Episode 1)" indicates that there is a possibility that it will be executed with a change presentation including pseudo-failures and pseudo-successes, and that the first stage presentation (playback of the movie of the first story episode) of a stage presentation (story presentation) in which the presentation can progress in stages will be performed.
"Change (Episode 2)" indicates that there is a possibility that it will be executed with a change presentation including pseudo-failures and pseudo-successes, and that the second stage of the stage presentation (story presentation) in which the presentation can progress in stages (playing a movie of the second story episode following the first episode) will be performed.
"Change (Episode 3)" indicates that there is a possibility that it will be executed with a change presentation including pseudo-failures and pseudo-successes, and that the third stage of the stage presentation (story presentation) in which the presentation can progress in stages (playing a movie of the third story episode following Episode 2) will be performed.

"N Reach" indicates that the above-mentioned normal reach presentation is executed.
"SP Reach" indicates that the above-mentioned SP Reach performance is executed.
"SPSP reach" indicates that the above-mentioned SPSP reach performance is executed.
The "full rotation reach" indicates that the full rotation reach presentation described above is executed.

"SP Development" indicates that a development effect is executed which suggests that an SP reach effect will be executed.
"SPSP Development" indicates that a development effect is executed, which suggests that an SPSP reach effect will be executed.
"Full rotation development" indicates that a development effect is executed that suggests that a full rotation reach will be executed.

"CI" indicates that one of a number of cut-in effects with different odds of winning will be executed depending on whether the effect button 17 is operated during the valid period or the valid period has elapsed.
"Decision" indicates that a decision effect indicating whether or not a jackpot game will be played is executed depending on the operation of the effect button 17 during the valid period or the lapse of the valid period.
"Failure" indicates that a failed decision effect is executed as a result of the decision effect, which suggests that a big win game will not be executed.
"Success" indicates that a successful winning effect is executed as a result of the winning effect, which suggests that a big win game will be executed.

"Miss" refers to the formation of a losing result (a losing display pattern such as "358" or "948" that is different from the initial result described below) by the performance pattern 70a consisting of only numbers and no characters, and then temporarily stopping.
"C pattern miss" indicates that the display pattern 70a including a character forms a missing result (a missing display pattern such as "358" or "948" that is different from the initial result described below) and temporarily stops.
"IC" indicates that an eye-catching effect is executed in which an eye-catching image suggesting that the effect pattern 70a will stop being displayed is displayed on the image display device.
The "pattern matching" refers to a provisional stop when a winning number (a big win display pattern such as "222" or "777") is formed by a performance pattern 70a consisting of numbers only and no characters.
The "c symbol alignment" indicates that the display pattern 70a including the character forms a winning number (a big win display pattern such as "222" or "777") and temporarily stops.

"Re-draw" refers to the execution of a re-draw performance in which a promotion success performance with a more advantageous winning number is performed or a promotion failure performance with a less advantageous winning number is performed after teasing whether the performance pattern 70a that has been provisionally stopped on the winning number (jackpot display mode) will be a winning number more advantageous to the player than the winning number (for example, whether the even number winning number ("222", "444", "666", "888") that will result in the first jackpot game being executed will be an odd number winning number ("111", "555", "999", etc.) that will result in the second most advantageous second jackpot game being executed, or whether the even number winning number ("333, 777", etc.) that will result in the most advantageous third jackpot game being executed will be executed from the odd number winning number ("333, 777", etc.) that will result in the first jackpot game being executed or the odd number winning number ("333, 777", etc.) that will result in a more advantageous winning number).

"Strong vibration for 4 seconds" indicates that a strong vibration effect (a vibration effect that guarantees a big win) will be executed in which the button vibration motor for vibrating the effect button 17 will vibrate strongly for 4 seconds.
"Strong vibration for 1 second" indicates that a strong vibration effect (a big win confirmation vibration effect) will be executed in which the button vibration motor for vibrating the effect button 17 will vibrate strongly for one second.

"Special pattern change (no change in performance pattern)" indicates that only the change display of the special pattern TZ is executed without any change display of the performance pattern 70a.
"Special pattern miss" refers to the special pattern TZ forming a missing result (a missing display pattern such as "358" or "948" which is different from the initial result described below) and stopping.
The "special symbol alignment" indicates that the special symbol TZ forms a winning number (a winning display pattern such as "222" or "777") and stops.

The "short stock chance presentation" indicates that a chance presentation is executed to notify the player that it is a chance period to stock (increase) the second reserved memory (U2), which is likely to result in a small win or a big win.
The "middle stock chance effect" indicates that a chance effect is executed to notify the player that it is a chance period to stock (increase) the second reserved memory (U2), which will be almost a small win or a big win, for a longer period of time than the short stock chance effect.
The "long stock chance effect" indicates that a chance effect is executed to notify the player that it is a chance period to stock (increase) the second reserved memory (U2), which will be almost a small win or a big win, for a longer period of time than the middle stock chance effect.

The "stock result presentation" indicates that a presentation is executed in which a notification is given as to whether or not the second reserved memory (U2) has been stocked in the stock chance presentation.
"Chance effect" indicates that depending on the operation of the effect button 17 during the valid period or the passage of the valid period, a deciding effect is executed which indicates whether or not there is a chance result advantageous to the player (whether or not an auxiliary game in which the second starting hole 47 opens in a long opening pattern is executed).

The first feature of the variable presentation pattern determination table shown in Figures 55 and 56 is that, when a first determination result different from a miss result is determined in a hit determination of a normal pattern during a time-saving game state (second game state) different from a normal game state (first game state) (a hit with a normal pattern in which an auxiliary game in which the second starting hole 47 opens in a long opening pattern that makes it easy to win) in a hit determination of a normal pattern, a first result suggestion effect (a performance that suggests a result that is favorable to the player, specifically, a performance in which the three performance patterns 70a are the same pattern and the stop result is the same) is executed in a variable presentation (game presentation) accompanied by a variable display of the presentation pattern 70a, while a time-saving game state (second game state) different from a normal game state (first game state) is executed. During the second game state (playing state 2), if a second judgment result different from the first judgment result is judged in the hit judgment of the normal pattern (a hit with a normal pattern in which an auxiliary game in which the second starting hole 47 is opened in a short opening pattern in which it is difficult to win (effectively no winning) is executed), a second result suggestion effect different from the first result suggestion effect is executed in the variable performance (game performance) accompanied by the variable display of the performance pattern 70a (a performance suggesting an unfavorable result to the player, specifically, a performance in which the three performance patterns 70a have different stopping results, and the performance other than the stopping results of the special pattern TZ is the same as in the case of a losing result). By doing so, it is possible to improve the performance effect when the result is not a losing result, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game. In addition, since the second result suggestion effect is a performance suggesting an unfavorable result to the player, even if the result is not a losing result, the player will not have excessive expectations when the result is not actually advantageous to the player, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

The second feature of the variable presentation pattern judgment table shown in Figures 55 and 56 is that when a first judgment result different from a miss result is judged in a hit judgment of a normal pattern during a time-saving play state (second play state) different from a normal play state (first play state) (a hit with a normal pattern in which an auxiliary play in which the second start hole 47 opens in a long opening pattern that makes it easy to win) in a hit judgment of a normal pattern, in a variable presentation accompanied by a variable display of the presentation pattern 70a, the multiple presentation patterns 70a are stopped at a stop result of the first mode (a winning result when three presentation patterns 70a are lined up). In the time-saving game state (second game state), when a second judgment result different from the first judgment result is judged in the hit judgment of the normal pattern (a hit with a normal pattern in which an auxiliary game in which the second start hole 47 is opened in a short opening pattern in which it is difficult to win (effectively no winning) is executed), the multiple performance patterns 70a are displayed in a second mode of stop results different from the first mode (a miss result in which the three performance patterns 70a are in a scattered state) in a variable performance (game performance) accompanied by a variable display of the performance patterns 70a. By doing so, it is possible to improve the performance effect in cases where the result is not a miss, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game. In addition, since the stop result of the second mode is a miss result that suggests a result unfavorable to the player, even if the result is not a miss, the player will not have excessive expectations when the result is not substantially advantageous to the player, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, when a first judgment result different from a miss result is determined in a hit judgment of a normal pattern during the time-saving play state (second play state) (a hit with a normal pattern in which an auxiliary game in which the second start hole 47 opens in a long opening pattern that is easy to win is executed), the multiple performance patterns 70a are displayed as odd numbers in a variable performance accompanied by a variable display of the performance patterns 70a, and a second judgment result different from the first judgment result is determined in a hit judgment of a normal pattern during the time-saving play state (second play state) (a hit with a normal pattern in which the second start hole 47 opens in a long opening pattern that is difficult to win ( When it is determined that the winning combination is a normal win with a supplementary game that opens in a short opening pattern (which does not actually win a prize), the winning combination may be a combination of even numbers in the multiple performance patterns 70a in the variable performance that involves the variable display of the performance patterns 70a, a reaching miss combination in which the left and right performance patterns 70a are the same but the central performance pattern is different, or a special miss combination with a predetermined pattern in which the left and central or central and right performance patterns 70a are the same and the remaining one is a different pattern.

In addition, a probability-change game state is provided in which the probability of a jackpot is higher than in the normal game state or the time-saving game state, and when a first judgment result different from a miss result is judged in the hit judgment of the normal pattern during the probability-change game state (a hit with a normal pattern in which an auxiliary game in which the second starting hole 47 opens in a long opening pattern that makes it easier to win is executed) is judged, a first result suggestion effect (a performance that suggests that the result is favorable to the player, specifically, a performance in which the three performance patterns 70a are the same) is executed in the variable performance (game performance) accompanied by a variable display of the performance pattern 70a, while a performance in which the normal pattern is displayed during the probability-change game state is executed. If the hit determination determines that the second judgment result is different from the first judgment result (a hit with a normal pattern in which an auxiliary game is executed in which the second starting hole 47 opens in a short opening pattern that is difficult to win (effectively no winning)), a second result suggestion effect different from the first result suggestion effect (an effect suggesting an unfavorable result to the player, specifically, an effect in which the three performance patterns 70a have different stopping results, and the same effect as in the case of a losing result except for the stopping results of the special pattern TZ) may be executed in the variable effect (game effect) accompanied by a variable display of the performance pattern 70a.

A third feature of the variable presentation pattern determination table shown in Figures 55 and 56 is that it is possible to execute a first game presentation accompanied by a variable display of the presentation pattern 70a in response to the variable display of the special pattern (a first variable presentation corresponding to the variable display of the first special pattern, a second variable presentation corresponding to the variable display of the second special pattern), and a second game presentation accompanied by a variable display of the presentation pattern 70a in response to the variable display of the normal pattern (a normal pattern variable presentation for notifying whether or not an auxiliary game in which the second starting hole 47 is opened in a long opening pattern that makes it easier to win is to be executed), and during the normal game state (first game state), the execution of the second game presentation accompanied by a variable display of the presentation pattern 70a in response to the variable display of the normal pattern (normal pattern variable presentation) is restricted, and during the time-saving game state (second game state), it is possible to execute a second game presentation accompanied by a variable display of the presentation pattern 70a in response to the variable display of the normal pattern (normal pattern variable presentation). By doing this, it is possible to differentiate between the normal game state (first game state) and the time-saving game state (second game state), and it is also possible to improve the presentation effect in the time-saving game state (second game state), making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, a special probability game state may be provided in which the probability of a jackpot is higher than in the normal game state or the time-saving game state, and during the normal game state, the execution of a second game presentation (normal pattern change presentation) accompanied by a change in the display of the presentation pattern 70a in response to the change in the display of the normal pattern may be restricted, and during the special probability game state, the execution of a second game presentation (normal pattern change presentation) accompanied by a change in the display of the presentation pattern 70a in response to the change in the display of the normal pattern may be permitted.

The fourth feature of the variable presentation pattern determination table shown in Figures 55 and 56 is that in the time-saving game state, the execution of a first variable presentation (first game presentation) involving the variable display of presentation pattern 70a in response to the variable display of the first special pattern is restricted, and a second variable presentation (second game presentation) which performs a specific presentation (various stock chance presentations) in response to the variable display of the second special pattern can be executed. By doing this, it is possible to improve the presentation effect when the variable display of the second special pattern is executed in the time-saving game state, and it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

The fifth feature of the variable presentation pattern determination table shown in Figures 55 and 56 is that it is possible to execute a first game presentation (first variable presentation) in response to the variable display of the special pattern (first variable display accompanied by the variable display of the presentation pattern 70a) and a second game presentation (second variable presentation accompanied by the variable display of the presentation pattern 70a) in response to the variable display of the normal pattern (second variable display), and when the variable display of the normal pattern (second variable display) is executed during the normal game state (first game state), a command related to the variable display of the normal pattern (normal pattern However, when the execution of the second game presentation (second variation presentation accompanied by the variation display of the presentation pattern 70a) is restricted and the variation display of the normal pattern (second variation display) is executed during the time-saving game state (second game state), a command related to the variation display of the normal pattern (normal pattern designation command, normal pattern variation pattern designation command) is sent from the main control board 110 to the presentation control board 130, and the second game presentation (second variation presentation accompanied by the variation display of the presentation pattern 70a) is executed. By doing this, the presentation effect in the time-saving game state (second game state) can be improved, and the interest in the game can be increased.

In addition, a guaranteed bonus game state in which the probability of winning a jackpot is higher than in the normal game state or the time-saving game state is provided, and when a normal symbol variable display (second variable display) is executed during the time-saving game state (second game state), a command related to the normal symbol variable display (normal symbol designation command, normal symbol variable pattern designation command) may be sent from the main control board 110 to the presentation control board 130, and a second game presentation (second variable presentation involving a variable display of the presentation pattern 70a) may be executed.

The sixth feature of the variable presentation pattern determination table shown in Figures 55 and 56 is that, in the case of a jackpot, there are variable presentation patterns in which a successful winning presentation is executed and the symbols line up, and variable presentation patterns in which the successful winning presentation is executed after the symbols line up. This makes it possible to enhance the presentation effect in the case of a jackpot, and to increase the interest of the game.

The seventh feature of the variable presentation pattern determination table shown in Fig. 55 and Fig. 56 is that when a presentation pattern 70a that does not include a character is aligned, a strong vibration presentation (jackpot confirmation vibration presentation) is executed in which the presentation button 17 is strongly vibrated for four seconds without the occurrence of a valid period or the operation of the presentation button 17. This makes it possible to effectively present a jackpot, which increases the excitement of the game.

The eighth feature of the variable presentation pattern determination table shown in Figures 55 and 56 is that when a pattern is matched with presentation pattern 70a including a character (pattern c), a strong vibration presentation (jackpot confirmation vibration presentation) is executed in which presentation button 17 is strongly vibrated for one second without the occurrence of a valid period or the operation of presentation button 17. This makes it possible to effectively present a jackpot, which increases the excitement of the game.

The ninth feature of the variable presentation pattern determination table shown in Figures 55 and 56 is that it is possible to execute a stage presentation (story presentation) that can progress step by step in the variable presentation in which the pseudo consecutive presentation is executed, and while it is possible to execute the second stage presentation of the stage presentation (playback of the movie of the second story episode) after the execution of a normal reach presentation with low expectations, it is not possible to execute the second stage presentation (playback of the movie of the second story episode) after the execution of an SP/SPSP reach presentation with high expectations. Therefore, by varying whether or not the stage presentation progresses depending on the type of reach presentation, it is possible to improve the presentation effect and increase the interest in the game.

Note that, although a reach effect is always executed in a variable performance pattern in which a pseudo consecutive performance is executed, a variable performance pattern may be set in which a reach effect is not executed even if a pseudo consecutive performance is executed.

In addition, if the reel stops provisionally on a losing number after a cut-in or failed-to-win effect, a loss is confirmed, but a revival effect may be executed after a cut-in or failed-to-win effect to confirm a big win.

(Preview performance decision process of the performance control unit)
The preview performance determination process of the performance control unit 130m will be described with reference to Fig. 57. Fig. 57 is a flowchart showing the preview performance determination process in the performance control unit 130m.

In step E650-1, the sub-CPU 130a refers to the variation presentation pattern to be executed in the current variation presentation, and in step E650-2, selects a variation start feature prediction determination table (see FIG. 58) for determining a feature prediction pattern that will cause the player to expect a favorable result for the player at the start of the variation (in this embodiment, a jackpot game will be executed), and determines the feature prediction pattern. Details of the variation start feature prediction determination table will be described later.

The "start of fluctuation feature preview effect" is a type of jackpot preview effect in which the feature (first movable member 73a) is operated in a manner that corresponds to the player's expectation of a favorable result (in this embodiment, a jackpot) at the start of the fluctuation feature.

In step E650-3, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the preview pattern of the start-of-variation role preview performance is one that will execute a start-of-variation role preview performance. If it is not one that will execute a start-of-variation role preview performance, the process moves to step E650-5. If it is one that will execute a start-of-variation role preview performance, in step E650-4, a role preview performance command corresponding to the role preview pattern is set in the transmission buffer. This causes the role preview performance command to be sent to the display control unit 140 and lamp control unit 150, and a start-of-variation role preview performance corresponding to the role preview pattern is executed at the start of the variation performance.

In step E650-5, the sub-CPU 130a selects a pre-reach notice determination table (see FIG. 59) for determining a notice pattern for a pre-reach notice performance that makes the player expect that the pre-reach performance period (high-speed fluctuation period) will result in a favorable outcome for the player (in this embodiment, a jackpot game will be executed), and determines the notice pattern. Details of the pre-reach notice determination table will be described later.

In step E650-6, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the pre-reach preview pattern is one that executes a dialogue preview. If it is one that executes a dialogue preview, the process proceeds to step E650-7. If it is not one that executes a dialogue preview, the process proceeds to step E650-9.

The "dialogue preview effect" is an effect in which a valid period is generated during the fluctuation effect (high-speed fluctuation period), and depending on whether the effect button 17 is operated during the valid period or the valid time has elapsed, a dialogue image suggesting the likelihood of a favorable result for the player (in this embodiment, a jackpot) is displayed on the image display device, and sound corresponding to the dialogue image is output from the audio output device 9.

In step E650-7, the sub-CPU 130a selects a dialogue preview pattern determination table (see FIG. 60) for determining the dialogue preview pattern of the dialogue preview performance to determine the dialogue preview pattern, and in step E650-8, sets a dialogue preview performance command corresponding to the dialogue preview pattern in the transmission buffer. As a result, the dialogue preview performance command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and a dialogue preview performance corresponding to the dialogue preview pattern is executed during the fluctuation performance (high-speed fluctuation period). Details of the dialogue preview pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E650-9, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the pre-reach preview pattern is one that will execute a step-up preview. If it is one that will execute a step-up preview, the process proceeds to step E650-10. If it is not one that will execute a step-up preview, the process proceeds to step E650-12.

The "step-up preview effect" is an effect that suggests the player's likelihood of a favorable result (in this embodiment, a jackpot) by executing step effects in a predetermined order until one of multiple steps (stages) from the first step (first stage) to the fifth step (final stage) is reached, without generating an effective period for the effect button 17 during the fluctuation effect (high-speed fluctuation period).

In step E650-10, the sub-CPU 130a selects a step-up preview pattern determination table (see FIG. 61) for determining the step-up preview pattern of the step-up preview performance to determine the step-up preview pattern, and in step E650-11 sets a step-up preview performance command corresponding to the step-up preview pattern in the transmission buffer. As a result, the step-up preview performance command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and a step-up preview performance corresponding to the step-up preview pattern is executed during the fluctuation performance (high-speed fluctuation period). Details of the step-up preview pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E650-12, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the current variable presentation pattern is a variable presentation pattern that executes a pseudo consecutive presentation. If it is a variable presentation pattern that executes a pseudo consecutive presentation, the process proceeds to step E650-13. If it is not a variable presentation pattern that does not execute a pseudo consecutive presentation, the process proceeds to step E650-15.

In step E650-13, the sub-CPU 130a selects a pseudo-continuous performance pattern determination table (see FIG. 62) for determining the pseudo-continuous performance pattern of the pseudo-continuous performance to determine the pseudo-continuous performance pattern, and in step E650-14, sets a pseudo-continuous performance command corresponding to the pseudo-continuous performance pattern in the transmission buffer. This causes the pseudo-continuous performance command to be transmitted to the display control unit 140 and lamp control unit 150, and a pseudo-continuous performance corresponding to the pseudo-continuous performance pattern is executed during the variable performance. The pseudo-continuous performance pattern determination table will be described in detail later.

In step E650-15, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the current variable presentation pattern is a variable presentation pattern that executes a development presentation (SP development presentation, SPSP development presentation, full rotation development presentation). If it is a variable presentation pattern that executes a development presentation, the process proceeds to step E650-16, and if it is not a variable presentation pattern that executes a development presentation, the process proceeds to step E650-18.

In step E650-16, the sub-CPU 130a selects a development performance pattern determination table (see FIG. 63) for determining the development performance pattern of the development performance to determine the development performance pattern, and in step E650-17 sets a development performance command corresponding to the development performance pattern in the transmission buffer. As a result, the development performance command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and a development performance corresponding to the development performance pattern is executed during the variable performance. The development performance pattern determination table will be described in detail later.

In step E650-18, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the current variable presentation pattern is a variable presentation pattern that executes a reach presentation (post-reach presentation) or a chance presentation. If it is a variable presentation pattern that executes a reach presentation, the process proceeds to step E650-19, and if it is not a variable presentation pattern that executes a reach presentation or chance presentation, the sub-CPU 130a ends the current preview presentation determination process.

In step E650-19, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the current variation presentation pattern is a variation presentation pattern that executes a cut-in presentation. If it is a variation presentation pattern that executes a cut-in presentation, the process proceeds to step E650-20, and if it is not a variation presentation pattern that executes a cut-in presentation, the process proceeds to step E650-22.

In step E650-20, the sub-CPU 130a selects a cut-in performance pattern determination table (see FIG. 64) for determining the cut-in performance pattern of the cut-in performance to determine the cut-in performance pattern, and in step E650-21 sets a cut-in performance command corresponding to the cut-in performance pattern in the transmission buffer. This causes the cut-in performance command to be transmitted to the display control unit 140 and lamp control unit 150, and a cut-in performance corresponding to the cut-in performance pattern is executed during the variable performance. Details of the cut-in performance pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E650-22, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the current variable performance pattern is a variable performance pattern that executes a deciding performance. If it is a variable performance pattern that executes a deciding performance, the process proceeds to step E650-23, and if it is not a variable performance pattern that executes a deciding performance, the process proceeds to step E650-25.

In step E650-23, the sub-CPU 130a selects a final performance pattern determination table (see FIG. 65) for determining the final performance pattern of the final performance to determine the final performance pattern, and in step E650-24 sets a final performance command corresponding to the final performance pattern in the transmission buffer. This causes the final performance command to be transmitted to the display control unit 140 and lamp control unit 150, and a final performance corresponding to the final performance pattern is executed during the variable performance. Details of the final performance pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E650-25, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the current variable presentation pattern is a variable presentation pattern that executes a re-draw presentation. If it is a variable presentation pattern that executes a re-draw presentation, the process proceeds to step E650-26, and if it is not a variable presentation pattern that executes a re-draw presentation, the process proceeds to step E650-28.

In step E650-26, the sub-CPU 130a selects a re-lottery presentation pattern determination table (see FIG. 66) for determining the re-lottery presentation pattern of the re-lottery presentation to determine the re-lottery presentation pattern, and in step E650-27 sets a re-lottery presentation command corresponding to the re-lottery presentation pattern in the transmission buffer. This causes the re-lottery presentation command to be transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and a re-lottery presentation corresponding to the re-lottery presentation pattern is executed during the variable presentation. The re-lottery presentation pattern determination table will be described in detail later.

In step E650-28, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the current variable presentation pattern is a variable presentation pattern capable of executing a fixed presentation (resulting in an advantageous result for the player). If the variable presentation pattern is capable of executing a fixed presentation, the process proceeds to step E650-29, and if the variable presentation pattern is not capable of executing a fixed presentation, the sub-CPU 130a ends the current preview presentation determination process.

In step E650-29, the sub-CPU 130a selects a final performance pattern determination table (not shown) for determining the final performance pattern of the final performance to determine the final performance pattern, and in step E650-30, sets a final performance command corresponding to the final performance pattern in the transmission buffer, and ends this preview performance determination process. This causes the final performance command to be transmitted to the display control unit 140 and lamp control unit 150, and the final performance corresponding to the final performance pattern is executed during the variable performance.

(Table for determining the start of the fluctuation)
FIG. 58 shows a start-of-change feature preview determination table which is referenced when determining the preview pattern of the start-of-change feature preview performance.

The start-of-change bonus prediction determination table associates the game state, the type of pattern (first special pattern, second special pattern, normal pattern), the judgment result (jackpot judgment result, win judgment result), the change presentation pattern, the selection rate (%) of each start-of-change bonus prediction pattern, and the selected start-of-change bonus prediction pattern.

The role prediction patterns at the start of the change include no prediction, a rattling action that causes the first movable member 73a to swing up and down in the initial position (standby position) at the start of the change performance, and a weak downward action that causes the first movable member 73a to descend from the initial position to an intermediate position between the initial position and the performance position and then return to the initial position at the start of the change performance.

The first feature of the variation start feature prediction determination table shown in FIG. 58 is that when a variation effect (variation effect in which the performance pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ vary) corresponding to the variation display of the first special pattern is executed in the normal game state, the variation start feature prediction (rattle action, weak downward action) can be executed, whereas when a variation effect (variation effect in which only the special pattern TZ varies) corresponding to the variation display of the second special pattern is executed in the normal game state, the variation start feature prediction (rattle action, weak downward action) is not executed, that is, the execution of the variation start feature prediction effect is limited. In this way, in the normal game state in which hitting from the left is advantageous to the player, it is possible to promote the execution of the variation display of the first special pattern (first variation effect) that is executed when the game ball enters the first starting hole 45, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

The second feature of the variation start feature prediction determination table shown in FIG. 58 is that when a variation effect corresponding to the variation display of the first special symbol is executed in the normal game state, the variation start feature prediction (rattle action, weak downward action) can be executed, whereas when a variation effect corresponding to the variation display of the normal symbol (a variation effect in which only the special symbol TZ varies) is executed in the normal game state, the variation start feature prediction (rattle action, weak downward action) is not executed, that is, the execution of the variation start feature prediction effect is limited. In this way, in the normal game state in which hitting from the left is advantageous to the player, it is possible to promote the execution of the variation display of the first special symbol (first variation effect) that is executed when the game ball enters the first starting hole 45, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

The third feature of the variation start feature prediction determination table shown in FIG. 58 is that when a variation effect (a variation effect in which only the special pattern TZ corresponding to the variation display of the first special pattern changes, a variation effect in which only the special pattern TZ corresponding to the variation display of the second special pattern changes, or a variation effect in which the effect pattern 70a and special pattern TZ corresponding to the variation display of the normal pattern change) is executed in the time-saving game state, the variation start feature prediction (rattle action, weak downward action) is not executed, in other words, the execution of the variation start feature prediction effect is limited. In this way, it is possible to differentiate between the normal game state and the time-saving game state, making the game more interesting.

In addition, in the time-saving play state, when a change effect is executed in which only the special pattern TZ corresponding to the change display of the second special pattern changes, or when a change effect is executed in which the effect pattern 70a corresponding to the change display of the normal pattern and the special pattern TZ change, a role preview at the start of the change may be executed. In this case, it may be executed at a lower rate than when a change effect corresponding to the change display of the first special pattern is executed in the normal play state, or even if it is executed, only one of the rattling action and the weak descending action may be executed.

(Pre-reach notice decision table)
FIG. 59 shows a pre-reach preview determination table which is referenced when determining the preview pattern of the pre-reach preview performance.

As shown in FIG. 59, the pre-reach notice determination table associates the game state, the pattern type (first special pattern, second special pattern, normal pattern), the judgment result (jackpot judgment result, hit judgment result), the variable presentation pattern, the selection rate (%) of each notice pattern, and the selected notice pattern.

There are three types of pre-reach preview patterns: "No Preview", where the pre-reach preview effect is not executed; "Dialogue Preview Effect", where a dialogue preview effect is executed; and "Step-up Preview Effect", where a step-up preview effect is executed. The expected probability of an outcome favorable to the player (in this case, the execution of a jackpot game) (the probability that the vibration effect associated with the aforementioned pattern matching will be executed) is No Preview < Dialogue Preview Effect < Step-up Preview Effect.

The first feature of the pre-reach notice determination table shown in FIG. 59 is that the pre-reach notice performance is more likely to be executed when the judgment result is a jackpot than when the judgment result is a miss, and the pre-reach notice performance is more likely to be executed when a variable presentation pattern with a high expectation of a result favorable to the player has been determined than when a variable presentation pattern with a low expectation of a result favorable to the player has been determined. In this way, it is possible to build up the player's expectations for a result favorable to the player, and to increase the enjoyment of the game.

The second feature of the pre-reach notice determination table shown in FIG. 59 is that when a change effect (a change effect in which the effect pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ change) corresponding to the change display of the first special symbol is executed in the normal game state, a pre-reach notice effect (both a line notice effect that can execute a vibration effect with the effective period of the effect button 17 and a step-up notice effect that can execute a vibration effect without the effective period of the effect button 17) can be executed, while when a change effect (a change effect in which only the special pattern TZ changes) corresponding to the change display of the second special symbol is executed in the normal game state, the pre-reach notice effect is not executed, that is, the execution of the pre-reach notice effect is limited. In this way, in the normal game state in which hitting from the left is advantageous to the player, it is possible to promote the execution of the change display of the first special symbol (first change effect) that is executed when the game ball enters the first starting hole 45, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

The third feature of the pre-reach notice determination table shown in FIG. 59 is that when a change effect (a change effect in which the effect pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ change) corresponding to the change display of the first special pattern is executed in the normal game state, a pre-reach notice effect (both a line notice effect that can execute a vibration effect with the effective period of the effect button 17 and a step-up notice effect that can execute a vibration effect without the effective period of the effect button 17) can be executed, while when a change effect (a change effect in which only the special pattern TZ changes) corresponding to the change display of the normal pattern is executed in the normal game state, the pre-reach notice effect is not executed, that is, the execution of the pre-reach notice effect is limited. In this way, in the normal game state where hitting from the left is advantageous to the player, it is possible to promote the execution of the change display of the first special pattern (first change effect) that is executed when the game ball enters the first starting hole 45, and it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

The fourth feature of the pre-reach notice determination table shown in FIG. 59 is that when a variable effect (a variable effect in which the special pattern and the effect pattern 70a corresponding to the variable display of the first special pattern) is executed in the normal game state, a pre-reach notice effect (both a dialogue notice effect in which a vibration effect can be executed with the effective period of the effect button 17, and a step-up notice effect in which a vibration effect can be executed without the effective period of the effect button 17) can be executed, whereas when a variable effect (a variable effect in which only the special pattern TZ corresponding to the variable display of the first special pattern changes, a variable effect in which only the special pattern TZ corresponding to the variable display of the second special pattern changes, and a variable effect in which the effect pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ corresponding to the variable display of the normal pattern change) is executed in the time-saving game state, the pre-reach notice effect is not executed, that is, the execution of the pre-reach notice effect is restricted. In this way, it is possible to differentiate between the normal game state and the time-saving game state, and to increase the interest in the game.

The fifth feature of the pre-reach notice determination table shown in FIG. 59 is that the expectation of a favorable result (jackpot, win) for the player (such as the rate at which the vibration effect associated with the aforementioned pattern matching is executed, or the rate at which the vibration effect is executed in the deciding effect described below) is higher when a step-up notice effect without an effective period for the effect button 17 is executed than when a dialogue notice effect with an effective period for the effect button 17 is executed. This makes it possible to increase the player's expectations regarding the types of pre-reach notice effects, thereby making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

It is also possible to make it so that the expectation of a favorable result (jackpot, win) for the player (the rate at which the vibration effect associated with the aforementioned pattern matching is executed, the rate at which the vibration effect is executed in the deciding effect described below, etc.) is higher when the dialogue preview effect is executed than when the step-up preview effect is executed. Even in this case, it is possible to increase the player's expectations regarding the type of pre-reach preview effect, thereby making the game more enjoyable.

In addition, in the time-saving game state, when a change effect is executed in which only the special pattern TZ corresponding to the change display of the second special pattern changes, or when a change effect is executed in which the effect pattern 70a corresponding to the change display of the normal pattern and the special pattern TZ change, a pre-reach preview effect may be executed. In this case, it may be executed at a lower rate than when a change effect corresponding to the change display of the first special pattern is executed in the normal game state, or even if it is executed, only one of the dialogue preview effect and the step-up preview effect may be executed.

Specifically, the pre-reach preview performance should be executed at a lower rate when a fluctuation performance corresponding to a miss fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed than when a fluctuation performance corresponding to a miss fluctuation display of the first special symbol is executed, the pre-reach preview performance should be executed at a lower rate when a fluctuation performance corresponding to a jackpot fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed than when a fluctuation performance corresponding to a jackpot fluctuation display of the first special symbol is executed, the pre-reach preview performance should be executed at a lower rate when a fluctuation performance corresponding to a miss fluctuation display of the normal symbol is executed than when a fluctuation performance corresponding to a miss fluctuation display of the first special symbol is executed, and the pre-reach preview performance should be executed at a lower rate when a fluctuation performance corresponding to a win fluctuation display of the normal symbol is executed than when a fluctuation performance corresponding to a jackpot fluctuation display of the first special symbol is executed.

(Dialogue preview pattern determination table)
FIG. 60 shows a dialogue preview pattern determination table which is referred to when determining the preview pattern for the dialogue preview performance.

As shown in Figure 60, the dialogue preview pattern determination table associates the game status, pattern type (first special pattern, second special pattern, normal pattern), judgment result (jackpot judgment result, win judgment result), variable presentation pattern type, selection rate (%) of each dialogue preview pattern, and the selected dialogue preview pattern, and for reference, the presentation configuration of each dialogue preview pattern (valid suggestion presentation, valid period, presentation content) is listed.

The "valid suggestion effect" is an introductory effect that suggests the possibility of a valid period occurring, and specifically, it is an effect in which multiple semi-transparent effect button images modeled after effect button 17 are displayed and moved on the first image display device 70, and the semi-transparent effect button images are gathered toward a specific position.
"Valid period (single hit, 3 seconds)" indicates that the valid period for the dialogue preview effect ends with one operation of the effect button 17 or the elapse of 3 seconds.

The "promotion effect" in the validity period column is an effect that encourages the operation of the effect button 17 during the validity period. Specifically, an opaque effect button image that resembles the effect button 17 is displayed in a specific position, and a gauge image is displayed that indicates the remaining time of the validity period by the length of the gauge. Note that if the effect button 17 is operated during the validity period, operation sound 1 is output.

In the promotion effect column, "Normal button white" indicates that the opaque effect button image described above will be a button image that mimics the effect button 17 in its normal, non-protruding state, emitting white light.

The "Button Status" in the Validity Period column indicates the status of the effect button 17 during the validity period, and "Normal (White)" in the Button Status column indicates the normal state in which the effect button 17 is not protruding and emits a white light that has a low chance of providing a favorable result to the player.

"Performance content" indicates the content of the performance that will be executed when the performance button 17 is operated during the valid period, and "Dialogue display period 3 seconds" indicates that the dialogue image will be displayed for 3 seconds.

"Normal dialogue (black)" in the dialogue presentation mode column indicates that normal dialogue that does not suggest the possibility of a jackpot game being played is displayed in black text and that the normal dialogue is output as audio.
"Chance Line (Black)" indicates that a chance line indicating the possibility of a big win game is displayed in black text and the chance line is output as voice.
"Reach dialogue (black)" indicates that a reach dialogue that confirms the execution of a reach effect is displayed in black text and that the reach dialogue is output as voice.
"Reach line (red)" indicates that a reach line that confirms the execution of a reach effect is displayed in red text and that the reach line is output as voice.

"Hot lines (red)" indicates that hot lines that are likely to result in a favorable outcome for the player are displayed in red text and are output as audio.
"Super Hot Line (Gold)" indicates that a super hot line that is highly likely to result in a favorable outcome for the player is displayed in gold letters and the super hot line is output as audio.
"Definite lines (rainbow)" indicates that a confirmed line that is determined to result in an advantageous outcome for the player is displayed in rainbow-colored letters and the confirmed line is output as voice.

"Weak vibration (1 second)" in the button vibration column indicates that a weak vibration effect is executed in which the button vibration motor for vibrating the effect button 17 vibrates weakly for 1 second from the time the dialogue starts to be displayed (= when the effect button 17 is operated or when the valid period ends).
"Strong vibration (1 second)" indicates that a strong vibration effect is executed in which the button vibration motor for vibrating the effect button 17 vibrates strongly for 1 second from the time the dialogue starts to be displayed (= when the effect button 17 is operated or when the valid period ends).

The likelihood of each dialogue presentation mode resulting in a favorable outcome for the player (here, a jackpot game being executed) is as follows: "Normal dialogue" < "Chance dialogue (black)" < "Reach dialogue (black)" < "Reach dialogue (red)" < "Hot dialogue (red)" < "Super hot dialogue (gold)" < "Definite dialogue (rainbow)." Additionally, the likelihood of a jackpot for each vibration presentation is as follows: "Weak vibration presentation" < "Strong vibration presentation."

The first feature of the line preview pattern determination table shown in FIG. 60 is that it is possible to execute a vibration effect that vibrates the effect button 17 when a line that has a high probability of producing a favorable result for the player (a hot line or higher) is displayed. This makes it possible to effectively inform the player that there is a high probability of producing a favorable result, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

The second feature of the line preview pattern determination table shown in FIG. 60 is that the vibration effect of the effect button 17 (operation of the button vibration motor) is more likely to be executed (higher execution rate) when a line preview effect of a super hot line is executed, which has a higher expectation of a result favorable to the player than a hot line, than when a line preview effect of a hot line is executed, and the expectation of a result favorable to the player is higher when the vibration effect of the effect button 17 is executed than when the vibration effect of the effect button 17 is not executed when a line preview effect of a hot line is executed. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's expectation as to whether or not the vibration effect of the effect button 17 will be executed when the line preview effect is executed, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The third feature of the dialogue preview pattern determination table shown in FIG. 60 is that the vibration effect that is executed when a dialogue that is highly likely to result in a favorable outcome for the player (a hot dialogue or higher) is displayed is relatively short in duration. This makes it possible to execute an effect with a high production effect while suppressing the inconvenience of making the player mistakenly believe that a jackpot game has been played, thereby making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The fourth feature of the line preview pattern determination table shown in FIG. 60 is that the vibration intensity of the vibration effect that is executed when a line that has a high probability of resulting in a favorable result for the player (a hot line or higher) is displayed has two types of vibration intensity depending on the probability of the result being favorable to the player. Therefore, the vibration intensity of the vibration effect can suggest the probability of the result being favorable to the player, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The fifth feature of the dialogue preview pattern determination table shown in FIG. 60 is that the vibration period (1 second) of the effect button 17 while the dialogue image is being displayed is shorter than the display period (3 seconds) of the dialogue image. This allows the player to have a sense of expectation before the reach effect is executed, but without making the expectation excessive, which makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

Note that, although there are weak and strong vibration effects as vibration effects executed in the dialogue preview effect, it is also possible to have only weak vibration effects or only strong vibration effects, or to make the vibration time of the strong vibration effect longer than that of the weak vibration effect.

In addition, the effective period ends when the effect button 17 is operated or the effective time has elapsed, and the dialogue preview effect is executed, but if the effective period ends when the effective time has elapsed, the dialogue preview effect may not be executed.

In addition, although the dialogue preview performance is executed by generating an effective period, the dialogue preview performance may be executed without generating an effective period, and in that case, the vibration performance executed may be only a weak vibration performance for 1 second or only a strong vibration performance for 1 second.

(Step-up notice pattern determination table)
FIG. 61 shows a step-up preview pattern determination table which is referenced when determining the preview pattern of the step-up preview performance.

As shown in Figure 61, the step-up preview pattern determination table associates the game state, pattern type (first special pattern, second special pattern, normal pattern), judgment result (jackpot judgment result, win judgment result), variable presentation pattern type, selection rate (%) of each step-up preview pattern, and the selected step-up preview pattern, and for reference, the presentation content of each step-up preview pattern (step-up (SU) presentation mode, button vibration) is also listed.

"1→2" in the step-up performance mode column indicates that the first and second step performances are executed in order.
"1→2→3" indicates that the first to third step performances are executed in order.
"1→2→3→4" indicates that the first to fourth step performances are executed in order.
"1→2→3→4→5" indicates that the first to fifth step performances are executed in order.
"1→2→3→5" indicates that after the first to third step performances are executed in order, the fourth step performance is skipped and the fifth step performance is executed.
In each step-up performance mode, the performance time of the step performance before the final step performance is 1 second, and the performance time of the final step performance is 3 seconds.

In the button vibration column, "Weak vibration at '5' (1 second)" indicates that a weak vibration effect is executed in which the button vibration motor for vibrating the effect button 17 vibrates weakly for 1 second from the start of the 5th step effect.

"Button state" indicates the state of the effect button 17 while the step-up preview effect is being performed, and "Normal (off)" in the button state column indicates that the effect button 17 is in the normal state, not protruding, and the effect button 17 is off.

The likelihood of a favorable result for the player in each step-up presentation mode (where a jackpot game will be executed) is "1→2" < "1→2→3" < "1→2→3→4" < "1→2→3→4→5" < "1→2→3→5".

The first feature of the step-up notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. 61 is that when a step performance (fifth step performance) that has a high probability of producing a favorable result for the player is performed, it is possible to execute a vibration performance that vibrates the performance button 17 without generating an effective period for the performance button 17. This makes it possible to effectively inform the player that there is a high probability of producing a favorable result, thereby making it possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

The second feature of the step-up notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. 61 is that the vibration effect that is executed when a step effect (fifth step effect) that is highly likely to result in a favorable result for the player is displayed is relatively short. Therefore, it is possible to execute an effect with a high effect while suppressing the inconvenience of making the player mistakenly believe that a jackpot game has been executed, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The third feature of the step-up preview pattern determination table shown in FIG. 61 is that the vibration mode (vibration strength, vibration duration) of the vibration effect executed when a step effect (fifth step effect) that is highly likely to result in a favorable outcome for the player is displayed is only of one predetermined type (weak vibration (1 second)). Therefore, in the step-up preview effect where the player does not operate the effect button 17 and therefore it is difficult to grasp the type of vibration effect, it is possible to prevent the effect mode from becoming complicated, thereby making the game more interesting.

The fourth feature of the step-up preview pattern determination table shown in FIG. 61 is that the vibration period (1 second) of the performance button 17 during the execution of the fifth step performance in the step-up preview performance is shorter than the display period (3 seconds) of the fifth step performance. This allows the player to have a sense of expectation before the reach performance is executed, but without making the expectation excessive, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

(Pseudo consecutive performance pattern determination table)
FIG. 62 shows a pseudo consecutive performance pattern determination table that is referenced when determining the performance pattern of the pseudo consecutive performance.

As shown in FIG. 62, the pseudo consecutive performance pattern determination table associates the game state, the pattern type (first special pattern, second special pattern, normal pattern), the judgment result (jackpot judgment result, win judgment result), the variable performance pattern type, the selection rate (%) of each pseudo consecutive performance pattern, and the selected pseudo consecutive performance pattern, and for reference, the performance configuration of each pseudo consecutive performance pattern (valid suggestion performance, valid period, performance content) is listed.

The "valid suggestion effect" is an introductory effect that suggests the possibility of a valid period occurring, and specifically, it is an effect in which multiple semi-transparent effect button images modeled after effect button 17 are displayed and moved on the first image display device 70, and the semi-transparent effect button images are gathered toward a specific position.
"Valid period (single hit, 3 seconds)" indicates that the valid period in the pseudo consecutive performance ends with one operation of the performance button 17 or the passage of 3 seconds.

The "promotion effect" in the validity period column is an effect that encourages the operation of the effect button 17 during the validity period. Specifically, an opaque effect button image that resembles the effect button 17 is displayed in a specific position, and a gauge image is displayed that indicates the remaining time of the validity period by the length of the gauge. When the effect button 17 is operated during the validity period, operation sound 2, which is different from operation sound 1 described above, is output.

"Normal button white" in the promotion effect column indicates that the above-mentioned opaque effect button image will be displayed as a button image that imitates the effect button 17 in its normal state, not protruding and glowing white.
"White protruding button" indicates that a button image that imitates the effect button 17 that is in a protruding state and emits white light is displayed as the opaque effect button image described above.

The "Button Status" in the Validity Period column indicates the status of the effect button 17 during the validity period, and "Normal (White)" in the Button Status column indicates the normal status where the effect button 17 is not protruding and the effect button 17 emits a white light which has a low probability of producing a favorable result for the player, and "Protruding (Red)" indicates the protruding status where the effect button 17 protrudes and the effect button 17 emits a red light which has a high probability of producing a favorable result for the player.

"Performance content" refers to the content of the pseudo consecutive performance, and "temporary stop period of pseudo consecutive symbols for 2 seconds" refers to the period during which the pseudo symbols described below are temporarily stopped for 2 seconds.

"Pseudo failure" in the pseudo consecutive performance mode column indicates that a pseudo consecutive failure performance is executed in which the normal performance pattern 70a temporarily stops without the pseudo pattern suggesting the execution of a pseudo consecutive performance as the central performance pattern 70a temporarily stopping, and a failure sound effect is output.
"Pseudo success" indicates that the central performance pattern 70a, which indicates the execution of a pseudo consecutive hit, temporarily stops, a success sound effect is output, and the second movable member 73b weakly moves, thereby executing a pseudo consecutive hit success performance.

"Weak vibration (1 second)" in the button vibration column indicates that a weak vibration effect is executed in which the button vibration motor for vibrating the effect button 17 vibrates weakly for 1 second from the time when the pseudo pattern is temporarily stopped (= when the effect button 17 is operated or when the valid period ends).
"Strong vibration (1 second)" indicates that a strong vibration effect is executed in which the button vibration motor for vibrating the effect button 17 vibrates strongly for 1 second from the time when the pseudo pattern is temporarily stopped (= when the effect button 17 is operated or when the valid period ends).

The likelihood of each promotion effect resulting in a favorable result for the player (here, a jackpot game being executed) is "normal white button" < "protruding white button." The likelihood of each button state resulting in a favorable result for the player is "normal" < "protruding." The likelihood of each vibration effect resulting in a favorable result for the player is "weak vibration effect" < "strong vibration effect."

The first feature of the pseudo consecutive performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. 62 is that when a pseudo consecutive success performance is performed in a variable performance pattern that has a high probability of producing a favorable result for the player, a vibration performance may be executed in which an effective period of the performance button 17 is generated and the performance button 17 is vibrated. This makes it possible to effectively inform the player that there is a high probability of producing a favorable result, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

The second feature of the pseudo consecutive performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. 62 is that the vibration performance executed when the pseudo consecutive successful performance is executed in a variable performance pattern that has a high expectation of a favorable result for the player, is relatively short. Therefore, it is possible to execute a performance with a high performance effect while suppressing the inconvenience of making the player mistakenly think that a jackpot game has been executed, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

The third feature of the pseudo consecutive performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. 62 is that the vibration intensity of the vibration performance executed when the pseudo consecutive successful performance is a variable performance pattern with a high expectation of a favorable result for the player is two types according to the expectation of a favorable result for the player. Therefore, the vibration intensity of the vibration performance can suggest the expectation of a favorable result for the player, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The fourth feature of the pseudo consecutive performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. 62 is that there are cases where the pseudo consecutive performance (pseudo consecutive success performance) is performed using the second movable member 73b, and cases where the pseudo consecutive performance (pseudo consecutive success performance) is performed using the button vibration motor that vibrates the second movable member 73b and the performance button 17. This makes it possible to enhance the performance effect of the pseudo consecutive performance, and to increase the interest of the game.

The fifth feature of the pseudo consecutive performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. 62 is that the vibration period (1 second) of the performance button 17 during the temporary stop of the pseudo symbol, which suggests the execution of a pseudo consecutive, is shorter than the temporary stop period (2 seconds) of the pseudo symbol. This allows the player to have a sense of expectation before the SP reach performance or SPSP reach performance is executed, but without making the expectation excessive, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The sixth feature of the pseudo consecutive performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. 62 is that when a variable performance (variable performance in which the performance pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ change) corresponding to the variable display of the first special pattern is executed in the normal game state, a pseudo consecutive performance (a type of operation performance or vibration performance) accompanied by the operation of the performance button 17 or the vibration of the performance button 17 can be executed, while when a variable performance (variable performance in which only the special pattern TZ changes) corresponding to the variable display of the second special pattern is executed in the normal game state, a pseudo consecutive performance accompanied by the operation of the performance button 17 or the vibration of the performance button 17 is not executed, that is, the execution of a pseudo consecutive performance accompanied by the operation of the performance button 17 or the vibration of the performance button 17 is limited. By doing this, in the normal game state in which hitting from the left is advantageous to the player, it is possible to promote the execution of the variable display of the first special pattern (first variable performance) performed by the game ball entering the first starting hole 45, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

The seventh feature of the pseudo consecutive performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. 62 is that when a variable performance (variable performance in which the performance pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ change) corresponding to the variable display of the first special pattern is executed in the normal game state, a pseudo consecutive performance (a type of operation performance or vibration performance) accompanied by the operation of the performance button 17 or the vibration of the performance button 17 can be executed, while when a variable performance (variable performance in which only the special pattern TZ changes) corresponding to the variable display of the normal pattern is executed in the normal game state, a pseudo consecutive performance accompanied by the operation of the performance button 17 or the vibration of the performance button 17 is not executed, that is, the execution of a pseudo consecutive performance accompanied by the operation of the performance button 17 or the vibration of the performance button 17 is limited. By doing this, in the normal game state in which hitting from the left is advantageous to the player, it is possible to promote the execution of the variable display of the first special pattern (first variable performance) performed by the game ball entering the first starting hole 45, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

The eighth feature of the pseudo consecutive performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. 62 is that when a variable performance (a variable performance in which the performance pattern 70a corresponding to the variable display of the first special pattern and the special pattern change) is executed in the normal game state, a pseudo consecutive performance (a type of operation performance or vibration performance) accompanied by the operation of the performance button 17 or the vibration of the performance button 17 can be executed, while when a variable performance (a variable performance in which only the special pattern TZ corresponding to the variable display of the first special pattern changes, a variable performance in which only the special pattern TZ corresponding to the variable display of the second special pattern changes, a variable performance in which the performance pattern 70a corresponding to the variable display of the normal pattern and the special pattern TZ change) is executed in the time-saving game state, a pseudo consecutive performance accompanied by the operation of the performance button 17 or the vibration of the performance button 17 is not executed, that is, the execution of a pseudo consecutive performance accompanied by the operation of the performance button 17 or the vibration of the performance button 17 is restricted. In this way, it is possible to differentiate between the normal game state and the time-saving game state, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

Note that, when a variable presentation pattern has a high probability of producing a favorable result for the player and a pseudo-successful consecutive performance is performed, the presentation button 17 may be in a protruding state during the valid period, but it may be configured not to be in a protruding state.

In addition, the vibration effects executed in the pseudo consecutive success effect include weak vibration effects and strong vibration effects, but it is also possible to have only weak vibration effects or only strong vibration effects.

In addition, although a valid period is generated to execute the pseudo consecutive success or failure effect, it is also possible to execute the pseudo consecutive success or failure effect without generating a valid period, and the vibration effect executed in the pseudo consecutive success effect may be only a weak vibration effect for 3 seconds or only a strong vibration effect for 3 seconds, or only a weak vibration effect for 1 second or only a strong vibration effect for 1 second.

In addition, in the time-saving game state, when a variable effect is executed in which only the special pattern TZ corresponding to the variable display of the second special pattern changes, or when a variable effect is executed in which the display pattern 70a corresponding to the variable display of the normal pattern and the special pattern TZ change, a pseudo consecutive effect may be executed, and in this case, it is preferable to execute it at a lower rate than when a variable effect corresponding to the variable display of the first special pattern is executed in the normal game state.

Specifically, when a variation effect corresponding to a miss variation display of the second special symbol is executed, the pseudo consecutive performance involving the operation of the performance button 17 or the vibration of the performance button 17 is executed at a lower rate than when a variation effect corresponding to a miss variation display of the first special symbol is executed; when a variation effect corresponding to a jackpot variation display of the second special symbol is executed, the pseudo consecutive performance involving the operation of the performance button 17 or the vibration of the performance button 17 is executed at a lower rate than when a variation effect corresponding to a jackpot variation display of the first special symbol is executed; when a variation effect corresponding to a miss variation display of the normal symbol is executed, the pseudo consecutive performance involving the operation of the performance button 17 or the vibration of the performance button 17 is executed at a lower rate than when a variation effect corresponding to a miss variation display of the first special symbol is executed; and when a variation effect corresponding to a win variation display of the normal symbol is executed, the pseudo consecutive performance involving the operation of the performance button 17 or the vibration of the performance button 17 is executed at a lower rate than when a variation effect corresponding to a jackpot variation display of the first special symbol is executed.

(Development performance pattern determination table)
FIG. 63 shows a development effect pattern determination table which is referenced when determining the presentation pattern of a development effect.

As shown in Figure 63, the development presentation pattern determination table associates the game status, pattern type (first special pattern, second special pattern, normal pattern), judgment result (jackpot judgment result, win judgment result), variable presentation pattern type, development presentation type that is the subject of the development presentation pattern determination, selection rate (%) of each development presentation pattern, and the selected development presentation pattern, and for reference, the presentation configuration of each development presentation pattern (valid suggestion presentation, valid period, presentation content) is also listed.

The "valid suggestion effect" is an introductory effect that suggests the possibility of a valid period occurring, and specifically, it is an effect in which multiple semi-transparent effect button images modeled after effect button 17 are displayed and moved on the first image display device 70, and the semi-transparent effect button images are gathered toward a specific position.
"None" in the valid suggestion effect column indicates that a valid suggestion effect will not be executed, "Yes (false)" indicates that a valid suggestion effect will be executed but it is a false valid suggestion effect in which no valid period occurs afterwards, and "Yes" indicates that a valid suggestion effect will be executed and then a valid period will occur.

"Valid period (long press for 4 seconds)" indicates that the developing performance progresses gradually by pressing and holding the performance button 17, and that the valid period of the developing performance ends when 4 seconds have elapsed.
The "promotion effect" in the valid period column is an effect that encourages the operation of the effect button 17 during the valid period, and specifically, as a result of a number of semi-transparent effect button images gathering at a specific position, an opaque effect button image is displayed at the specific position, and a gauge image is displayed that indicates the remaining time of the valid period by the length of the gauge. When the effect button 17 is operated during the valid period, an operation sound 3, which is different from the above-mentioned operation sounds 1 and 2, is output.

"Normal button white" in the promotion effect column indicates that the above-mentioned opaque effect button image will be displayed as a button image that imitates the effect button 17 in its normal state, not protruding and glowing white.
"Normal button red" indicates that the above-mentioned opaque effect button image is displayed as a button image that imitates the effect button 17 in its normal state, not protruding and emitting red light.

The "Button Status" in the Validity Period column indicates the status of the effect button 17 during the validity period, and "Normal (White)" in the Button Status column indicates that the effect button 17 is in its normal state, not protruding, and that the effect button 17 emits a white light, which has a low probability of producing a favorable result for the player, and "Normal (Red)" indicates that the effect button 17 is in its normal state, not protruding, and that the effect button 17 emits a red light, which has a high probability of producing a favorable result for the player.

"Performance content" indicates the content of the performance related to the development performance, and "Temporary stop period of development pattern 2 seconds" indicates that the period during which the development pattern described below will be temporarily stopped is 2 seconds.

"SP notification" in the development performance mode column indicates that an SP development pattern is displayed indicating development to an SP reach performance as a result of the development performance, and an SP development performance is executed in which the first development sound effect is output.
"SPSP notification" indicates that an SPSP development effect is executed in which an SPSP development pattern is derived and displayed, suggesting development to an SPSP reach effect as a result of the development effect, and a second development sound effect is output.
"Full rotation notification" indicates that a full rotation development pattern is derived and displayed, suggesting development to a full rotation reach performance as a result of the development performance, and a full rotation development performance is executed in which a third development sound effect is output.

"Weak action" in the reel action column indicates that when various patterns are derived and displayed (= at the end of the valid period), the second movable member 73b emits blue light and a weak action with a small operating range is performed.
"Strong action" indicates that when various patterns are derived and displayed (= at the end of the valid period), the second movable member 73b emits red light and a strong action with a large swing range is performed.

"Weak vibration (1 second)" in the button vibration column indicates that a weak vibration effect is executed in which the button vibration motor for vibrating the effect button 17 vibrates weakly for 1 second from the time when the various development patterns are derived and displayed (= the end of the valid period).
"Strong vibration (1 second)" indicates that a weak vibration effect is executed in which the button vibration motor for vibrating the effect button 17 vibrates strongly for 1 second from the time when various patterns are derived and displayed (= the end of the valid period).

The likelihood of each action effect resulting in a favorable outcome for the player (here, a jackpot game being executed) is "weak action" < "strong action." Also, the likelihood of each vibration effect resulting in a favorable outcome for the player is "weak vibration" < "strong vibration."

The first feature of the development presentation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 63 is that when a variable presentation pattern that has a high expectation of a favorable result for the player is performed and a development presentation (SPSP notification, full rotation notification) that has a high expectation of a favorable result for the player is performed, a vibration presentation may be executed in which an effective period of the presentation button 17 is generated and the presentation button 17 is vibrated. This makes it possible to effectively inform the player that there is a high expectation of a favorable result, thereby making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

The second feature of the development effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 63 is that the vibration effect of the effect button 17 (operation of the button vibration motor) is more likely to be executed (higher execution rate) when a full rotation development effect is executed, which has a higher expectation of a result that is more favorable to the player than an SPSP development effect, and the expectation of a result that is more favorable to the player is higher when the vibration effect of the effect button 17 is executed than when the vibration effect of the effect button 17 is not executed when an SPSP development effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's expectation as to whether or not the vibration effect of the effect button 17 will be executed when an SPSP development effect is executed, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The third feature of the development presentation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 63 is that the vibration presentation executed when a development presentation (SPSP notification, full rotation notification) that is highly likely to result in a favorable outcome for the player and that is a variable presentation pattern that is highly likely to result in a favorable outcome for the player is performed is relatively short in duration. Therefore, it is possible to execute a presentation with a high presentation effect while suppressing the inconvenience of mistaking the execution of a jackpot game for one thing, thereby making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The fourth feature of the development effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 63 is that the vibration intensity of the vibration effect executed when a development effect (SPSP notification, full rotation notification) is performed, which is a variable effect pattern with a high expectation of a favorable result for the player, is of two types depending on the expectation of a favorable result for the player. Therefore, the vibration intensity of the vibration effect can suggest the expectation of a favorable result for the player, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The fifth feature of the development effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 63 is that the temporary stop period of the development symbol (2 seconds) is the same as the vibration period of the effect button 17 during the temporary stop of the development symbol (2 seconds), or the ratio of the difference between the temporary stop period of the development symbol (2 seconds) and the vibration period of the effect button 17 (3 seconds) is smaller than that of the pre-reach notice effect. This effectively heightens the player's sense of expectation, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The sixth feature of the development performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. 63 is that when a change performance (a change performance in which the performance pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ change) corresponding to the change display of the first special symbol is executed in the normal game state, a development performance (a type of operation performance, a role action performance, or a vibration performance) accompanied by the operation of the performance button 17, the operation of the role, or the vibration of the performance button 17 can be executed, while when a change performance (a change performance in which only the special pattern TZ changes) corresponding to the change display of the second special symbol is executed in the normal game state, a development performance accompanied by the operation of the performance button 17, the operation of the role, or the vibration of the performance button 17 is not executed, that is, the execution of a development performance accompanied by the operation of the performance button 17, the operation of the role, or the vibration of the performance button 17 is restricted. By doing so, in the normal game state in which hitting from the left is advantageous to the player, it is possible to promote the execution of the change display of the first special symbol (first change performance) that is executed by the game ball entering the first starting hole 45, and it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

The seventh feature of the development performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. 63 is that when a change performance (a change performance in which the performance pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ change) corresponding to the change display of the first special pattern is executed in the normal game state, a development performance (a type of operation performance, a role action performance, or a vibration performance) accompanied by the operation of the performance button 17, the operation of the role, or the vibration of the performance button 17 can be executed, while when a change performance (a change performance in which only the special pattern TZ changes) corresponding to the change display of the normal pattern is executed in the normal game state, a development performance accompanied by the operation of the performance button 17, the operation of the role, or the vibration of the performance button 17 is not executed, that is, the execution of a development performance accompanied by the operation of the performance button 17, the operation of the role, or the vibration of the performance button 17 is limited. By doing so, in the normal game state in which hitting from the left is advantageous to the player, it is possible to promote the execution of the change display of the first special pattern (first change performance) performed by the game ball entering the first starting hole 45, and it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

The eighth feature of the development performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. 63 is that when a change performance (a change performance in which the performance pattern 70a and the special pattern corresponding to the change display of the first special pattern change) is executed in the normal game state, a development performance (a type of operation performance, role operation performance, or vibration performance) accompanied by operation of the performance button 17, operation of the device, or vibration of the performance button 17 can be executed, while when a change performance (a change performance in which only the special pattern TZ corresponding to the change display of the first special pattern changes, a change performance in which only the special pattern TZ corresponding to the change display of the second special pattern changes, or a change performance in which the performance pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ corresponding to the change display of the normal pattern change) is executed in the time-saving game state, a development performance accompanied by operation of the performance button 17, operation of the device, or vibration of the performance button 17 is not executed, that is, the execution of a development performance accompanied by operation of the performance button 17, operation of the device, or vibration of the performance button 17 is restricted. In this way, it is possible to differentiate between the normal game state and the time-saving game state, and to increase the interest in the game.

Note that, although there are weak vibration effects and strong vibration effects as vibration effects executed in the development effects, it is also possible to have only weak vibration effects or only strong vibration effects.

In addition, in the time-saving game state, when a variable effect is executed in which only the special pattern TZ corresponding to the variable display of the second special pattern changes, or when a variable effect is executed in which the variable display of the normal pattern and the special pattern TZ change, an advanced effect involving the operation of the effect button 17, the operation of the device, or the vibration of the effect button 17 may be executed. In this case, it is preferable to execute the advanced effect at a lower rate than when a variable effect corresponding to the variable display of the first special pattern is executed in the normal game state.

Specifically, when a change performance corresponding to a miss change display of the second special symbol is executed, the development performance involving the operation of the performance button 17, the operation of the device, and the vibration of the performance button 17 is executed at a lower rate than when a change performance corresponding to a miss change display of the first special symbol is executed; when a change performance corresponding to a big win change display of the second special symbol is executed, the development performance involving the operation of the performance button 17, the operation of the device, and the vibration of the performance button 17 is executed at a lower rate than when a change performance corresponding to a big win change display of the first special symbol is executed; when a change performance corresponding to a miss change display of the normal symbol is executed, the development performance involving the operation of the performance button 17, the operation of the device, and the vibration of the performance button 17 is executed at a lower rate than when a change performance corresponding to a miss change display of the first special symbol is executed; and when a change performance corresponding to a win change display of the normal symbol is executed, the development performance involving the operation of the performance button 17, the operation of the device, and the vibration of the performance button 17 is executed at a lower rate than when a change performance corresponding to a big win change display of the first special symbol is executed.

(Cut-in performance pattern determination table)
FIG. 64 shows a cut-in effect pattern determination table which is referred to when determining the effect pattern of a cut-in effect.

As shown in Figure 64, the cut-in performance pattern determination table associates the game state, pattern type (first special pattern, second special pattern, normal pattern), judgment result (jackpot judgment result, win judgment result), variable performance pattern type, selection rate (%) of each cut-in performance pattern, and the cut-in performance pattern to be selected, and for reference, the performance configuration of each cut-in performance pattern (valid suggestion performance, valid period, performance content) is also listed.

The "valid suggestion effect" is an introductory effect that suggests the possibility of a valid period occurring, and specifically, it is an effect in which multiple semi-transparent effect button images modeled after effect button 17 are displayed and moved on the first image display device 70, and the semi-transparent effect button images are gathered toward a specific position.
"Valid period (single hit, 4 seconds)" indicates that the valid period for the cut-in effect ends with one operation of the effect button 17 or the passage of 4 seconds.

The "promotion effect" in the valid period column is an effect that encourages the operation of the effect button 17 during the valid period. Specifically, without executing a valid suggestion effect or as a result of executing a valid suggestion effect, an opaque effect button image is displayed in a specific position, and a gauge image is displayed that indicates the remaining time of the valid period by the length of the gauge. Note that when the effect button 17 is operated during the valid period, operation sound 4, which is different from operation sounds 1 to 3 described above, is output.

"Normal button white" in the promotion effect column indicates that the above-mentioned opaque effect button image will be displayed as a button image that imitates the effect button 17 in its normal state, not protruding and glowing white.
"Red protruding button" indicates that a button image that imitates the effect button 17 that is in a protruding state and emits red light is displayed as the opaque effect button image described above.
"Protruding button rainbow" indicates that a button image that imitates the effect button 17 that is in a protruding state and emits rainbow light is displayed as the opaque effect button image described above.

The "Button Status" in the Validity Period column indicates the status of the effect button 17 during the validity period, with "Normal (White)" indicating that the effect button 17 is not protruding and is in the normal state, where the effect button 17 emits light in white, which is unlikely to result in a favorable outcome for the player. "Protruding (Red)" indicating that the effect button 17 is in the protruding state and emits light in red, which is likely to result in a favorable outcome for the player. "Protruding (Rainbow)" indicating that the effect button 17 is in the protruding state and emits light in rainbow colors, which is likely to result in a favorable outcome for the player.

"Performance content" indicates the content of the performance that will be executed when the performance button 17 is operated during the valid period or when the valid period has elapsed, and "Cut-in display period of 3 seconds" indicates that the display period of the cut-in image is 3 seconds.

"Blue cut-in" in the cut-in performance mode column indicates that a blue cut-in performance is executed in which a blue frame cut-in image is displayed on the first image display device 70 and the first cut-in sound effect is output.
"Green cut-in" indicates that a green frame cut-in image is displayed on the first image display device 70 and a green cut-in performance is executed in which a second cut-in sound effect is output.
"Red cut-in" indicates that a red frame cut-in image is displayed on the first image display device 70 and a red cut-in performance is executed in which a third cut-in sound effect is output.

"Weak vibration (3 seconds)" in the button vibration column indicates that a weak vibration effect is executed in which the button vibration motor for vibrating the effect button 17 vibrates weakly for 3 seconds from the time the cut-in image begins to be displayed (= when the effect button 17 is operated or when the valid period ends).
"Strong vibration (3 seconds)" indicates that a strong vibration effect is executed in which the button vibration motor for vibrating the effect button 17 vibrates strongly for 3 seconds from the time when the cut-in image begins to be displayed (= when the effect button 17 is operated or when the valid period ends).

The likelihood of each cut-in resulting in a favorable outcome for the player is "blue cut-in" < "green cut-in" < "red cut-in." Also, the likelihood of each vibration effect resulting in a favorable outcome for the player is "weak vibration effect" < "strong vibration effect."

The first feature of the cut-in effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 64 is that when a cut-in image that has a high probability of producing a favorable result for the player is displayed (a cut-in effect is executed), a vibration effect may be executed in which an effective period of the effect button 17 is generated and the effect button 17 is vibrated. This makes it possible to effectively inform the player that there is a high probability of producing a favorable result, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

The second feature of the cut-in effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 64 is that the vibration effect that is executed when a cut-in image that has a high probability of producing a favorable result for the player is displayed (a cut-in effect is executed) lasts for a relatively long time. This makes it possible to effectively inform the player that there is a high probability of producing a favorable result, thereby making it possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

A third feature of the cut-in effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 64 is that the vibration intensity of the vibration effect executed when a cut-in image with a high expectation of a favorable result for the player is displayed (a cut-in effect is executed) has two types depending on the expectation of a favorable result for the player. Therefore, the vibration intensity of the vibration effect can suggest the expectation of a favorable result for the player, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The fourth feature of the cut-in effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 64 is that the display period of the cut-in image (3 seconds) is the same as the vibration period of the effect button 17 while the cut-in image is displayed (3 seconds) (the ratio of the difference between the display period of the cut-in image (3 seconds) and the vibration period of the effect button 17 (3 seconds) is smaller than that of the pre-reach preview effect). This effectively builds up the player's sense of anticipation, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

The fifth feature of the cut-in performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. 64 is that when a change performance corresponding to the change display of the first special symbol (a change performance in which the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ change) is executed in the normal game state, a cut-in performance (a type of operation performance or vibration performance) accompanied by the operation of the performance button 17 or the vibration of the performance button 17 can be executed, while when a change performance corresponding to the change display of the second special symbol (a change performance in which only the special symbol TZ changes) is executed in the normal game state, a cut-in performance accompanied by the operation of the performance button 17 or the vibration of the performance button 17 is not executed, that is, the execution of a cut-in performance accompanied by the operation of the performance button 17 or the vibration of the performance button 17 is limited. By doing this, in the normal game state in which hitting from the left is advantageous to the player, it is possible to promote the execution of the change display of the first special symbol (first change performance) that is executed when the game ball enters the first starting hole 45, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

The sixth feature of the cut-in performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. 64 is that when a change performance corresponding to the change display of the first special symbol (a change performance in which the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ change) is executed in the normal game state, a cut-in performance (a type of operation performance or vibration performance) accompanied by the operation of the performance button 17 or the vibration of the performance button 17 can be executed, while when a change performance corresponding to the change display of the normal symbol (a change performance in which only the special symbol TZ changes) is executed in the normal game state, a cut-in performance accompanied by the operation of the performance button 17 or the vibration of the performance button 17 is not executed, that is, the execution of a cut-in performance accompanied by the operation of the performance button 17 or the vibration of the performance button 17 is limited. By doing this, in the normal game state in which hitting from the left is advantageous to the player, it is possible to promote the execution of the change display of the first special symbol (first change performance) that is executed when the game ball enters the first starting hole 45, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

The seventh feature of the cut-in effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 64 is that when a change effect (a change effect in which the effect pattern 70a corresponding to the change display of the first special pattern and the special pattern change) is executed in the normal game state, a cut-in effect (a type of operation effect or vibration effect) accompanied by the operation of the effect button 17 or the vibration of the effect button 17 can be executed, while when a change effect (a change effect in which only the special pattern TZ corresponding to the change display of the first special pattern changes, a change effect in which only the special pattern TZ corresponding to the change display of the second special pattern changes, or a change effect in which the effect pattern 70a corresponding to the change display of the normal pattern and the special pattern TZ change) is executed in the time-saving game state, a cut-in effect accompanied by the operation of the effect button 17 or the vibration of the effect button 17 is not executed, that is, the execution of a cut-in effect accompanied by the operation of the effect button 17 or the vibration of the effect button 17 is restricted. In this way, it is possible to differentiate between the normal game state and the time-saving game state, and to increase the interest in the game.

Note that, although there are weak vibration effects and strong vibration effects as vibration effects executed during cut-in effects, it is also possible to have only weak vibration effects or only strong vibration effects.

Although the cut-in effect is executed by generating a valid period, the cut-in effect may be executed without generating a valid period, and in that case, the vibration effect executed may be only a weak vibration effect for 3 seconds or only a strong vibration effect for 3 seconds, or only a weak vibration effect for 1 second or only a strong vibration effect for 1 second.

In addition, in the time-saving game state, when a variable effect is executed in which only the special pattern TZ corresponding to the variable display of the second special pattern changes, or when a variable effect is executed in which the variable display of the normal pattern and the special pattern TZ change, a cut-in effect accompanied by the operation of the effect button 17 or the vibration of the effect button 17 may be executed. In this case, it is preferable to execute the cut-in effect at a lower rate than when a variable effect corresponding to the variable display of the first special pattern is executed in the normal game state.

Specifically, when a change performance corresponding to a miss change display of the second special symbol is executed, a cut-in performance accompanied by operation of the effect button 17 or vibration of the effect button 17 is executed at a lower rate than when a change performance corresponding to a miss change display of the first special symbol is executed, when a change performance corresponding to a jackpot change display of the second special symbol is executed, a cut-in performance accompanied by operation of the effect button 17 or vibration of the effect button 17 is executed at a lower rate than when a change performance corresponding to a jackpot change display of the first special symbol is executed, when a change performance corresponding to a miss change display of the normal symbol is executed, a cut-in performance accompanied by operation of the effect button 17 or vibration of the effect button 17 is executed at a lower rate than when a change performance corresponding to a miss change display of the first special symbol is executed, and when a change performance corresponding to a win change display of the normal symbol is executed, a cut-in performance accompanied by operation of the effect button 17 or vibration of the effect button 17 is executed at a lower rate than when a change performance corresponding to a jackpot change display of the first special symbol is executed.

(Decisive performance pattern determination table)
FIG. 65 shows a deciding effect pattern determination table which is referred to when determining the effect pattern of the deciding effect.

As shown in Figure 65, the deciding effect pattern determination table associates the game state, pattern type (first special pattern, second special pattern, normal pattern), judgment result (jackpot judgment result, win judgment result), variable effect pattern type, selection rate (%) of each deciding effect pattern, and the deciding effect pattern to be selected, and for reference, the performance configuration of each deciding effect pattern (valid suggestion performance, valid period, performance content) is also listed.

The "valid suggestion effect" is an introductory effect that suggests the possibility of a valid period occurring, and specifically, it is an effect in which multiple semi-transparent effect button images modeled after effect button 17 are displayed and moved on the first image display device 70, and the button images are gathered toward a specific position.
"Valid period (single hit, 4 seconds)" indicates that the valid period for the deciding effect ends with one operation of the effect button 17 or the passage of 4 seconds.

The "promotion effect" in the valid period column is an effect that encourages the operation of the effect button 17 during the valid period. Specifically, without executing a valid suggestion effect or as a result of executing a valid suggestion effect, an opaque effect button image is displayed in a specific position, and a gauge image is displayed that indicates the remaining time of the valid period by the length of the gauge. Note that when the effect button 17 is operated during the valid period, operation sound 5, which is different from operation sounds 1 to 4 described above, is output.

"Normal button white" in the promotion effect column indicates that the above-mentioned opaque effect button image will be displayed as a button image that imitates the effect button 17 in its normal state, not protruding and glowing white.
"Red protruding button" indicates that a button image that imitates the effect button 17 that is in a protruding state and emits red light is displayed as the opaque effect button image described above.
"Protruding button rainbow" indicates that a button image that imitates the effect button 17 that is in a protruding state and emits rainbow light is displayed as the opaque effect button image described above.

The "Button Status" in the Validity Period column indicates the status of the effect button 17 during the validity period, with "Normal (White)" indicating that the effect button 17 is not protruding and is in the normal state, where the effect button 17 emits light in white, which is unlikely to result in a favorable outcome for the player. "Protruding (Red)" indicating that the effect button 17 is in the protruding state and emits light in red, which is likely to result in a favorable outcome for the player. "Protruding (Rainbow)" indicating that the effect button 17 is in the protruding state and emits light in rainbow colors, which is likely to result in a favorable outcome for the player.

"Performance content" refers to the content of the performance that is executed when the performance button 17 is operated during the valid period or when the valid period has elapsed, and "successful decision performance period of 11 seconds (5 seconds during time-saving)" refers to the execution period of the performance related to the successful decision performance during normal game mode being 11 seconds, and the execution period of the performance related to the successful decision performance during time-saving game mode being 5 seconds.

"Fail" in the deciding performance mode column indicates that a deciding failure performance will be executed by the screen of the first image display device 70 turning dark, suggesting that the result is not favorable to the player (a jackpot game or auxiliary game will not be executed).
"Success" indicates that a success effect image is displayed on the first image display device 70, and a decisive success presentation is executed, suggesting that the result is favorable to the player (a jackpot game or an auxiliary game will be executed).

"Strong vibration (4 seconds → 5 seconds)" in the button vibration column indicates that the button vibration motor for vibrating the effect button 17 will vibrate strongly for 4 seconds from the start of the successful decision effect (= when the effect button 17 is operated or when the valid period ends), followed by a strong vibration effect (successful decision vibration effect) in which a strong vibration effect is executed for 5 seconds with a 1-second interval between them.
"Strong vibration (4 seconds)" in the button vibration column indicates that a strong vibration effect (successful decision vibration effect) will be executed in which the button vibration motor for vibrating the effect button 17 will vibrate strongly for 4 seconds from the start of the successful decision effect (= when the effect button 17 is operated or when the valid period ends).

The "Strong action" in the role action column indicates that the first movable member 73a will move to its maximum action position and perform a strong action that emits rainbow light.

"Rainbow illumination (11 seconds)" in the button illumination column indicates that the effect button LED for illuminating the effect button 17 will emit rainbow illumination for 11 seconds (a longer period than when the effect button 17 is vibrating strongly) from the start of the successful decision effect (= when the effect button 17 is operated or when the valid period ends).
"Rainbow illumination (5 seconds)" in the button illumination column indicates that the effect button LED for illuminating the effect button 17 will emit rainbow illumination for 5 seconds (a longer period than when the effect button 17 is vibrating strongly) from the start of the successful decision effect (= when the effect button 17 is operated or when the valid period ends).

The likelihood of each promotional effect resulting in a favorable outcome for the player is as follows: "normal white button" < "protruding red button" < "protruding rainbow button." Also, the likelihood of each button state resulting in a favorable outcome for the player is "normal" < "protruding."

The first feature of the deciding effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 65 is that when a deciding success effect is executed, a valid period is generated and a vibration effect is executed in which the effect button 17 is vibrated. This makes it possible to effectively notify the player that a big win game or auxiliary game will be executed, thereby making the game more interesting.

The second feature of the deciding effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 65 is that the effective period of the effect button 17 that occurs during a variable effect occurs for the longest period of time. This makes it possible to prevent the player from forgetting to operate the effect button 17, thereby making the game more interesting.

The third feature of the deciding effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 65 is that it is possible to vibrate the effect button 17 for the longest period of time as a strong vibration effect that occurs during a variable effect. This effectively heightens the player's sense of elation when a deciding effect is successful, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The fourth feature of the deciding effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 65 is that the rainbow light emission of the effect button 17 lasts for a longer period than the vibration period of the effect button 17. Therefore, the player's sense of elation can be maintained even after the vibration of the effect button 17 has ended, making it possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

The fifth feature of the deciding effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 65 is that when a variable effect (variable effect in which the effect pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ change) corresponding to the variable display of the first special pattern is executed in the normal game state, a deciding effect (a type of operation effect, vibration effect, or device operation effect) accompanied by the operation of the effect button 17, the vibration of the effect button 17, or the operation of the device is executed, while when a variable effect (variable effect in which only the special pattern TZ changes) corresponding to the variable display of the second special pattern is executed in the normal game state, a deciding effect accompanied by the operation of the effect button 17, the vibration of the effect button 17, or the operation of the device is not executed, that is, the execution of a deciding effect accompanied by the operation of the effect button 17, the vibration of the effect button 17, or the operation of the device is restricted. By doing this, in the normal game state in which hitting from the left is advantageous to the player, it is possible to promote the execution of the variable display of the first special pattern (first variable effect) that is executed by the game ball entering the first starting hole 45, and it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

The sixth feature of the deciding effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 65 is that when a variable effect (variable effect in which the effect pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ change) corresponding to the variable display of the first special pattern is executed in the normal game state, a deciding effect (a type of operation effect, vibration effect, or device operation effect) accompanied by the operation of the effect button 17, the vibration of the effect button 17, or the operation of the device is executable, whereas when a variable effect (variable effect in which only the special pattern TZ changes) corresponding to the variable display of the normal pattern is executed in the normal game state, a deciding effect accompanied by the operation of the effect button 17, the vibration of the effect button 17, or the operation of the device is not executed, that is, the execution of a deciding effect accompanied by the operation of the effect button 17, the vibration of the effect button 17, or the operation of the device is restricted. By doing this, in the normal game state in which hitting from the left is advantageous to the player, it is possible to promote the execution of the variable display of the first special pattern (first variable effect) that is executed by the game ball entering the first starting hole 45, and to increase the interest in the game.

The seventh feature of the deciding effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 65 is that when a changing effect (changing effect in which the special pattern changes) corresponding to the changing display of the first special pattern is executed in the time-saving game state, the deciding effect (a type of operation effect, vibration effect, or device operation effect) involving the operation of the effect button 17, the vibration of the effect button 17, or the operation of the device is not executed. In other words, the execution of a deciding effect involving the operation of the effect button 17, the vibration of the effect button 17, or the operation of the device is restricted, whereas when a changing effect (changing effect in which the effect pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ change) corresponding to the changing display of the normal pattern is executed in the time-saving game state, the deciding effect involving the operation of the effect button 17, the vibration of the effect button 17, or the operation of the device can be executed. In this way, in the time-saving game state in which hitting to the right is advantageous for the player, the execution of the changing display of the normal pattern (normal pattern changing effect) performed by the game ball entering the normal pattern gate 44 can be promoted, and the interest in the game can be improved.

The eighth feature of the deciding effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 65 is that when a variable effect (a variable effect in which a special symbol changes) corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the time-saving game state, the deciding effect (a type of operation effect, vibration effect, or device operation effect) involving the operation of the effect button 17, the vibration of the effect button 17, or the operation of the device is not executed. In other words, the execution of a deciding effect involving the operation of the effect button 17, the vibration of the effect button 17, or the operation of the device is restricted, whereas when a variable effect (a variable effect in which the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ change) corresponding to the variable display of the normal symbol is executed in the time-saving game state, the deciding effect involving the operation of the effect button 17, the vibration of the effect button 17, or the operation of the device can be executed. In this way, in the time-saving game state in which hitting to the right is advantageous for the player, the execution of the variable display of the normal symbol (normal symbol variable effect) performed by the game ball entering the normal symbol gate 44 can be promoted, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in the deciding performance (successful deciding performance), the action performance is performed using the first movable member 73a, but the action performance may also be performed using the second movable member 73b. In this case, it is preferable to make the execution rate of the action performance using the first movable member 73a higher than that using the second movable member 73b.

In addition, in the time-saving play state, when a variable effect is executed in which only the special pattern TZ corresponding to the variable display of the second special pattern changes, a deciding effect involving the operation of the effect button 17, the vibration of the effect button 17, or the operation of the role may be executed, and in this case, it is preferable to execute the deciding effect at a lower rate than when a variable effect corresponding to the variable display of the normal pattern is executed in the time-saving play state.

Specifically, when a change performance corresponding to a losing change display of the second special symbol is executed, a deciding effect involving operation of the effect button 17, vibration of the effect button 17, and operation of the device should be executed at a lower rate than when a change performance corresponding to a losing change display of the normal symbol is executed, and when a change performance corresponding to a big win change display of the second special symbol is executed, a deciding effect involving operation of the effect button 17, vibration of the effect button 17, and operation of the device should be executed at a lower rate than when a change performance corresponding to a winning change display of the normal symbol is executed.

(Re-selection performance pattern determination table)
FIG. 66 is a diagram showing a re-lottery effect pattern determination table which is referred to when determining the effect pattern of the re-lottery effect.

As shown in FIG. 66, the re-draw performance pattern determination table associates the game status, the type of pattern (first special pattern, second special pattern, normal pattern), whether or not there has been a promotion (whether or not there is a promotion planned), the selection rate (%) of each re-draw performance pattern, and the re-draw performance pattern to be selected, and for reference, the performance configuration of each re-draw performance pattern (valid suggestion performance, valid period, performance content) is also listed.

The "valid suggestion effect" is an introductory effect that suggests the possibility of a valid period occurring, and specifically, it is an effect in which multiple semi-transparent effect button images modeled after effect button 17 are displayed and moved on the first image display device 70, and the semi-transparent effect button images are gathered toward a specific position.
"Valid period (single hit, 4 seconds)" indicates that the valid period for the re-lottery effect ends when the effect button 17 is operated once or 4 seconds have elapsed.

The "promotion effect" in the validity period column is an effect that encourages the operation of the effect button 17 during the validity period. Specifically, it is an effect in which an opaque effect button image is displayed in a specific position without executing a validity suggestion effect, and a gauge image is displayed that indicates the remaining time of the validity period by the length of the gauge. Note that when the effect button 17 is operated during the validity period, operation sound 6, which is different from operation sounds 1 to 5 described above, is output.

"Normal button white" in the promotion effect column indicates that the above-mentioned opaque effect button image will be displayed as a button image that imitates the effect button 17 in its normal state, not protruding and glowing white.
"Normal button red" indicates that the above-mentioned opaque effect button image is displayed as a button image that imitates the effect button 17 in its normal state, not protruding and emitting red light.
"Normal button rainbow" indicates that, as the opaque effect button image described above, a button image imitating the effect button 17 in its normal state, not protruding and emitting rainbow light, is displayed.

The "Button Status" in the Validity Period column indicates the status of the effect button 17 during the validity period, and "Normal (White)" in the Button Status column indicates that the effect button 17 is in the normal state where it is not protruding and the effect button 17 lights up in white, which indicates a low promotion expectation. "Normal (Red)" indicates that the effect button 17 is in the normal state where it is not protruding and the effect button 17 lights up in red, which indicates a high promotion expectation. "Normal (Rainbow)" indicates that the effect button 17 is in the normal state where it is not protruding and the effect button 17 lights up in rainbow colors, which indicates a guaranteed promotion.

"Performance content" indicates the content of the performance that is executed when the performance button 17 is operated during the valid period or when the valid period has elapsed, and "promotion success performance period 4 seconds" indicates that the execution period of the promotion success performance is 4 seconds.

"Promotion failure" in the re-draw performance mode column indicates that a non-promotion symbol that is not advantageous to the player as a result of the re-draw performance (for example, an even symbol → even symbol, or an odd symbol other than "7" → odd symbol other than "7") is derived and displayed (temporarily stopped), and a non-promotion sound effect is output.
"Promotion successful" indicates that a promotion pattern that is favorable to the player as a result of the re-draw performance (for example, an even number pattern → odd number pattern, or an odd number pattern other than "7" → "7") is derived and displayed (temporarily stopped), and a promotion sound effect is output.

In the button vibration column, "Strong vibration (3 seconds)" indicates that a strong vibration effect will be executed in which the button vibration motor for vibrating the effect button 17 will vibrate strongly for 3 seconds from the time when the promotion pattern is derived and displayed (= the end of the valid period).

In the button illumination column, "Rainbow illumination (4 seconds)" indicates that the effect button LED that illuminates the effect button 17 will emit rainbow light for 4 seconds (a longer period than the effect button 17 is vibrating strongly) from the time the promotion symbol is derived and displayed (= the end of the valid period).

The likelihood of each promotional effect resulting in a favorable outcome for the player is "normal white button" < "normal red button" < "normal rainbow button".

The first feature of the re-draw effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 66 is that when a promotion success effect is executed, a valid period is generated and a vibration effect is executed in which the effect button 17 is vibrated. This makes it possible to effectively notify the player that he or she has been promoted to a favorable result, thereby making it possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

The second feature of the re-draw effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 66 is that the rainbow light emission of the effect button 17 is performed for a longer period of time than the strong vibration effect. Therefore, the player's sense of elation can be maintained even after the strong vibration effect has ended, making it possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

The third feature of the re-draw performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. 66 is that, in the normal game state, when a change performance (a change performance in which the performance pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ change) corresponding to the change display of the first special pattern is executed, a re-draw performance (a type of operation performance or vibration performance) accompanied by the operation of the performance button 17 or the vibration of the performance button 17 can be executed, whereas, in the normal game state, when a change performance (a change performance in which only the special pattern TZ changes) corresponding to the change display of the second special pattern is executed, a re-draw performance accompanied by the operation of the performance button 17 or the vibration of the performance button 17 is not executed, that is, the execution of a re-draw performance accompanied by the operation of the performance button 17 or the vibration of the performance button 17 is restricted. By doing this, in the normal game state in which hitting from the left is advantageous to the player, it is possible to promote the execution of the change display of the first special pattern (first change performance) that is executed by the game ball entering the first starting hole 45, and it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

The fourth feature of the re-draw performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. 66 is that when a change performance corresponding to the change display of the first special symbol (a change performance in which the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ change) is executed in the normal game state, a re-draw performance (a type of operation performance or vibration performance) accompanied by the operation of the performance button 17 or the vibration of the performance button 17 can be executed, whereas when a change performance corresponding to the change display of the normal symbol (a change performance in which only the special symbol TZ changes) is executed in the normal game state, a re-draw performance accompanied by the operation of the performance button 17 or the vibration of the performance button 17 is not executed, that is, the execution of a re-draw performance accompanied by the operation of the performance button 17 or the vibration of the performance button 17 is restricted. By doing this, in the normal game state in which hitting from the left is advantageous to the player, it is possible to promote the execution of the change display of the first special symbol (first change performance) that is executed when the game ball enters the first starting hole 45, and it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

The fifth feature of the re-draw performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. 66 is that when a variable performance (a variable performance in which the performance pattern 70a corresponding to the variable display of the first special pattern and the special pattern change) is executed in the normal game state, a re-draw performance (a type of operation performance or vibration performance) accompanied by the operation of the performance button 17 or the vibration of the performance button 17 can be executed, whereas when a variable performance (a variable performance in which only the special pattern TZ corresponding to the variable display of the first special pattern changes, a variable performance in which only the special pattern TZ corresponding to the variable display of the second special pattern changes, or a variable performance in which the performance pattern 70a corresponding to the variable display of the normal pattern and the special pattern TZ change) is executed in the time-saving game state, a re-draw performance accompanied by the operation of the performance button 17 or the vibration of the performance button 17 is not executed, that is, the execution of a re-draw performance accompanied by the operation of the performance button 17 or the vibration of the performance button 17 is restricted. In this way, it is possible to differentiate between the normal game state and the time-saving game state, and to increase the interest in the game.

Note that while a valid period is generated to execute a re-draw effect (promotion failure effect, promotion success effect), it is also possible to execute a re-draw effect without generating a valid period.

In addition, in the time-saving game state, when a variable effect is executed in which only the special pattern TZ corresponding to the variable display of the second special pattern changes, or when a variable effect is executed in which the variable display of the normal pattern and the special pattern TZ change, a re-lottery effect involving the operation of the effect button 17 or the vibration of the effect button 17 may be executed, and in this case, it is preferable to execute the re-lottery effect at a lower or higher rate than when a variable effect corresponding to the variable display of the first special pattern is executed in the normal game state.

Specifically, when a variation effect corresponding to a miss variation display of the second special symbol is executed, a re-draw performance involving the operation of the performance button 17 or the vibration of the performance button 17 is executed at a lower or higher rate than when a variation effect corresponding to a miss variation display of the first special symbol is executed; when a variation effect corresponding to a jackpot variation display of the second special symbol is executed, a re-draw performance involving the operation of the performance button 17 or the vibration of the performance button 17 is executed at a lower or higher rate than when a variation effect corresponding to a jackpot variation display of the first special symbol is executed; when a variation effect corresponding to a miss variation display of the normal symbol is executed, a re-draw performance involving the operation of the performance button 17 or the vibration of the performance button 17 is executed at a lower or higher rate than when a variation effect corresponding to a miss variation display of the first special symbol is executed; and when a variation effect corresponding to a win variation display of the normal symbol is executed, a re-draw performance involving the operation of the performance button 17 or the vibration of the performance button 17 is executed at a lower or higher rate than when a variation effect corresponding to a jackpot variation display of the first special symbol is executed.

In addition, when a first jackpot game, which is less advantageous to the player than the second and third jackpot games, is executed, a re-draw effect can be executed when a change effect corresponding to the jackpot change display of the first special symbol is executed, and when an auxiliary game is executed in which the second starting hole 47 is opened in a short opening pattern, which is less advantageous to the player than an auxiliary game in which the second starting hole 47 is opened in a long opening pattern, the re-draw effect may not be executed.

(Summary of the various tables shown in Figures 55 to 66)
Here, a first feature of the various tables shown in Figures 55 to 66 is that during the normal pattern variable display (second variable display), a predetermined advance notice performance (e.g., a deciding performance, etc.) can be executed which suggests an outcome that is advantageous to the player (a winning judgment result), and when the normal pattern variable display (second variable display) is executed during the normal game state (first game state), the execution of the predetermined advance notice performance (e.g., a deciding performance, etc.) is restricted, and when the normal pattern variable display (second variable display) is executed during the time-saving game state (second game state), the predetermined advance notice performance (e.g., a deciding performance, etc.) can be executed. By doing this, it is possible to improve the presentation effect in the time-saving game state (second game state) in which it is important that the normal pattern variable display is executed, and it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

The second feature of the various tables shown in Figures 55 to 66 is that during the normal symbol variable display (second variable display), it is possible to execute an action presentation (e.g., a successful decision action, etc.) that causes the movable members (first movable member 73a, second movable member 73b, etc.) to operate in a predetermined manner (strong action, weak action, rattling action), and when the normal symbol variable display (second variable display) is executed during the normal game state (first game state), the execution of the action presentation (e.g., a successful decision action, etc.) is restricted, and when the normal symbol variable display (second variable display) is executed during the time-saving game state (second game state), the action presentation (e.g., a successful decision action, etc.) can be executed. By doing so, it is possible to improve the presentation effect in the time-saving game state (second game state) in which it is important that the normal symbol variable display is executed, and it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

A third feature of the various tables shown in Figures 55 to 66 is that during the normal symbol variable display (second variable display), a predetermined operation display (e.g., a deciding display, etc.) can be executed by operating the display button 17 (operation means), and when the normal symbol variable display (second variable display) is executed during the normal game state (first game state), the execution of the operation display (e.g., a deciding display, etc.) is restricted, and when the normal symbol variable display (second variable display) is executed during the time-saving game state (second game state), the operation display (e.g., a deciding display, etc.) can be executed. By doing this, it is possible to improve the presentation effect in the time-saving game state (second game state), where it is important that the normal symbol variable display is executed, and it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

The fourth feature of the various tables shown in Figures 55 to 66 is that, during the variable display of the second special symbol, a predetermined preview effect (e.g., a special effect in which the "BONUS approaching" display is displayed, etc.) can be executed, which suggests that the variable display of the second special symbol will result in a favorable result for the player (jackpot determination result), and when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed during the normal game state (first game state), the execution of the predetermined preview effect (e.g., a special effect in which the "BONUS approaching" display is displayed, etc.) is restricted when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed during the time-saving game state (second game state) in which the predetermined preview effect (e.g., a special effect in which the "BONUS approaching" display is displayed, etc.) can be executed. By doing so, the performance effect when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed can be made different depending on the game state, which makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The fifth feature of the various tables shown in Figures 55 to 66 is that it is possible to make the action of the movable members (first movable member 73a, second movable member 73b, etc.) executed when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed during the normal game state (e.g., a successful decision effect, etc.) the same as the action of the movable members (first movable member 73a, second movable member 73b) executed when the variable display of the normal symbol is executed during the time-saving game state (e.g., a successful decision effect, etc.). This makes it easier for the player to understand that the execution of the action effect is likely to result in a favorable result, making it possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

A sixth feature of the various tables shown in Figures 55 to 66 is that when a variable display of normal symbols is executed, a predetermined operation effect (such as a deciding effect) can be executed by operating the effect button 17 (operation means), and when the predetermined operation effect is executed, it is possible to vibrate the effect button 17 in a predetermined manner. In this way, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect when the predetermined operation effect is executed, and to increase the interest of the game.

The seventh feature of the various tables shown in Figures 55 to 66 is that when the variable display of normal symbols is executed during the normal game state, the execution of a vibration effect that vibrates the effect button 17 in a predetermined manner (for example, a vibration effect related to a successful decision effect, etc.) is restricted, but when the variable display of normal symbols is executed during the time-saving game state, a vibration effect that vibrates the effect button 17 in a predetermined manner (for example, a vibration effect related to a successful decision effect, etc.) can be executed. By doing this, it is possible to improve the effect of the presentation in the time-saving game state (second game state), where it is important that the variable display of normal symbols is executed, and it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

The eighth feature of the various tables shown in Figures 55 to 66 is that there are fewer types of vibration effects of the effect button 17 that are executed when the variable display of the normal symbol is executed during the time-saving game state than there are types of vibration effects of the effect button 17 that are executed when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed during the normal game state. This improves the effect of the normal game state, and avoids the inconvenience of poor effect even when the variable display of the normal symbol is executed during the time-saving game state, making the game more interesting.

The ninth feature of the various tables shown in Figures 55 to 66 is that the number of types of expectation levels in the predetermined look-ahead effects (icon change effects, light-emitting effects when winning) that suggest in advance the outcome of the variable display of the normal symbols in the time-saving game state is fewer than the number of types of expectation levels in the predetermined look-ahead effects (icon change effects, light-emitting effects when winning) that suggest in advance the outcome of the variable display of the first special symbol in the normal game state. By doing this, it is possible to improve the presentation effect in the normal game state and avoid the inconvenience of a poor presentation effect even when the variable display of the normal symbol is executed during the time-saving game state, making it possible to increase the interest in the game.

The tenth feature of the various tables shown in Figures 55 to 66 is that, during the time-saving game state, the number of types of expectation levels in the predetermined look-ahead performance (e.g., the light-emitting performance when winning) that suggests the outcome of the variable display of the normal symbols in advance is greater than the number of types of expectation levels in the predetermined look-ahead performance (e.g., the light-emitting performance when winning) that suggests the outcome of the variable display of the second special symbols in advance. By doing this, it is possible to improve the presentation effect in the time-saving game state, where the variable display of the normal symbols necessary to generate the second reserved memory is important, and it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

The eleventh feature of the various tables shown in Figures 55 to 66 is that a predetermined operation effect (for example, a deciding effect, etc.) can be executed when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed during the normal game state, and the effect button 17 can be vibrated in a predetermined manner when the predetermined operation effect is executed, and it is possible to make the vibration mode of the effect button 17 (4-second vibration → 5-second vibration) in the predetermined operation effect (for example, a deciding effect, etc.) when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed during the normal game state different from the vibration mode of the effect button 17 (4-second vibration) in the predetermined operation (for example, a deciding effect, etc.) when the variable display of the normal symbol is executed during the time-saving game state. By doing so, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect when the operation effect is executed, and to increase the interest in the game.

The action of the movable members (first movable member 73a, second movable member 73b, etc.) in the action presentation (e.g., a successful decision presentation, etc.) executed when the first special symbol is changed during the normal game state may be different from the action of the movable members (first movable member 73a, second movable member 73b) in the action presentation (e.g., a successful decision presentation, etc.) executed when the normal symbol is changed during the time-saving game state. In this way, the effect of the action presentation can be made different between when the first special symbol is changed and when the normal symbol is changed, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, the vibration mode of the effect button 17 in a predetermined operation effect (e.g., a deciding effect, etc.) when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed during the normal game state may be the same as the vibration mode of the effect button 17 in a predetermined operation effect (e.g., a deciding effect, etc.) when the variable display of the normal symbol is executed during the time-saving game state. This makes it easier for the player to grasp that there is a high possibility of a favorable result, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, the number of types of vibration effects of the effect button 17 that are executed when the variable display of the normal symbol is executed during the time-saving game state may be greater than the number of types of vibration effects of the effect button 17 that are executed when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed during the normal game state. In this way, it is possible to effectively improve the effect of the performance in the time-saving game state, which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, and to increase the interest of the player in the game.

In addition, the display mode of the icon in the icon change effect that suggests in advance the result of the variable display of the first special symbol during the normal game state may be a specific display mode that suggests that a specific effect (pseudo consecutive display, SP reach display) will be executed, while the display mode of the icon in the icon change effect that suggests in advance the result of the variable display of the normal symbol during the time-saving game state may not be a specific display mode that suggests that a specific effect (pseudo consecutive display, SP reach display) will be executed. In this way, the effect of the display in the normal game state can be effectively improved, making the game more interesting.

(Third time-saving production processing of the production control unit)
The third time-saving performance processing of the performance control unit 130m will be described with reference to Fig. 67. Fig. 67 is a flowchart of the third time-saving performance processing in the performance control unit 130m.

First, in step E750-1, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether or not the game is currently in a time-saving game state. If the game is not in a time-saving game state, the process proceeds to step E750-2. If the game is in a time-saving game state, the process ends with the third time-saving game effect not being executed (the RWM clear negation effect, which indicates that the RWM has not been cleared (is fixed), as described below, and the activation counter display, which indicates by counting down the number of changes until the game transitions to a special time-saving game state).

In step E750-2, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether or not a variable performance corresponding to the special symbol has started. If a variable performance corresponding to the special symbol has not started, the process proceeds to step E750-16. If a variable performance corresponding to the special symbol has started, the process proceeds to step E750-3, where it determines whether or not an RWM clear was performed when the power was turned on (whether a power-on command was received). If an RWM clear was performed, the process proceeds to step E750-13 assuming that an RWM clear negation performance will not be executed, and if an RWM clear was performed, the process proceeds to step E750-4.

In step E750-4, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether or not there is a history of a jackpot game being played from when the power was turned on until the present (whether or not a jackpot game was played on the same day). If there is a jackpot history, the process proceeds to step E750-13 assuming that the RWM clear negation effect will not be executed, and if there is no jackpot history, the process proceeds to step E750-5.

In step E750-5, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the number of fluctuations before transitioning to the third time-saving game state is within a predetermined number (here, 100 times). If it is not within the predetermined number, the process proceeds to step E750-16, assuming that the third time-saving effect (RWM clear negation effect, activation counter display) will not be executed, and if it is within the predetermined number, the process proceeds to step E750-6.

In step E750-6, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the number of times the variable presentation corresponding to the special symbol has changed since power was restored (received the power restoration command) is the first number (here, 50 times). If the number of times the variable presentation corresponding to the special symbol has changed is not the first number, the process proceeds to step E750-10. If the number of times the variable presentation corresponding to the special symbol has changed is the first number, in step E750-7, it determines by lottery (for example, at a rate of 1/2) whether to execute the RWM clear negation presentation and whether to display the activation counter.

The sub-CPU 130a determines in step E750-8 whether or not it has been decided to execute an RWM clear negation effect or an activated counter display. If it has been decided not to execute an RWM clear negation effect or an activated counter display, processing proceeds to step E750-16. If it has been decided to execute an RWM clear negation effect or an activated counter display, in step E750-9, a performance execution command according to the decision result is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c. This causes the performance execution command to be sent to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing is performed to execute the third time-saving performance (RWM clear negation effect and/or activated counter display).

In step E750-10, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the number of times the variable performance corresponding to the special symbol has changed since power was restored (received the power restoration command) is the second number (here, 100 times). If the number of times the variable performance corresponding to the special symbol has changed is not the second number, the process proceeds to step E750-16, and if the number of times the variable performance corresponding to the special symbol has changed is the second number, it determines whether or not to execute the RWM clear negation performance and whether or not to display the activation counter. Specifically, if the RWM clear negation performance has not been executed, it determines to execute the RWM clear negation performance, and if the display of the activation counter has not been executed, it determines to display the activation counter.

The sub-CPU 130a sets an effect execution command corresponding to the result of the determination in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c. This causes the effect execution command to be transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing is performed to execute the third time-saving effect (the RWM clear negation effect and/or the display of the activation counter).

In step E750-13, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the number of times the variable presentation corresponding to the special symbol has changed since the power was turned on is the second number (here, 100 times). If the number of times the variable presentation corresponding to the special symbol has changed is the second number, processing proceeds to step E750-15, and if the number of times is not the second number, processing proceeds to step E750-14, determining whether a transition has occurred from the time-saving play state to presentation mode A. If a transition has occurred from the time-saving play state to presentation mode A, processing proceeds to step E750-15, and if a transition has not occurred from the time-saving play state to presentation mode A, processing proceeds to step E750-16.

In step E750-15, the sub-CPU 130a sets the activation counter display command in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c. This causes the effect execution command to be sent to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing is performed to execute the third time-saving effect (here, displaying the activation counter).

In step E750-16, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the effect symbol is displayed as stopped (whether a symbol confirmation command for the special symbol is received). If the effect symbol is displayed as stopped, the process proceeds to step E750-17, and if the effect symbol is not displayed as stopped, the third time-saving effect process is terminated.

In step E750-17, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether or not the activation counter is currently being displayed. If the activation counter is not being displayed, the current third time-saving performance processing is terminated. If the activation counter is being displayed, in step E750-18, an activation counter subtraction command is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c. This causes the activation counter subtraction command to be transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing is performed to subtract the value of the activation counter. When this processing is completed, the current third time-saving performance processing is terminated.

In this way, during the execution of the variable effect a predetermined number of times from when the power is turned on (a certain number of times before the third time-saving game state is activated), it is possible to execute an RWM clear negation effect that suggests that the RWM clear (clearing the number of variable effects) was not executed (left as it is) when the power was turned on. Therefore, it is possible to predict the period until the third time-saving game state is generated by referring to the number of variable effects on the previous day, making it possible to increase the interest in the game.

In addition, multiple execution timings for the RWM clear denial effect are set, and once it is executed at one of the timings, it will not be executed again at any other timing. This increases the player's anticipation as to when the RWM clear denial effect will be executed, making it possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

In addition, it is possible to display an activation counter (activation countdown effect) that indicates the number of changes until the transition to the third time-saving game state by counting down. This allows the player to know when the third time-saving game state will occur, making it possible to increase the interest in the game. It is also possible to motivate the player to continue playing, making it possible to improve the operation of the gaming machine.

In addition, the activation counter is not displayed from the time the power is turned on (regardless of whether the RWM is cleared or not) until a predetermined number of variable effects (minimum 50 times, maximum 100 times) have been executed. As a result, it is not possible to determine whether the machine is a fixed machine (without RWM clearing) for a predetermined period of time from the time the power is turned on when the gaming establishment starts its business hours, which makes it possible to prevent inconveniences such as a decrease in operation after the gaming establishment starts its business hours. Furthermore, players can play with anticipation as to whether the machine is a fixed machine or not, which makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, the activation counter is not displayed during the time-saving play state. This prevents the player from being distracted by the third time-saving play state even when the time-saving play state is in progress, and increases the player's interest in the game.

In addition, even if the game changes from the time-saving game mode to the normal game mode, the activation counter is not displayed until the game changes to presentation mode A. This leaves the player with the impression that they have changed from the time-saving game mode to the normal game mode, making it possible to increase interest in the game. In addition, by displaying the activation counter after the game changes to presentation mode A, the player can start playing with a fresh mind, making it possible to increase interest in the game.

In addition, the decrement (countdown) of the activation counter is performed when the performance pattern stops, when it is less likely that a preview performance or a look-ahead performance will be executed (started) than when the variable performance starts, rather than when the variable performance starts, making it easier for the player to recognize the decrement of the activation counter, which makes the game more interesting.

In addition, if the power supply that was stopped during the normal game state after the time-saving game state has ended is resumed and the game control state is restored to the state before the power outage occurred, it is possible to execute an RWM clear negation effect (specific effect) related to whether or not the RWM has been cleared thereafter. On the other hand, if the power supply that was stopped during the normal game state after the third time-saving game state has ended is resumed and the game control state is restored to the state before the power outage occurred, execution of an RWM clear negation effect (specific effect) related to whether or not the RWM has been cleared thereafter is restricted. Therefore, depending on whether or not an RWM clear negation effect is displayed, useful information such as the end of the third time-saving game state and whether or not the RWM has been cleared can be notified to the player, making the game more interesting.

In addition, if the power supply that occurred when controlled to any of the presentation modes (presentation modes A to D, countdown mode) in the normal game state is resumed and the game control state is restored to the state before the power outage occurred, the game will be controlled to presentation mode A, which is the initial presentation mode. However, if the power supply that was stopped when controlled to a presentation mode other than presentation mode A after the end of the time-saving game state (normal game state) is resumed and the game control state is restored to the state before the power outage occurred and the game is controlled to presentation mode A, it is possible to execute an RWM clear negation presentation (specific presentation) related to whether or not the RWM has been cleared. On the other hand, if the power supply that was stopped when controlled to a presentation mode other than presentation mode A after the end of the third time-saving game state (normal game state) is resumed and the game control state is restored to the state before the power outage occurred and the game is controlled to presentation mode A, the execution of an RWM clear negation presentation (specific presentation) related to whether or not the RWM has been cleared is restricted. Therefore, depending on whether or not there is an RWM clear negation effect, it is possible to inform the player of useful information such as the end of the third time-saving game state and whether or not the RWM has been cleared, which can increase the player's interest in the game.

In addition, instead of decrementing (counting down) the activation counter when the performance pattern stops, the activation counter may be decremented (counted down) when the variable performance begins. In this case, the activation counter may be decremented by the time the performance pattern 70a starts to vary and completely transitions to high-speed variation (becomes constant speed), or the performance pattern may be made to perform a pre-variation action such as floating up before scrolling (varies) during the variable performance, and the activation counter may be decremented by the time the pre-variation action ends.

In addition, instead of executing an RWM clear negation effect that suggests that an RWM clear (clearing the number of fluctuations) has not been performed (it remains unchanged), a setting change suggestion effect may be executed that suggests that the setting value has been changed (a setting change involving an RWM clear has been performed), or both an RWM clear negation effect and a setting change suggestion effect may be executed by lottery. However, it is advisable to restrict both an RWM clear negation effect and a setting change suggestion effect from being executed in the same fluctuation effect.

(Example of a presentation when the machine is in a waiting state during normal play)
An example of the performance when the player is in a waiting state during a normal game state will be described with reference to Fig. 68. In this embodiment, the first special symbol TZ1 corresponding to the first special symbol, the second special symbol TZ2 corresponding to the second special symbol, and the third special symbol TZ3 corresponding to the normal symbol are set as the special symbols TZ displayed on the first image display device 70.

As shown in FIG. 68(a), when the time for the first special pattern to change, which is a loss, has elapsed, the performance pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are displayed stopped at the loss result ("134"), and the icon TI corresponding to the first special pattern that was displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68(b), the machine enters a waiting state as the stop time of the first special symbol has elapsed, and when a predetermined time (e.g., 5 seconds) has elapsed from that point, an adjustment guide image CA is displayed as one of the waiting state effects, using a cross key image resembling the cross key 19 and text images to guide the user in adjusting the volume and light intensity by operating the cross key 19.

After that, when the game ball enters the normal symbol gate 44 and the variable display of the normal symbol starts, as shown in FIG. 68(c), the variable display involving the variable display of the performance symbol 70a is not executed, and the variable display (game display) in which the third special symbol TZ3 is variable is started. At this time, since the variable display of the normal symbol has started in the normal game state, the customer waiting state is maintained and the display of the adjustment guide image CA continues.

Then, when 30 seconds have elapsed since the start of the waiting state, as shown in FIG. 68(d), regardless of whether the variable display of the normal pattern is being executed or not, a waiting demo effect is started as one of the effects during the waiting state. Specifically, a waiting demo image is displayed on the first image display device 70, and a help time guide image AN is displayed, indicating that the gaming machine is equipped with "help time," a coined term that indicates the third time-saving gaming state.

In the time-saving game state, while the first special symbol is being displayed, the effect of the first special symbol TZ1 is executed without the effect of the effect of the effect symbol 70a being displayed, and while the second special symbol is being displayed or the normal symbol is being displayed, the effect of the effect of the effect symbol 70a being displayed is executed, and since the effect of the second special symbol or the normal symbol is not being displayed, the state is one in which the player is waiting for customers. Even if the effect of the first special symbol is displayed during the waiting for customers state, the waiting for customers state is maintained and the waiting for customers effects (display of the adjustment guide image CA, the waiting for customers demo effect, the help time guide image AN, etc.) are executed.

In this way, in the normal game state (presentation modes A to D), while the normal pattern variable display is being executed, it is possible to execute the waiting for customers presentation (display of adjustment guide image CA, waiting for customers demo presentation, display of help time guide image AN, etc.), whereas in the time-saving game state, while the normal pattern variable display is being executed, the execution of the waiting for customers presentation is restricted. Therefore, it is possible to execute the waiting for customers presentation at an appropriate timing that matches the presentation situation on the first image display device 70, and it is possible to exert the intended appealing effect on the player.

In addition, in the normal game state (presentation modes A to D), the execution of the waiting for customers presentation (display of adjustment guide image CA, waiting for customers demo presentation, display of help time guide image AN, etc.) is restricted when the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed, whereas in the time-saving game state, the waiting for customers presentation can be executed when the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed. Therefore, the waiting for customers presentation can be executed at an appropriate timing that matches the presentation situation on the first image display device 70, making it possible to achieve the intended appealing effect on the player.

In addition, in the normal game state (presentation modes A to D), even when a waiting-for-customer presentation is being executed, it is possible to execute a variable presentation accompanied by a variable display of the third special pattern TZ3 corresponding to the normal pattern without interrupting the waiting-for-customer presentation (display of the adjustment guide image CA, the waiting-for-customer demo presentation, the help time guide image AN, etc.). Therefore, the player does not need to be aware of the variable display of the normal pattern, which is not considered important in the normal game state, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

(Example of a performance when a pre-reading performance is executed during normal game play)
An example of a performance when a look-ahead performance is executed during a normal game state will be described with reference to Fig. 69. In this example, it is assumed that an icon change performance and a look-ahead zone performance are executed.

As shown in FIG. 69(a), when a game ball enters the first starting hole 45 during the changing display of the first special symbol, which is a losing symbol (execution of the changing performance), and the first reserved memory increases from "1" to "2", a winning command (first reserved number designation command, first special symbol pre-reading designation command) is sent from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130, the number in the first reserved number display area 70E increases from "1" to "2", and a white icon (reserved icon HI), which is the subject of a preview performance (here, icon change performance, pre-reading zone performance), is additionally displayed in the second display section 70B2 of the first reserved icon display area 70B.

Next, after the change time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 69(b), the performance symbol 70a and the first special symbol TZ1 are displayed stopped at a losing number ("814"), and the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

After that, when the stop time has elapsed and the changing display (changing performance) of the first special pattern, which is a losing combination, begins, the changing display of the performance pattern 70a and the first special pattern TZ1 begins, the number in the first reserved number display area 70E decreases from "2" to "1", and the two reserved icons HI displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B shift toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI, as shown in FIG. 69(c).

At this time, the icon change effect starts, and the pending icon shifted and displayed on the first display unit 70B1 changes to a blue icon (special icon). In addition, the look-ahead zone effect starts, and the background image changes to the look-ahead zone background, and the blue zone image ZG is displayed.

Next, after the change time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 69(d), the performance symbol 70a and the first special symbol TZ1 are displayed stopped at a losing number ("531"), and the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

After that, when the stop time has elapsed and the variable display (variable performance) of the first special symbol, which is the jackpot, begins, as shown in FIG. 69(e), the variable display of the performance symbol 70a and the first special symbol TZ1 begins, the first reserved number display area 70E decreases from "1" to "0", and one reserved icon HI displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B shifts toward the icon display area 70C and is displayed as the icon TI, changing into a red icon (special icon).

At this time, when the game ball enters the normal symbol gate 44 and the variable display of the normal symbol starts, a variable display (game display) starts in which the third special symbol TZ3 is variable displayed without the variable display of the display symbol 70a, in parallel with the variable display corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol (variable display in which the display symbol 70a and the first special symbol TZ1 are variable displayed).

After that, when a predetermined time has passed, as shown in FIG. 69(f), the left and right performance symbols 70a temporarily stop in a reach-forming state, and a normal reach performance is executed. Furthermore, when a predetermined time has passed, an advanced performance is executed, and as shown in FIG. 69(g), an SPSP reach performance is started in which friendly character C2 and enemy character C3 battle, and the first reserved icon display area 70B and the icon display area 70C are hidden (erased), and the look-ahead zone performance is interrupted. Furthermore, when the normal symbol fluctuation time has passed and the losing normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the third special symbol TZ3 is stopped and displayed with a losing result ("243").

Then, when the SPSP reach effect reaches its final stage (the timing for executing the decisive effect to determine whether it is a miss or not), the decisive success effect starts and an effect is performed in which friendly character C2 launches a final attack on enemy character C3. After that, as shown in FIG. 69(h), the first movable member 73a moves from the standby position to the effect position, an effect image SED is displayed indicating that the result is favorable to the player, and a "cuin cuin" notification sound is output from the audio output device 9 (in this case, announcing that a jackpot has been obtained).

Next, when the first movable member 73a returns from the performance position to the standby position and the successful decision performance ends, as shown in FIG. 69(i), the performance pattern 70a temporarily stops at the special result ("555") that is common to both the small win and the big win, the look-ahead zone performance resumes, and the first pending icon display area 70B and the icon display area 70C are displayed again.

After that, when the temporary stop time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 69(j), the performance pattern 70a stops and displays a special number ("555") that is common to both small wins and big wins, and the special pattern TZ stops and displays a winning number ("555") that does not include the "V" that indicates a small win. In addition, as the look-ahead zone performance ends, the icon TI is erased and the icon change performance ends.

On the other hand, in the case of a variable display of the first special symbol, which is a miss, when the SPSP reach effect reaches its final stage (the timing for executing the deciding effect to determine whether it is a miss or not), a decision failure effect is started and an effect is performed in which friendly character C2 loses to enemy character C3. After that, a screen with the text "Defeat" is displayed to notify the user of a miss, and when the decision failure effect ends, the effect symbol 70a and special symbol TZ are displayed stopped at the reach miss result (for example, "565").

When a game ball enters the normal map gate 44 and the normal map reserved memory (F) increases, a winning command (normal map reserved number designation command, normal map pre-read designation command) is sent from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130. However, when a game ball enters the normal map gate 44 during normal play and the normal map reserved memory (F) increases, the number in the normal map reserved number display area 70G is updated and increased, but since no additional normal map reserved icons are displayed, the normal map reserved icon change performance is not executed.

In addition, when a game ball enters the second start hole 47 and the second reserved memory (U2) increases, a winning command (second reserved number designation command, second special chart pre-reading designation command) is sent from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130. However, when a game ball enters the second start hole 47 during normal play and the second reserved memory (U2) increases, the numbers in the second reserved number display area 70F are updated and incremented, but no additional reserved icons are displayed, so the reserved icon change performance is not executed.

In this way, when a jackpot occurs during normal gameplay, it is possible to execute look-ahead effects (icon change effects, look-ahead zone effects, etc.). This effectively heightens the player's sense of anticipation when a jackpot game is executed, making it possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

In addition, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 45 during the normal game state (first game state) (the first acquisition condition is met), the first performance display (for example, a pre-reading performance such as an icon change performance) in response to the first command (look-ahead designation command) and the second performance display (display of the reserved number in the reserved icon display area or the reserved number display area) in response to the second command (reserved number designation command) are executed, while when a game ball enters the normal map gate 44 during the normal game state (first game state) (the second acquisition condition is met), the execution of the first performance display (for example, a pre-reading performance such as an icon change performance) in response to the first command (look-ahead designation command) is restricted, but the second performance display (display of the reserved number in the reserved icon display area or the reserved number display area) in response to the second command (reserved number designation command) is executed. Therefore, it is possible to make the performance different when the first acquisition condition is met in the normal game state and when the second acquisition condition is met, which makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, in the normal game state (normal presentation modes A to D), when a variable presentation is being executed in which the presentation pattern 70a and the first special pattern TZ1 are displayed in a variable manner in response to the first special pattern, it is possible to execute a variable presentation in which the third special pattern TZ3 is displayed in a variable manner in response to the normal pattern. Therefore, in the normal game state (normal presentation modes A to D), the player can recognize each of the variable displays of the multiple patterns on the image display device, which can increase the interest of the game.

In addition, in the normal game state (normal presentation modes A to D), the number of types of presentation patterns 70a that are displayed in a variable manner in response to the first special pattern (1 to 9 + 11 types of pseudo consecutive patterns that are temporarily stopped when a pseudo consecutive presentation is executed, and jackpot suggestion patterns that are (temporarily) stopped to suggest the type of jackpot game when a jackpot occurs) is greater than the number of types of third special patterns TZ3 that are displayed in a variable manner in response to normal patterns (9 types from 1 to 9). This makes it possible to improve the presentation effect in the normal game state (normal presentation modes A to D), and increase the interest in the game.

In addition, in the normal game state (normal presentation modes A to D), the presentation symbol 70a is hidden during specific presentations such as development presentations, key presentations, and big win presentations, while the various special symbols (first special symbol TZ1, second special symbol TZ2, and third special symbol TZ3) are always displayed and are not hidden during specific presentations such as development presentations, key presentations, and big win presentations. Therefore, even if the presentation symbol 70a is hidden, the progress of the game (whether or not a variable display is occurring, etc.) can be understood from the special symbols, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, in the normal game state (normal presentation modes A to D), when the presentation pattern 70a, which is displayed in a variable manner in response to the first special pattern, is displayed with a result suggesting a favorable outcome for the player (a jackpot result), it is possible to display the first special pattern TZ1, which is displayed in a variable manner in response to the first special pattern, with a result suggesting a favorable outcome for the player (a jackpot result). Therefore, whether the player is looking at the presentation pattern 70a or the first special pattern TZ1, the player can understand that a favorable outcome has been achieved, which makes it possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in the normal game state (normal presentation modes A to D), in the variable presentation in which the presentation pattern 70a and the first special pattern TZ1 are displayed in response to the jackpot variable presentation of the first special pattern, a specific notification presentation (successful decision presentation) in which a specific light-emitting part (first movable member 73a) emits light in a specific light color (rainbow) can be executed, while in the variable presentation in which the third special pattern TZ3 is displayed in response to the winning variable presentation of the normal pattern, a specific notification presentation (successful decision presentation) in which a specific light-emitting part (first movable member 73a) emits light in a specific light color (rainbow) is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the presentation effect in the normal game state in which the variable presentation of the first special pattern is important, and it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

In addition, in the normal game state (normal presentation modes A to D), in the variable presentation in which the presentation pattern 70a and the first special pattern TZ1 are displayed in a variable manner in response to the jackpot variable display of the first special pattern, a specific notification presentation (successful decision presentation) in which a specific movable member (first movable member 73a) operates in a specific operating manner can be executed, whereas in the variable presentation in which the third special pattern TZ3 is displayed in a variable manner in response to the winning variable display of the normal pattern, a specific notification presentation (successful decision presentation) in which a specific movable member (first movable member 73a) operates in a specific operating manner is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the presentation effect in the normal game state in which the variable display of the first special pattern is important, and it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

In addition, in the normal game state (normal presentation modes A to D), the presentation in which the presentation pattern 70a and the first special pattern TZ1 are displayed in response to the jackpot display of the first special pattern can execute a specific notification presentation (successful decision presentation) in which a specific presentation sound (a "queen, queen, queen" sound that suggests a favorable result to the player) is output, whereas the presentation in which the third special pattern TZ3 is displayed in response to the winning display of the normal pattern does not execute a specific notification presentation (successful decision presentation) in which a specific presentation sound (a "queen, queen, queen" sound that suggests a favorable result to the player) is output. Therefore, the presentation effect in the normal game state, in which the display of the first special pattern in response to the winning display of the normal pattern is important, can be improved, and the interest in the game can be increased.

In addition, in the normal game state (normal presentation modes A to D), the presentation in which the presentation pattern 70a and the first special pattern TZ1 are displayed in response to the jackpot display of the first special pattern can execute a specific notification presentation (successful decision presentation) in which a specific presentation image (effect image SED suggesting a favorable result to the player) is displayed on the image display device, whereas the presentation in which the third special pattern TZ3 is displayed in response to the winning display of the normal pattern does not execute a specific notification presentation (successful decision presentation) in which a specific presentation image (effect image SED suggesting a favorable result to the player) is displayed. Therefore, the presentation effect in the normal game state, in which the display of the first special pattern is important, can be improved, and the interest in the game can be increased.

In addition, in the normal game state (normal presentation modes A to D), when a variation presentation in which the second special symbol TZ2 is displayed in response to a jackpot variation presentation of the second special symbol is performed, a special presentation (BONUS approaching display) that suggests the result of the variation presentation is executed, whereas when a variation presentation in which the presentation symbol 70a and the first special symbol TZ1 are displayed in response to a jackpot variation presentation of the first special symbol, or a variation presentation in which the third special symbol TZ3 is displayed in response to a winning variation presentation of the normal symbol is executed, a special presentation (BONUS approaching display) that suggests the result of the variation presentation is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the presentation effect when the second special symbol is displayed in the normal game state, and to increase the interest of the game.

(Example of when the pre-reading effect ends midway during normal play)
70 is a diagram showing an example of a performance when the look-ahead performance ends midway during a normal game state. In this example, the icon change performance and the look-ahead zone performance are executed as a result of a look-ahead determination based on winning at the first starting hole 45.

As shown in FIG. 70(a), when the variable display (variable performance) of the first special pattern starts, the variable display of the performance pattern 70a and the first special pattern TZ1 starts, the number in the first reserved number display area 70E decreases from "2" to "1", and the two reserved icons HI displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B shift toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI.

At this time, the icon change effect starts, and the pending icon shifted and displayed on the first display unit 70B1 changes to a blue icon (special icon). In addition, the look-ahead zone effect starts, and the background image changes to the look-ahead zone background, and the blue zone image ZG is displayed.

Next, when a game ball enters the second starting hole 47 and the second reserved memory increases from "0" to "1", the number in the second reserved number display area 70F increases from "0" to "1", and after the change time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 70(b), the performance pattern 70a and the first special pattern TZ1 stop displaying a losing result ("531"), and the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

After that, when the stop time has elapsed and the variable display (variable performance) of the second special symbol, which is a miss, begins, as shown in FIG. 70(c), the look-ahead zone performance ends midway and the background image returns to the normal background image, and the icon change performance ends midway and the blue icon returns to the normal icon. Also, the variable display of performance symbol 70a and second special symbol TZ2 begins, and the second reserved number display area 70F decreases from "1" to "0". Note that since the variable display (variable performance) of the second special symbol has begun in the normal game mode, the icon is not displayed.

Next, after the variation time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 70(d), the performance symbol 70a and the second special symbol TZ2 are displayed stopped at a losing number ("632"), and the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

Then, when the stop time has elapsed and the variable display (variable performance) of the first special pattern, which indicates a jackpot, begins, the variable display of the performance pattern 70a and the first special pattern TZ1 begins, the first reserved number display area 70E decreases from "1" to "0", and one reserved icon HI displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B shifts toward the icon display area 70C and is displayed as the icon TI, as shown in FIG. 70(e).

After that, when a predetermined time has passed, as shown in FIG. 70(f), the left and right performance symbols 70a temporarily stop in a reach-forming state, and a normal reach performance is executed. At this time, when a game ball enters the second starting hole 47 and the variable display of the second special symbol starts, a variable display (game performance) starts in which the second special symbol TZ2 is variable displayed without the variable display of the performance symbol 70a, in parallel with the variable display corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol (variable display in which the performance symbol 70a and the first special symbol TZ1 are variable displayed).

Furthermore, when a predetermined time has elapsed, an extension effect is executed, and as shown in FIG. 70(g), an SPSP reach effect is started in which friendly character C2 and enemy character C3 engage in a battle, and the first reserved icon display area 70B and the icon display area 70C are hidden (erased). In addition, when the variation time of the second special symbol has elapsed and the losing special symbol is stopped and displayed, the second special symbol TZ3 is stopped and displayed with the losing result ("462").

Then, when the SPSP reach effect reaches its final stage (the timing for executing the decisive effect to determine whether it is a miss or not), the decisive success effect starts and an effect is performed in which friendly character C2 launches a final attack on enemy character C3. After that, as shown in FIG. 70(h), the first movable member 73a moves from the standby position to the effect position, an effect image SED is displayed indicating that the result is favorable to the player, and a "cuin cuin" notification sound is output from the audio output device 9 (in this case, announcing that a jackpot has been obtained).

Next, when the first movable member 73a returns from the performance position to the standby position and the successful play performance ends, as shown in FIG. 70(i), the performance pattern 70a temporarily stops at the winning number ("555"), the look-ahead zone performance resumes, and the first pending icon display area 70B and the icon display area 70C are displayed again.

After that, when the temporary stop time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 70(j), the performance symbol 70a stops at the winning number ("555"), and the special symbol TZ stops at the winning number ("555") that does not include the "V" that indicates a small win. In addition, when the look-ahead zone performance ends, the icon TI is erased and the icon change performance ends.

On the other hand, in the case of a variable display of the first special symbol, which is a miss, when the SPSP reach effect reaches its final stage (the timing for executing the deciding effect to determine whether it is a miss or not), a decision failure effect is started and an effect is performed in which friendly character C2 loses to enemy character C3. After that, a screen with the text "Defeat" is displayed to notify the user of a miss, and when the decision failure effect ends, the effect symbol 70a and special symbol TZ are displayed stopped at the reach miss result (for example, "565").

In this way, when a game ball enters the second start hole 47 during normal game play while a look-ahead effect (icon change effect, look-ahead zone effect, etc.) that anticipates the execution of a jackpot game across one or more variable effects that began based on a winning entry into the first start hole 45 is being executed and the variable display of the second special symbol begins, the look-ahead effect is terminated midway. This makes it possible to avoid the inconvenience of not knowing which variable display the look-ahead effect is predicting, making the game more interesting.

In addition, in the normal game state (normal presentation modes A to D), when a variable presentation is being executed in which the presentation pattern 70a and the first special pattern TZ1 are displayed in a variable manner in response to the first special pattern, it is possible to execute a variable presentation in which the second special pattern TZ2 is displayed in a variable manner in response to the second special pattern. Therefore, in the normal game state (presentation modes A to D), the player can recognize each of the variable displays of the multiple patterns on the image display device, which can increase the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in the normal game state (normal presentation modes A to D), the number of types of presentation patterns 70a that are displayed in a variable manner in response to the first special pattern (1 to 9 + 11 types of pseudo consecutive patterns that are temporarily stopped when a pseudo consecutive presentation is executed, and jackpot suggestion patterns that are (temporarily) stopped to suggest the type of jackpot game when a jackpot occurs) is greater than the number of types of second special patterns TZ2 that are displayed in a variable manner in response to the second special pattern (9 types from 1 to 9). This makes it possible to improve the presentation effect in the normal game state (presentation modes A to D), and increase the interest in the game.

In addition, in the normal game state (normal presentation modes A to D), the presentation symbol 70a is hidden during specific presentations such as development presentations, key presentations, and big win presentations, while the various special symbols (first special symbol TZ1, second special symbol TZ2, and third special symbol TZ3) are always displayed and are not hidden during specific presentations such as development presentations, key presentations, and big win presentations. Therefore, even if the presentation symbol 70a is hidden, the progress of the game (whether or not a variable display is occurring, etc.) can be understood from the special symbols, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, when the variable display of the second special pattern starts during the execution of the look-ahead performance that started based on winning at the first starting port 45, the look-ahead performance may be terminated midway when a winning is made at the second starting port 47, or the look-ahead performance may be terminated midway when the variable display of the first special pattern that was being executed at the time of the winning at the second starting port 47 has elapsed and the first special pattern has stopped being displayed, or the look-ahead performance may be terminated when the stop time of the first special pattern has elapsed.

(Example of a performance when a variable performance is executed after transitioning to the first time-saving gaming state)
Using Figures 71 and 72, we will explain an example of a presentation when a variable presentation is executed after transitioning to the first time-saving game state.

When the ending of the second jackpot game starts, as shown in FIG. 71(a), a time-saving entry effect is executed to indicate that the game will enter a time-saving game state, and a warning notification is executed to draw the player's attention. Specifically, a forget-to-remove warning image TG is displayed from the lending device that communicates with the gaming machine 1 to lend game balls, to warn the player not to forget to remove the card (storage medium) that can identify the remaining value of the valuable item. At this time, a variable display of the normal pattern is executed, and a variable display of the third special pattern TZ3 is executed without a variable display of the performance pattern 70a.

After that, when the display period of the forget-to-remove warning image TG has elapsed, the addiction warning image NG is displayed to alert the player not to become too addicted to the game, as shown in FIG. 71(b). Then, when the ending time of the second big win game has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 71(c), 50 times is set as the remaining number of times for the time-saving normal figure (G), the first reserved memory (U1) is "1" and the second reserved memory (U2) is "0", and the first time-saving game state starts with the performance pattern 70a, which is the winning number displayed in a stopped state before the previous big win game, the background image during time-saving (mode A), the first right-hit image MG1, which prompts the player to launch the game ball to the right of the game area 5a, and the remaining number image KG, which indicates the remaining number of times for the time-saving normal figure (G), are displayed as "50 remaining". Note that the remaining number of times for the time-saving special figure (J) and the remaining number of times for the time-saving small win (Z) are not displayed during the time-saving game state.

As shown in FIG. 71(d), when the first special symbol starts to change (changing performance), the first special symbol TZ1 starts to change without the performance symbol 70a changing, and the number in the first reserved number display area 70E decreases from "1" to "0". However, because the first special symbol is being changed (changing performance), the icon is not displayed in the icon display area 70C, and the remaining number image KG, which indicates the remaining number of times for the time-saving normal symbol remaining number (G), maintains the "50 times remaining" state.

At this time, when four game balls enter the normal symbol gate 44 and the normal symbol reservation memory (F) increases from "0" to "4", the number in the normal symbol reservation number display area 70G increases from "0" to "4", and four white icons (reserved icons HI) are additionally displayed in the normal symbol reservation icon display area 70D. Also, when the normal symbol fluctuation time has elapsed and the normal symbol stops and displays as a losing normal symbol, the third special symbol TZ3 stops and displays as a losing number ("265").

When the normal symbol starts to change and display a missing symbol, as shown in FIG. 71(e), the display of the effect symbol 70a and the third special symbol TZ3 starts to change and the number in the normal symbol reservation number display area 70G decreases from "4" to "3", and the four reservation icons HI displayed in the normal symbol reservation icon display area 70D shift toward the icon display area 70C, with one icon being displayed as the icon TI. Also, the remaining number of times image KG changes from "50 times remaining" to "49 times remaining". Also, when the first special symbol stops and displays a missing special symbol after the time for changing the first special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol TZ1 stops and displays a missing number ("513").

After that, when one game ball enters the normal map gate 44 and the normal map reserve memory (F) increases from "3" to "4", the number in the normal map reserve number display area 70G increases from "3" to "4", and one white icon (reserve icon) is additionally displayed in the normal map reserve icon display area 70D.

In addition, when the normal symbol variation time has elapsed and the losing normal symbol is stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG. 71(f), the performance symbol 70a and the third special symbol TZ3 are stopped and displayed with a losing result ("413"). In addition, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

Next, when the normal symbol miss variation display starts, as shown in FIG. 71(g), the display of the effect symbol 70a and the third special symbol TZ3 variations starts, the number in the normal symbol hold number display area 70G decreases from "4" to "3", and the four hold icons HI displayed in the normal symbol hold icon display area 70D shift toward the icon display area 70C, with one icon being displayed as the icon TI. Also, the remaining number of times image KG changes from "49 times remaining" to "48 times remaining".

Then, when the normal symbol variation time has elapsed and the losing normal symbol is stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG. 71(h), the effect symbol 70a and the third special symbol TZ3 are stopped and displayed with a losing result ("962"). Also, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased. Furthermore, when one game ball enters the normal symbol gate 44 and the normal symbol reservation memory (F) increases from "3" to "4", the number in the normal symbol reservation number display area 70G increases from "3" to "4", and one white icon (reserved icon) that is the target of the pre-reading performance is additionally displayed in the normal symbol reservation icon display area 70D. At this time, a light-emitting performance is performed when a prize is won, and the top lamp 10b emits white light and the advance sound effect "Jowat" is output.

Next, when the normal symbol miss variation display starts, as shown in FIG. 71(i), the display of the effect symbol 70a and the third special symbol TZ3 variations starts, the number in the normal symbol hold number display area 70G decreases from "4" to "3", and the four hold icons HI displayed in the normal symbol hold icon display area 70D shift toward the icon display area 70C, with one icon being displayed as the icon TI. Also, the remaining number of times image KG changes from "48 times remaining" to "47 times remaining".

When the normal symbol variation time has elapsed and the losing normal symbol is stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG. 71(j), the performance symbol 70a and the third special symbol TZ3 are stopped and displayed with the losing number ("962"). Also, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

After that, when the normal symbol miss variation display starts, as shown in FIG. 72(k), the variation display of the performance symbol 70a and the third special symbol TZ3 starts, the number in the normal symbol reserve number display area 70G decreases from "3" to "2", the three reserve icons HI displayed in the normal symbol reserve icon display area 70D shift toward the icon display area 70C, one is displayed as the icon TI, the reserve icon change display is executed, and the white icon that was the target of the look-ahead display changes to a blue icon. Also, the remaining number of times image KG changes from "47 times remaining" to "46 times remaining".

Next, when the normal symbol variation time has elapsed and the losing normal symbol is stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG. 71(l), the performance symbol 70a and the third special symbol TZ3 are stopped and displayed with a losing result ("192"). Also, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased. Furthermore, when one game ball enters the normal symbol gate 44 and the normal symbol reserved memory (F) increases from "2" to "3", the number in the normal symbol reserved number display area 70G increases from "2" to "3", and one white icon (reserved icon) is additionally displayed in the normal symbol reserved icon display area 70D.

Then, when the normal symbol miss variation display starts, as shown in FIG. 72(m), the display of the effect symbol 70a and the third special symbol TZ3 variations starts, the number in the normal symbol hold number display area 70G decreases from "3" to "2", and the three hold icons HI displayed in the normal symbol hold icon display area 70D shift toward the icon display area 70C, with one icon being displayed as the icon TI. Also, the remaining number of times image KG changes from "46 times remaining" to "45 times remaining".

After that, when the normal symbol variation time has elapsed and the losing normal symbol is stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG. 72(n), the performance symbol 70a and the third special symbol TZ3 are stopped and displayed with a losing result ("561"). Also, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased. Furthermore, when two game balls enter the normal symbol gate 44 and the normal symbol reserved memory (F) increases from "2" to "4", the number in the normal symbol reserved number display area 70G increases from "2" to "4", and three white icons (reserved icons) are additionally displayed in the normal symbol reserved icon display area 70D.

Next, when the normal symbol winning variation display starts, as shown in FIG. 72(o), the variation display of the performance symbol 70a and the third special symbol TZ3 starts, the number in the normal symbol reserved number display area 70G decreases from "4" to "3", the four reserved icons HI displayed in the normal symbol reserved icon display area 70D shift toward the icon display area 70C, one is displayed as the icon TI, the icon change display is executed, and the blue icon that was the target of the look-ahead display changes to a red icon. Also, the remaining number of times image KG changes from "45 times remaining" to "44 times remaining".

After a predetermined time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 72(p), a chance effect is started in which the effect symbol 70a is hidden. Specifically, a text image saying "Attack Chance" is displayed to suggest (inform) the player that there is a possibility of a favorable result. After that, when the timing for executing the deciding effect in the chance effect arrives, a valid suggestion effect is displayed to suggest that there is a possibility of a valid period occurring.

After that, when the valid suggestion effect ends, as shown in FIG. 72 (q), the valid period of the deciding effect occurs and a promotion effect is executed to encourage the operation of the effect button 17. Specifically, a button image imitating the effect button 17 is displayed, along with a gauge image showing the remaining time of the valid period. In addition, a text image saying "Press the button!" is displayed, along with the sound "Press the button" being output.

Next, when the effect button 17 is operated or the valid period has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 72(r), the successful decision effect is initiated and the first movable member 73a moves from the standby position to the effect position, an effect image SED is displayed indicating that the result is favorable to the player, and a "queen, queen" notification sound is output from the audio output device 9 (here, the player is notified that the result is favorable to the player (the auxiliary game of opening the second starting hole 47 in a long opening pattern will be executed)).

Next, when the first movable member 73a returns from the presentation position to the standby position and the successful decision presentation ends, as shown in FIG. 72(s), the three presentation symbols 70a line up and temporarily stop at the winning number ("555"), which indicates that the result is favorable to the player, and the icon display area 70C and the regular symbol reserve icon display area 70D are redisplayed. Also, when the normal symbol fluctuation time has elapsed and the winning regular symbol is stopped and displayed, the presentation symbol 70a and the third special symbol TZ3 are stopped and displayed at the winning number ("555"), as shown in FIG. 72(t). Also, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

In this way, when a time-saving game state is generated, the time-saving entry effect is executed during the ending of the jackpot game, and a right-hit notification is given before the time-saving game state is generated (during the jackpot game). This makes it possible to inform the player that a time-saving game state is occurring, and prevents the player from suffering a disadvantage by hitting left when the time-saving game state is generated, making the game more interesting.

In addition, when a time-saving game state is triggered, a warning effect is performed to alert the player (display of a forget-to-recover warning image TG, display of an addiction warning image NG) before an effect corresponding to the time-saving state is performed (change of background image, display of remaining number image KG, right-hit notification, variable effect according to the time-saving state, output of background music corresponding to the effect mode, etc.). This makes it possible to effectively alert the player.

In addition, during the time-saving play state, it is possible to execute a variable effect in which the display of the effect pattern 70a and the third special pattern TZ3 change in response to the display of the normal pattern. However, if the normal pattern is being displayed while the time-saving play state is started, the remaining number of times the time-saving normal pattern is played (G) is not subtracted, so a variable effect is executed in which the display of the third special pattern TZ3 changes without the display of the effect pattern 70a. This makes it possible to prevent the player from feeling like they have lost money, and to increase the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, when the first normal symbol variable display that will subtract the remaining number of time-saving normal symbols (G) is executed after the time-saving game state has started, it is possible to execute a variable display in which the display symbol 70a and the third special symbol TZ3 are displayed in a variable manner. This makes it possible to prevent the player from feeling like they have lost money, and to increase the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, during time-saving play mode, a reserved icon (reserved information) corresponding to the reserved regular symbol memory (F) is displayed. This makes it easier for the player to grasp the number of reserved regular symbol memories related to the variable display of regular symbols, which is one of the conditions for ending the time-saving play mode, and makes the game more interesting.

In addition, in the time-saving game mode, the icon (execution information) corresponding to the normal pattern determination information where the normal pattern variable display has started is displayed (the reserved icon is changed to the icon). This makes it easier to understand that the normal pattern variable display is being executed, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, as a pre-reading effect that suggests the outcome of the normal symbol display corresponding to the normal symbol reserved memory (F), it is possible to execute an icon change effect that suggests that the outcome will be favorable to the player by changing the display mode of the normal symbol reserved icon. This makes it easier for the player to expect that the normal symbol display will result in an advantageous outcome, making the game more interesting.

In addition, in the time-saving play state (time-saving presentation modes A to C), when a variable presentation is being executed in which the presentation pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ3 are displayed in a variable manner in response to a normal pattern, it is possible to execute a variable presentation in which the first special pattern TZ1 is displayed in a variable manner in response to a first special pattern. Therefore, in the time-saving play state (time-saving presentation modes A to C), the player can recognize each of the variable displays of the multiple patterns on the image display device, which can increase the interest of the game.

In addition, in the time-saving game state (time-saving presentation modes A to C), the number of types of presentation patterns 70a that are displayed in a variable manner in response to normal patterns (1 to 9 + 10 types of winning suggestion patterns that are (provisionally) stopped to suggest the type of winning when a winning occurs) is greater than the number of types of first special patterns TZ1 that are displayed in a variable manner in response to the first special pattern (9 types from 1 to 9). Therefore, the presentation effect in the time-saving game state (time-saving presentation modes A to C) can be improved, making it possible to increase the interest in the game.

In addition, in the time-saving game state (time-saving presentation modes A to C), the presentation symbol 70a is hidden during specific presentations such as development presentations, deciding presentations, and big win presentations, while the various special symbols (first special symbol TZ1, second special symbol TZ2, third special symbol TZ3) are always displayed and are not hidden during specific presentations such as development presentations, deciding presentations, and big win presentations. Therefore, even if the presentation symbol 70a is hidden, the progress of the game (whether or not a variable display is occurring, etc.) can be understood from the special symbols, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, in the time-saving game state (time-saving presentation modes A to C), when the presentation pattern 70a, which is displayed in a variable manner in response to the normal pattern, is displayed with a result suggesting a favorable outcome for the player (a winning result), it is possible to display the third special pattern TZ3, which is displayed in a variable manner in response to the normal pattern, with a result suggesting a favorable outcome for the player (a big winning result). Therefore, whether the player is looking at the presentation pattern 70a or the first special pattern TZ1, the player can understand that a favorable outcome has been achieved, which makes it possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in the time-saving game state (time-saving performance modes A to C), in the performance in which the performance pattern 70a and the third special pattern TZ3 are displayed in response to the winning display of the normal pattern, a specific notification performance (successful decision performance) in which a specific light-emitting part (first movable member 73a) emits light in a specific light color (rainbow) can be executed, while in the performance in which the first special pattern TZ1 is displayed in response to the jackpot winning display of the first special pattern, a specific notification performance (successful decision performance) in which a specific light-emitting part (first movable member 73a) emits light in a specific light color (rainbow) is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect in the time-saving game state in which the display of the normal pattern is important, and it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

In addition, in the time-saving game state (time-saving performance modes A to C), in the performance in which the performance pattern 70a and the third special pattern TZ3 are displayed in response to the winning display of the normal pattern, a specific notification performance (decision success performance) in which a specific movable member (first movable member 73a) operates in a specific operating mode can be executed, whereas in the performance in which the first special pattern TZ1 is displayed in response to the jackpot winning display of the first special pattern, a specific notification performance (decision success performance) in which a specific movable member (first movable member 73a) operates in a specific operating mode is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect in the time-saving game state in which the display of the normal pattern is important, and it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

In addition, in the time-saving game state (time-saving performance modes A to C), the performance in which the performance pattern 70a and the third special pattern TZ3 are displayed in response to the winning display of the normal pattern can execute a specific notification performance (decision success performance) in which a specific performance sound (a "cue, cue, cue" sound that suggests a favorable result to the player) is output, whereas the performance in which the first special pattern TZ1 is displayed in response to the jackpot winning display of the first special pattern does not execute a specific notification performance (decision success performance) in which a specific performance sound (a "cue, cue, cue" sound that suggests a favorable result to the player) is output. Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect in the time-saving game state in which the normal pattern display is important, and it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

In addition, in the time-saving game state (time-saving presentation modes A to C), the presentation in which the presentation pattern 70a and the third special pattern TZ3 are displayed in response to the normal pattern jackpot display can execute a specific notification presentation (successful decision presentation) in which a specific presentation image (effect image SED suggesting a favorable result to the player) is displayed on the image display device, whereas the presentation in which the first special pattern TZ1 is displayed in response to the first special pattern jackpot display does not execute a specific notification presentation (successful decision presentation) in which a specific presentation image (effect image SED suggesting a favorable result to the player) is displayed. Therefore, the presentation effect in the normal game state, in which the normal pattern display is important, can be improved, and the interest in the game can be increased.

In addition, in the time-saving game state (time-saving performance modes A to C), the performance pattern 70a that is displayed in a variable manner corresponding to the normal pattern is displayed in the same position as the performance pattern 70a that is displayed in a variable manner corresponding to the first special pattern in the normal game state (normal performance modes A to C). Therefore, the performance pattern can be displayed in a variable manner without any sense of incongruity between the normal game state and the time-saving game state, making the game more interesting.

If the game is in a customer waiting state at the start of the time-saving game state transitioned from the jackpot game, the background music corresponding to the presentation mode of the time-saving game state may be muted without being audibly output. In this case, when a game ball enters the normal map gate 44 from the customer waiting state, a normal map reservation memory is generated and a variable presentation is started, the background music corresponding to the presentation mode of the time-saving game state may be audibly output.

In addition, the warning effect is performed during the ending of the jackpot game, but it may be performed from the ending of the jackpot game until the time-saving game state begins, or it may be performed immediately after the start of the time-saving game state (during the first variable effect), or the warning effect may display a forgotten item warning image TG and a stuck item warning image NG in sequence (either may be displayed first).

In addition, when the first special symbol is displayed during the time-saving play state, a display effect is executed that displays the first special symbol TZ1 without displaying the display effect symbol 70a. Therefore, in the time-saving play state, where the display of the normal symbols is important, the player is not made aware that the display of the first special symbol is being displayed, which makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, when multiple performance symbols are temporarily stopped during the normal pattern variation performance during the time-saving play state, it is possible to perform a performance operation on the background image, and when multiple performance symbols that are performing a performance operation are temporarily stopped and a specific number (e.g., three) of normal pattern reserved icons that is two more than a predetermined number (e.g., one) are displayed, if a state (missing) occurs in which multiple commands (normal pattern pattern determination command, normal pattern variation display start command (normal pattern reserved number designation command, normal pattern designation command, normal pattern variation pattern designation command, etc.) transmitted from the main control board 110 cannot be received normally, and then a normal pattern variation performance (variation performance involving the display of the performance pattern 70a and the third special pattern variation) is started, and a number of normal pattern reserved icons that is one less than the specific number (e.g., three) is displayed, and then the specified number (e.g., one) of normal pattern reserved icons is displayed.

(Example 1 of a performance after a favorable result is announced to the player during a time-saving game state)
Using Figure 73, we will explain example 1 of the presentation (when the stock chance presentation is not executed) after a favorable result is notified to the player through the normal chart change presentation during the time-saving game state.

As shown in FIG. 73(a), after the successful winning effect is executed in the normal symbol variation effect, when the normal symbol variation time has elapsed and the winning normal symbol is displayed, the effect symbol 70a and the third special symbol TZ3 temporarily stop at the winning number ("555"), and the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

After that, when the auxiliary game is started in which the second starting hole 47 opens in a long opening pattern, as shown in FIG. 73(b), a third right-hit image MG3 is displayed to encourage the player to shoot the game ball at the second starting hole 47, and a limit notification is started according to the remaining period of the auxiliary game (the remaining time in which the game ball can enter the second starting hole 47). Specifically, a count image CG is displayed in the upper left corner of the first image display device 70, and the display size expands as the time passes, while counting down.

When the game ball enters the second starting hole 47, as shown in FIG. 73(c), the second reserved memory (U2) is incremented by 1 and the number in the second reserved number display area 70F increases from "0" to "1". In addition, a special winning sound ("bakkuun"), which is a type of pre-reading effect, is output and an advantageous state acquisition effect is executed, indicating that the player is in an advantageous state. Specifically, a text image of "BONUS" is displayed, indicating that the player is in an advantageous state, without using a text image of a small win or a big win.

If the result of the pre-reading judgment of the special chart judgment information obtained when the gaming ball enters the second starting hole 47 is a big win or a small win, the same special winning sound is output, and if it is a miss, the special winning sound is not output. However, if the special chart judgment information obtained when the gaming ball enters the second starting hole 47 is not judged to be a miss but is judged to be a big win or a small win, the special winning sound may be output always when the gaming ball enters the second starting hole 47.

Next, when the display of the second special symbol (ultra-short display) which results in a small win starts before the auxiliary game ends, the display of the second special symbol TZ2 starts without the display of the display symbol 70a changing while continuing the big win suggestion display, as shown in FIG. 73(d). Then, when the display time of the second special symbol has elapsed and the small win special symbol is stopped, the display of the second special symbol TZ2 stops with the small win result ("5V5"), as shown in FIG. 73(e).

After that, when the opening of the small win game starts, as shown in FIG. 73(f), the opening performance starts and a second right hit notification (display of second right hit image MG2 and output of "right hit" sound) is executed to encourage the player to shoot the game ball to the right side of the game area 5a. Then, when the round game of the small win game starts, as shown in FIG. 73(g), the round performance starts and the display of the total number of balls paid out during the series of advantageous periods is updated each time a game ball enters the large prize opening.

Here, if the game ball that entered the first large prize opening 50 during a small prize game passes through the specific area 53, the game will become a large prize game with the small prize game being the first round, and when the first round of the small prize game ends, the second round will start and the round performance will continue. Note that when transitioning from a small prize game to a large prize game, the ending performance of the small prize game will not be executed.

On the other hand, if a game ball does not enter the first large prize opening 50 during a small prize game, or if a game ball that has entered the first large prize opening does not pass through the specific area 53 and the first large prize opening 50 is closed, as shown in FIG. 73(h), a disappointment notification effect is executed during the ending period of the small prize game to notify the player that the game ball did not pass through the specific area 53. Specifically, a door image is displayed to close, notifying the player that the small prize game has ended and that the game did not move on to the large prize game.

Then, when the ending of the small win game is completed, as shown in FIG. 73(i), the door image SY is erased, the display of the performance pattern 70a and the first hold icon display area 70B resumes, and the normal (mode A) background image is displayed.

In this way, when the game ball enters the second starting hole 47, that is, before the variable display of the second special symbol based on the special symbol determination information acquired at this time begins, a special winning sound ("bump"), which is a type of pre-reading effect, is output, and an advantageous state acquisition effect (BONUS display) is executed, indicating that the player will be in an advantageous state. This makes it possible to impress upon the player that winning the game ball in the second starting hole 47 during the time-saving game state is advantageous to the player, making it possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

In addition, if any one of a number of termination conditions is met during the time-saving game state (second game state), the time-saving game state can be terminated, and if the third termination condition among the multiple termination conditions is met (remaining number of time-saving small wins = 0) and the time-saving game state ends, the execution of a specific display (result display) showing the results of the game during the series of advantageous periods is restricted. Therefore, by restricting a playing method in which the game ball does not pass through the specific area 53 during a small win game and instead aims for a big win game or a small win game that may be advantageous, a fair game can be provided to the player, and the interest of the game can be increased.

In addition, the player is more likely to achieve a favorable result when a look-ahead effect related to the second reserved memory (U2) (output of a special winning sound ("bump"), advantageous state acquisition effect indicating an advantageous state for the player, etc.) is executed than when a look-ahead effect related to the normal reserved memory (F) (icon change effect, light emission effect when winning) is executed during the time-saving play state (second play state). Therefore, it is possible to effectively increase the player's expectations when a look-ahead effect related to the second reserved memory (U2) is executed, making it possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

In addition, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in a specific variable pattern (ultra-shortened variable) during the time-saving game state (second game state), a variable display (game display) is executed with the variable display of the second special symbol TZ2 without the variable display of the performance symbol 70a. This makes it difficult for the player to be aware that the variable display of the second special symbol has been executed, and gives the impression that a small win game or a big win game has started immediately after the auxiliary game has been executed, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

(Example 2 of a performance after a favorable result is announced to the player during a time-saving game state)
Using Figures 74 and 75, we will explain example 2 of the presentation (when the stock chance presentation is not executed) after a favorable result is notified to the player through the normal chart change presentation during the time-saving game state.

First, after the successful winning effect is executed in the normal symbol variation effect, when the normal symbol variation time has elapsed and the winning normal symbol is displayed, the effect symbol 70a and the third special symbol TZ3 temporarily stop at the winning number ("555"), and the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

After that, when the auxiliary game is started in which the second starting hole 47 opens in a long opening pattern, as shown in FIG. 74(a), a third right-hit image MG3 is displayed to encourage the player to shoot the game ball at the second starting hole 47, and a limit notification is started according to the remaining period of the auxiliary game (the remaining time in which the game ball can enter the second starting hole 47). Specifically, a count image CG is displayed in the upper left corner of the first image display device 70, and the display size expands as the time passes while counting down.

When the game ball enters the second starting hole 47, as shown in FIG. 74(b), the second reserved memory (U2) increases by 1 and the number in the second reserved number display area 70F increases from "0" to "1". In addition, a special winning sound ("Bakkuun"), which is a type of pre-reading effect, is output and an advantageous state acquisition effect is executed, indicating that the player is in an advantageous state. Specifically, a text image of "BONUS" is displayed, indicating that the player is in an advantageous state, without using a text image of a small win or a big win.

Next, when the display of the second special symbol (here, short stock chance display) that will result in a small win begins before the auxiliary game ends, as shown in FIG. 74(c), a stock chance display begins in which the second special symbol TZ2 is displayed without the display of the display symbol 70a changing while continuing the advantageous state acquisition display. After that, as shown in FIG. 74(d), a text image saying "BONUS Stock + Stock Chance Entry" is displayed, indicating that a state advantageous to the player (small win or big win) has been stocked, and that a stock chance is being entered in which there is a possibility of stocking the second reserved memory (U2) that will almost certainly result in the player obtaining an advantageous state.

After that, when the stock chance presentation starts with the start of the ending of the auxiliary game, as shown in FIG. 74(e), a stock notification image of "V x 1" is displayed, indicating that there is one BONUS stock, and a stock chance background image is displayed. In addition, a presentation pattern 70a smaller than the normal size is displayed, and the icon display area 70C and a normal reserve icon display area 70D are displayed, in which the number of reserve icons according to the normal reserve memory (F) are displayed.

Then, when the ending period of the auxiliary game ends and the missing normal symbol variable display starts, as shown in FIG. 74(f), the variable display of the performance symbol 70a and the third special symbol TZ3 starts, the number in the normal symbol reserved number display area 70G decreases from "4" to "3", and the four reserved icons HI displayed in the normal symbol reserved icon display area 70D shift toward the icon display area 70C, and one is displayed as the icon TI. At this time, since the stock chance display is in progress, the remaining number image KG indicating the remaining number of time-saving normal symbols is not displayed.

Next, when the normal symbol variation time has elapsed and the losing normal symbol is stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG. 74(g), the performance symbol 70a and the third special symbol TZ3 are stopped and displayed with a losing result ("892"), and the icon TI displayed in the icon display area is erased. Also, when one game ball enters the normal symbol gate 44 and the normal symbol reserved memory (F) increases from "3" to "4", the number in the normal symbol reserved number display area 70G increases from "3" to "4", and one white icon (reserved icon) is additionally displayed in the normal symbol reserved icon display area 70D.

In addition, when the display of the normal symbol's missing variation starts, as shown in FIG. 74(h), the display of the effect symbol 70a and the third special symbol TZ3 variation starts, the number in the normal symbol hold number display area 70G decreases from "4" to "3", and the four hold icons HI displayed in the normal symbol hold icon display area 70D shift toward the icon display area 70C, and one is displayed as the icon TI.

Next, when the normal symbol variation time has elapsed and the losing normal symbol is stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG. 74(i), the performance symbol 70a and the third special symbol TZ3 are stopped and displayed with a losing result ("158"), and the icon TI displayed in the icon display area is erased. Also, when one game ball enters the normal symbol gate 44 and the normal symbol reserved memory (F) increases from "3" to "4", the number in the normal symbol reserved number display area 70G increases from "3" to "4", and one white icon (reserved icon) is additionally displayed in the normal symbol reserved icon display area 70D.

Then, when the winning normal symbol variation display starts, as shown in FIG. 74(j), the variation display of the performance symbol 70a and the third special symbol TZ3 starts, the number in the normal symbol reservation number display area 70G decreases from "4" to "3", and the four reservation icons HI displayed in the normal symbol reservation icon display area 70D shift toward the icon display area 70C, and one is displayed as the icon TI.

Next, when the normal symbol variation time has elapsed and the winning normal symbol is displayed, as shown in FIG. 75(k), the performance symbol 70a and the third special symbol TZ3 are displayed as winning numbers ("111"), and the icon TI displayed in the icon display area is erased. In addition, an auxiliary game is started in which the second starting hole 47 is opened in a long opening pattern.

After that, after the auxiliary game is started in which the second starting hole 47 opens in a long opening pattern, when one game ball enters the second starting hole 47 and the second reserved memory increases from "0" to "1", as shown in FIG. 75(l), the number in the second reserved number display area 70F increases from "0" to "1", and a stock increase effect is executed, indicating that a state advantageous to the player (small win or big win) has been stocked. Specifically, a text image of "Stock +1" is displayed, and the stock notification image is updated to "V x 2".

Then, when the auxiliary play ends and the display of the normal symbol's missing variation starts, as shown in FIG. 75(m), the display of the effect symbol 70a and the third special symbol TZ3 variation starts, the number in the normal symbol reservation number display area 70G decreases from "4" to "3", and the four reservation icons HI displayed in the normal symbol reservation icon display area 70D shift toward the icon display area 70C, and one of them is displayed as the icon TI.

When the normal symbol variation time has elapsed and the losing normal symbol is stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG. 75(n), the performance symbol 70a and the third special symbol TZ3 are stopped and displayed with a losing result ("158"), and the icon TI displayed in the icon display area is erased. When one game ball enters the normal symbol gate 44 and the normal symbol reserved memory (F) increases from "3" to "4", the number in the normal symbol reserved number display area 70G increases from "3" to "4", and one white icon (reserved icon) is additionally displayed in the normal symbol reserved icon display area 70D.

After that, when the display of the normal pattern starts to change, as shown in FIG. 75(o), the display of the effect pattern 70a and the third special pattern TZ3 starts to change, the number in the normal pattern hold count display area 70G decreases from "4" to "3", and the four hold icons HI displayed in the normal pattern hold icon display area 70D shift toward the icon display area 70C, and one of them is displayed as the icon TI.

Next, when it is a predetermined time before the end of the stock chance effect, as shown in FIG. 75(p), the display of the effect pattern 70a is terminated midway, and an end suggestion effect is started to suggest the end of the stock chance, and a text image saying "Stock chance end" is displayed. Then, when the time for the normal pattern to change has elapsed during the end suggestion effect, as shown in FIG. 75(q), the third special pattern TZ3 is displayed stopped with a losing result ("142").

After that, when the time for the second special symbol to change has elapsed and the small win special symbol has stopped, as shown in FIG. 75(r), the second special symbol TZ2 stops at the small win number ("3V3"), a stock release effect is executed, indicating that the stocked state (here, a small win game) that is advantageous to the player will be released, and a text image saying "BONUS release" is displayed.

When the opening of the small win game starts, as shown in FIG. 75(s), the opening performance starts and a second right-hit notification (display of second right-hit image MG2 and output of "right hit" sound) is executed to encourage the player to shoot the game ball to the right side of the game area 5a. When the round game of the small win game starts, as shown in FIG. 75(t), the round performance starts and the display of the total number of balls paid out during the series of advantageous periods is updated each time a game ball enters the large prize opening.

In this way, when the execution period of the variable display of the second special symbol (first variable display) and the execution period of the variable display of the normal symbol (second variable display) overlap at least partially during the time-saving game state (second game state), the game presentation corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol (stock chance presentation) and the game presentation corresponding to the variable display of the normal symbol (variable presentation of presentation symbol) can each be executed (can be executed in parallel). This makes it possible to improve the presentation effect during the time-saving game state, making it possible to increase the interest in the game.

In addition, in the time-saving game mode, during the game presentation (stock chance presentation) corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol, it is possible to execute multiple game presentations (failed acquisition presentation, successful acquisition presentation) corresponding to the variable display of the normal symbol. This effectively conveys to the player that there are multiple chances for a favorable result, making it possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

In addition, when any of a plurality of termination conditions is satisfied during the time-saving game state (second game state), the time-saving game state can be terminated. When the first termination condition for terminating the time-saving game state is satisfied (remaining number of time-saving normal patterns = 0) and the time-saving game state is terminated, the variable performance (game performance) in which the performance pattern 70a and the third special pattern TZ are displayed in a variable manner in response to the variable display of the normal pattern is not terminated midway. However, when the second termination condition for terminating the time-saving game state is satisfied (remaining number of time-saving special patterns = 0) and the time-saving game state is terminated, the variable performance (game performance) in which the performance pattern 70a and the third special pattern TZ are displayed in a variable manner in response to the variable display of the normal pattern can be terminated midway (the performance pattern 70a is not displayed). Therefore, when the second termination condition is satisfied (remaining number of time-saving special patterns = 0), the time-saving game state can be terminated in a novel manner, which can improve the interest of the game.

In addition, after starting a variable effect (game effect) in which the performance pattern 70a and the third special pattern TZ3 are variably displayed in response to the variable display of the normal pattern in the time-saving game state (second game state), if a first end condition for terminating the time-saving game state is established (remaining number of time-saving normal patterns = 0), the variable effect (game effect) in which the performance pattern 70a and the third special pattern TZ3 are variably displayed can be terminated in the first period (elapsed time of normal pattern variation), whereas, after starting a variable effect (game effect) in which the performance pattern 70a and the third special pattern TZ3 are variably displayed in response to the variable display of the normal pattern in the time-saving game state (second game state), if a second end condition for terminating the time-saving game state is established (remaining number of time-saving special patterns = 0), the variable effect (game effect) in which the performance pattern 70a and the third special pattern TZ3 are variably displayed can be terminated in the second period (elapsed time of special pattern variation). This allows the presentation at the end of the time-saving game state to be different depending on whether the first end condition is met or the second end condition is met, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, in the time-saving game state (time-saving presentation modes A to C), when a presentation in which presentation pattern 70a and third special pattern TZ3 are displayed in a variable manner in response to a winning variable display of the normal pattern during the variable display of the second special pattern is executed, the presentation pattern 70a and third special pattern TZ3 displayed in a variable manner in response to a winning variable display of the normal pattern during the variable display of the second special pattern will result in a number that suggests a favorable result for the player, making it possible to notify the player of a favorable result. Therefore, even during the variable display of the second special pattern, it is possible to make the player easily aware that the variable display of the normal pattern is a result favorable to the player, making it possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in the time-saving game state (time-saving presentation modes A to C), when a variable presentation is executed in which the presentation pattern 70a and the third special pattern TZ3 are displayed in a variable manner in response to the winning variable presentation of the normal pattern while the second special pattern is being displayed in a variable manner, the presentation pattern 70a becomes invisible after a number showing a result that is favorable to the player (while the BONUS is being displayed), but the third special pattern TZ3 continues to display a number showing a result that is favorable to the player. Therefore, by making the presentation pattern 70a invisible, a wide display area for the presentation can be secured, and the third special pattern TZ3 can confirm that the result is favorable to the player, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, in the time-saving game state (time-saving presentation modes A to C), when a variation presentation is executed in which the presentation pattern 70a and the third special pattern TZ3 are displayed in a variable manner in response to the winning variation presentation of the normal pattern while the second special pattern is being displayed in a variable manner, it is possible to execute a special presentation (stock chance presentation) that suggests to the player that a favorable state is waiting for them. This makes it possible to improve the presentation effect in the time-saving game state and increase the interest of the game.

The stock chance presentation may be configured, for example, with two presentation modes (first stock mode, second stock mode), and in the first stock mode, a specific presentation (a presentation that notifies the number of stocks, such as a stock increase presentation) is executed while the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and in the second stock mode, a specific presentation (a presentation that notifies the number of stocks, such as a stock increase presentation) is executed while the second special symbol is displayed in a stopped state.

In addition, if a winning fluctuation display of a normal pattern (a fluctuation display in which an auxiliary game in which the second starting hole 47 is opened in a long opening pattern is executed) is started before the start of the stock chance performance, and this winning fluctuation display ends during the stock chance performance, a specific performance corresponding to this winning fluctuation display (a performance that notifies the number of stocks, such as a stock increase performance) may be executed during the stock chance performance.

In addition, if a winning fluctuation display of a normal pattern (a fluctuation display in which an auxiliary game in which the second starting hole 47 is opened in a long opening pattern is executed) is started while a stock chance presentation is being executed, a specific presentation (a presentation that notifies the number of stocks, such as a stock increase presentation) corresponding to this winning fluctuation display is not executed, but if a winning fluctuation display of a normal pattern (a fluctuation display in which an auxiliary game in which the second starting hole 47 is opened in a long opening pattern is executed) is started while a stock chance presentation is being executed and this winning fluctuation display ends after the stock chance presentation ends, a specific presentation (a presentation that notifies the number of stocks, such as a stock increase presentation) corresponding to this winning fluctuation display may be executed.

In addition, although no effect is performed to indicate the remaining time of the stock chance effect, a countdown effect (remaining time announcement effect) may be executed to indicate the remaining time of the stock chance effect.

(Example of a result display when the time-saving game mode ends)
Using Figure 76, we will explain an example of a presentation in which a result display (a display showing the results of play during a series of advantageous periods) is performed when the time-saving play state ends.

As shown in FIG. 76(a), when the time for changing the losing normal pattern has elapsed and the losing normal pattern is displayed as having two remaining times for the time-saving normal pattern, the performance pattern 70a and the third special pattern TZ3 temporarily stop at the losing number ("561"), and the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased. At this time, the remaining number image KG shows "2 times remaining."

When the normal pattern miss variation display starts with only one time remaining for the time-saving normal pattern, as shown in FIG. 76(b), the variation display of the performance pattern 70a and the third special pattern TZ3 starts, the number in the normal pattern reserved number display area 70G decreases from "4" to "3", and the four reserved icons HI displayed in the normal pattern reserved icon display area 70D shift toward the icon display area 70C, with one icon being displayed as the icon TI. Also, the remaining number image KG changes from "2 times remaining" to "1 time remaining".

After that, when one game ball enters the normal map gate 44 and the normal map reserve memory (F) increases from "3" to "4", the number in the normal map reserve number display area 70G increases from "3" to "4", and one white icon (reserve icon) is additionally displayed in the normal map reserve icon display area 70D.

Next, when the normal symbol variation time has elapsed and the losing normal symbol is stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG. 76(c), the performance symbol 70a and the third special symbol TZ3 are stopped and displayed with the losing result ("134"). Also, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

When the normal symbol miss variation display starts, which indicates that the remaining number of times for the time-saving normal symbol is 0, the time-saving game state ends, and as shown in FIG. 76(d), the variation display of the performance symbol 70a and the third special symbol TZ3 starts, the number in the normal symbol reserved number display area 70G decreases from "4" to "3", and the four reserved icons HI displayed in the normal symbol reserved icon display area 70D shift toward the icon display area 70C, with one icon being displayed as the icon TI. Also, the remaining number of times image KG changes from "1 time remaining" to "0 times remaining".

Then, when a predetermined period of time (e.g., 2 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation, as shown in FIG. 76(e), a shutter image is displayed to close, indicating the end of the time-saving game state, and the background image during the time-saving game (mode A), the performance pattern 70a, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C, and the regular reserve icon HI displayed in the regular reserve icon display area 70D gradually become invisible.

When the shutter image is completely closed, a result display is displayed showing the results of the game during the consecutive advantageous periods, as shown in FIG. 76(f). Specifically, the text images "1 win" indicating the number of jackpot games and "750 pt" indicating the number of prize balls paid out are displayed. When the variation time has elapsed, the third special symbol TZ3 is displayed as a losing number ("537") while the performance symbol 70a remains hidden.

Next, when the normal symbol starts to change and display a missing number, as shown in FIG. 76(g), the third special symbol TZ3 starts to change and display a missing number without the effect symbol 70a changing, and the number in the normal symbol reservation number display area 70G decreases from "3" to "2". However, at this time, the first reservation memory (U1) does not exist and the machine is in a waiting state for customers, so the result display continues. Then, when the normal symbol change time has passed and the missing normal symbol is displayed, the third special symbol TZ3 stops and displays a missing number ("748"), as shown in FIG. 76(h).

After that, when the game ball enters the first starting hole 45, as shown in FIG. 76(i), the result display ends, the display of the effect pattern 70a and the first reserved icon display area 70B resumes, a white reserved icon is displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B, and the normal (mode A) background image is displayed. Then, when the variable display (variable display) of the first special pattern starts, as shown in FIG. 76(j), the variable display of the effect pattern 70a and the first special pattern TZ1 starts, the number in the first reserved number display area 70E decreases from "1" to "0", and one reserved icon HI displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B shifts toward the icon display area 70C and is displayed as the icon TI.

In this way, if any one of a number of ending conditions is met during the time-saving game state (second game state), the time-saving game state can be ended, and if the first ending condition of the multiple ending conditions is met (remaining number of time-saving normal plays = 0) and the time-saving game state ends, it is possible to execute a specific display (result display) showing the results of play during the series of advantageous periods. Therefore, when the time-saving game state ends, the results of play during the series of advantageous periods can be confirmed, making it possible to increase interest in the game.

In addition, during the special display (result display) that is executed when the time-saving play state ends, it is possible to execute a variable display of the normal pattern (variable effect in which the third special pattern TZ3 is displayed without a variable display of the effect pattern 70a) that corresponds to the normal pattern reserved memory (F) stored during the time-saving play state. This makes it possible to prevent the player from being aware that a variable display of the normal pattern, which is less favorable than the time-saving play state, is being executed, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, after a specific display (result display) showing the results of a game during a series of advantageous periods has been executed, the specific display (result display) will not end even if a new variable display of a normal symbol is executed, but will end when a new variable display of a first special symbol is executed. This prevents the specific display (result display) from ending too soon and making it impossible for the player to check, making the game more interesting.

In addition, when a hit determination based on the ordinary reserved memory (F) stored during the time-saving play state (second play state) is executed during the time-saving play state, a variable performance (game performance) accompanied by a variable display of the performance pattern 70a and the third special pattern TZ3 can be executed, whereas when a hit determination based on the ordinary reserved memory (F) stored during the time-saving play state (second play state) is executed during the normal play state (first play state) after the time-saving play state ends, the execution of a variable performance (game performance) accompanied by a variable display of the performance pattern 70a and the third special pattern TZ3 is restricted (a variable performance in which the third special pattern TZ3 is variably displayed without the variable display of the performance pattern 70a is executed). Therefore, it is possible to make the player less aware that a variable display of the ordinary pattern is executed in the normal play state after the time-saving play state ends, which makes it possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, even if the first of the multiple ending conditions is met (remaining number of time-saving normal drawings = 0) and the time-saving game state ends, if the time-saving game state is a third time-saving game state to which a transition occurs without going through a jackpot game, a specific display (result display) showing the results of play during the series of advantageous periods may not be executed, regardless of which of the multiple ending conditions (remaining number of time-saving normal drawings = 0, remaining number of time-saving special drawings = 0, remaining number of time-saving small jackpots = 0) is met and the time-saving game state ends.

(Example of a display where the result is not displayed when the time-saving game mode ends)
Using Figure 77, we will explain an example of a presentation in which the result display (a display showing the results of play during a series of advantageous periods) is not performed when the time-saving play state ends.

When the ending time of the jackpot game has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 77(a), the remaining number of times for the time-saving normal game (G) is set to 50 times, the first reserved memory (U1) is "1" and the second reserved memory (U2) is "0" and the first time-saving game state begins, and the background image during time-saving (Mode A), the first right-hit image MG1 that prompts the player to shoot the game ball to the right side of the game area 5a, and the remaining number image KG that indicates the remaining number of times for the time-saving normal game (G) are displayed as "50 remaining."

At this time, the first reserved memory (U1) is "1", the second reserved memory (U2) and the normal reserved memory (F) are "0", and the normal symbol miss variable display is being executed, but because it was started during a jackpot game, the third special symbol TZ3 is being displayed without the display of the performance symbol 70a.

When the first special symbol starts to change, as shown in FIG. 77(b), a change effect starts in which the first special symbol TZ1 changes without the change of the effect symbol 70a, and the number in the first reserved number display area 70E decreases from "1" to "0". However, since this is the change of the first special symbol, the remaining number image KG corresponding to the remaining number of times (G) of the time-saving normal symbol is not updated. Also, when the change time of the normal symbol has passed and the losing normal symbol is displayed, the effect symbol 70a maintains the stop number after the previous change display, and the third special symbol TZ3 stops with a losing number ("225").

When the time for the first special symbol to change has elapsed and the losing special symbol is displayed, the first special symbol TZ1 is displayed as a losing number ("156") as shown in FIG. 77(c). When the game ball enters the first starting hole 45, the first reserved memory (U1) increases from "0" to "1", and the first reserved number display area 70E increases from "0" to "1".

Then, the player continues to shoot left-handed, aiming at the left side of the play area 5a, and the ball enters the first starting hole 45 and the first special symbol changes display repeatedly. Then, when the first special symbol starts to change and the remaining number of times for the time-saving special symbol becomes "0", as shown in FIG. 77(d), a change display is executed in which the first special symbol TZ1 changes display without the change display of the performance symbol 70a, and the number in the first reserved number display area 70E decreases from "2" to "1", but the remaining number image KG corresponding to the remaining number of times for the time-saving normal symbol (G) is not updated because it is a change display of the first special symbol.

Next, when the time for the first special symbol to change has elapsed and the losing special symbol is displayed, as shown in FIG. 77(e), the first special symbol TZ1 is displayed as a losing number ("584"), and the time-saving game state ends and the normal game state is entered. However, at this point, no effect display corresponding to the normal game state (display of the effect symbol in a display mode corresponding to the normal game state, display of a background image corresponding to the normal game state, etc.) is executed.

After that, when the first command is received by the effect control board 130 after transitioning to the normal game mode, in this case when the first variable display of the first special symbol starts, as shown in FIG. 77(f), a mode transition image MI is displayed obscuring the effect symbol 70a, the first special symbol TZ1 starts to vary, and the number in the first reserved number display area 70E decreases from "1" to "0".

When the display time of the mode transition image MI has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 77(g), the mode transition image MI is erased and the effect display corresponding to the normal game state starts. Specifically, the normal (mode A) background image corresponding to the normal game state, the effect pattern 70a which is displayed in a variable manner corresponding to the normal game state, the first reserved icon display area 70B, and the icon display area 70C in which the icon TI corresponding to the first special pattern is displayed are displayed.

If a customer waiting state designation command is received at the timing of the first command reception by the presentation control board 130 after transitioning to the normal gaming state, this command will trigger the start of presentation display corresponding to the normal gaming state. In this case, the mode transition image MI may be displayed before the presentation display corresponding to the normal gaming state is started, or the presentation display corresponding to the normal gaming state may be started without displaying the mode transition image MI.

In this way, if any one of a number of ending conditions is met during the time-saving game state (second game state), the time-saving game state can be ended. If the first of the multiple ending conditions is met (remaining number of time-saving normal drawings = 0) and the time-saving game state ends, a specific display (result display) suggesting the results of play during the series of advantageous periods can be executed, whereas if the second of the multiple ending conditions is met (remaining number of time-saving special drawings = 0) and the time-saving game state ends, execution of a specific display (result display) showing the results of play during the series of advantageous periods is restricted. Therefore, when the time-saving game state ends, the results of play during the series of advantageous periods can be confirmed, making the game more interesting.

In addition, when a game ball enters the first start hole 45 and the first reserved memory (U1) increases, a winning command (first reserved number designation command, first special pattern pre-reading designation command) is sent from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130. However, when a game ball enters the first start hole 45 during the time-saving play state and the first reserved memory (U1) increases, the number in the first reserved number display area 70E is increased and updated, but since the first reserved icon is not additionally displayed, the first reserved icon change performance is not executed. Therefore, in the time-saving play state in which the execution of the normal pattern change display is important, it is possible to make the player less aware that the game ball has entered the first start hole 45 or that the first special pattern change display is being executed, which makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 45 during the time-saving game state (second game state) (the first acquisition condition is met), the first performance display (for example, a look-ahead performance such as an icon change performance) according to the first command (look-ahead designation command) is limited, but the second performance display (display of the reserved number in the reserved icon display area or the reserved number display area) according to the second command (reserved number designation command) is executed, while when a game ball enters the normal map gate 44 during the time-saving game state (second game state) (the second acquisition condition is met), the first performance display (for example, a look-ahead performance such as an icon change performance) according to the first command (look-ahead designation command) and the second performance display (display of the reserved number in the reserved icon display area or the reserved number display area) according to the second command (reserved number designation command) are executed. Therefore, it is possible to make the performance different when the first acquisition condition is met and when the second acquisition condition is met in the time-saving game state, which makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

Second Embodiment
Hereinafter, the second embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described with reference to the drawings.
In addition, the second embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that, provided that the first reserved memory (U1) exists at the start of the time-saving game state, an auxiliary game is executed in which the second starting hole 47 is opened in a long opening pattern while accumulating the normal reserved memory (F) and the normal pattern changing display is executed multiple times until the remaining number of time-saving normal patterns (G), which is set to four, becomes "0," thereby executing a battle mode presentation that encourages the player to decide whether or not to stock (increase) the second reserved memory (U2), which is approximately a small win or a big win.Therefore, only the differences from the first embodiment will be described here.

(Special chart variation pattern determination table for time reduction in the second embodiment)
Figure 78 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a special chart variation pattern determination table for time reduction in the second embodiment.

As for the presentation content shown in the special chart change pattern determination table for time reduction shown in Figure 78 (a), "battle mode change" means that the above-mentioned battle mode presentation is performed.
"Stock release variation" means that a stock release variation presentation is performed to notify that a jackpot game via a small win game or a jackpot game not via a small win game will be executed while releasing (decreasing) the second reserved memory (U2) that was stocked (increased) during the battle mode presentation.

Regarding the stock release variation, if the battle mode is in progress, the stock release variation is executed, but if the battle mode is not in progress, after the variation of the performance pattern 70a and the second special pattern TZ2 starts, an instant win variation is executed in which the performance pattern 70a and the second special pattern TZ2, which are the winning numbers, stop and display without going through a reach.

(Game Status Setting Table in the Second Embodiment)
FIG. 78(b) is a diagram showing an example of a first game status setting table in the second embodiment, and FIG. 78(c) is a diagram showing an example of a second game status setting table in a modified example.

In the game state setting tables shown in Figures 78(b) and 78(c), the remaining number of times for the time-saving normal symbol display (G) is "5 times" in both cases (a number equivalent to the sum of one time of the normal symbol variable display executed first during the time-saving game state + four times stored as normal symbol reserved memory (F) during this normal symbol variable display), and the total time of the normal symbol variable display executed these "5 times" is shorter than the time of the first special symbol variable display executed in the time-saving game state. In other words, the five normal symbol variable displays executed in the time-saving game state are completed by the time the first special symbol variable display executed in the time-saving game state is completed.

In addition, by setting the upper limit of the normal reserved memory (F) to "3", which is less than the upper limit of the first reserved memory (U1) and the upper limit of the second reserved memory (U2), the remaining number of time-saving normal patterns (G) may be set to "4 times" (a number equivalent to the sum of one time of the normal pattern variable display that is first executed during the time-saving play state + three times stored as the normal reserved memory (F) during this normal pattern variable display).

(Winning determination table for normal symbols in the second embodiment)
Figure 78 (d) is a diagram showing an example of a winning determination table for normal patterns in the second embodiment.

In the hit determination table for normal symbols shown in FIG. 78(d), the number of remaining times (G) for time-saving normal symbols set in the first embodiment is smaller, so the probability of a hit being determined is higher than in the hit determination table for normal symbols in the first embodiment shown in FIG. 35(a).

(Normal pattern fluctuation determination table for time reduction in the second embodiment)
Figure 78 (e) is a diagram showing an example of a general map fluctuation pattern determination table for time reduction in the second embodiment.

In the time-saving regular pattern change pattern determination table shown in Figure 78 (e), the regular pattern change time is set so that during the change time (60 seconds) of the first special pattern change display executed in the time-saving game state, the regular pattern change display is executed five times until the remaining number of time-saving regular patterns (G) becomes "0".

As for the presentation content shown in the time-saving normal game pattern determination table shown in Figure 78 (e), "battle defeat variation" means that an ally character and an enemy character face off against each other, with the ally character ultimately being defeated, resulting in an unfavorable outcome for the player, in other words, a presentation is executed suggesting that the second reserved memory (U2) will not be stocked (increased) because the auxiliary game in which the second starting hole 47 opens in a long opening pattern is not executed.
"Battle victory fluctuation" means that an ally character faces off against an enemy character, with the ally character ultimately winning, resulting in an advantageous outcome for the player; in other words, an auxiliary game is played in which the second starting hole 47 opens in a long opening pattern, and a presentation is executed suggesting that there is a chance to stock (increase) the second reserved memory (U2).

(Example of a performance in battle mode)
Using Figures 79 and 80, an example of a presentation when a battle mode presentation is performed will be described.

As shown in FIG. 79(a), during the ending of a big win game, a time-saving effect is executed and an addiction warning image NG is displayed to warn against excessive addiction to the game. At this time, the normal symbol is displayed and a change effect is executed in which the third special symbol TZ3 is displayed without displaying the effect symbol 70a.

After that, when the ending time of the jackpot game has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 79(b), the remaining number of times for the time-saving normal game (G) is set to 5, the first reserved memory (U1) is "1" and the second reserved memory (U2) is "0", and the time-saving game state begins. Then, when the display of the first special symbol (battle mode display) begins, the display of the first special symbol TZ1 begins without the display of the display symbol 70a, and the number in the first reserved number display area 70E decreases from "1" to "0".

The battle mode presentation is then started, and the normal icon display areas FT1-FT5 for displaying icons corresponding to the five normal symbol variations (normal symbol determination information) during the time-saving play state are grayed out. In addition, the second right-hand hit notification (second right-hand hit image MG2) is displayed to the right of the play area 5a, encouraging the player to launch the game ball. Furthermore, the remaining time until the deciding presentation, which suggests the result of the first normal symbol variation display, is displayed as "7 seconds."

After that, when the game ball passes through the normal symbol gate 44 and the normal symbol reserved memory (F) increases from "0" to "1", as shown in FIG. 79(c), a performance is performed in which the normal symbol icon display section FT1 is displayed in color and is displayed as a white icon, which is a normal icon. Also, when the display of the normal symbol changes begins, a display of the third special symbol TZ3 changes without the display of the performance symbol 70a changes begins, and a countdown of the remaining time begins.

Then, when two game balls pass through the normal map gate 44, and the normal map reserved memory (F) increases from "0" to "2," as shown in FIG. 79(d), the normal map icon display section FT2 and the normal map icon display section FT3 are each displayed in color, and are displayed as normal white icons.

Furthermore, when two game balls pass through the normal map gate 44, and the normal map reserved memory (F) increases from "2" to "4," as shown in FIG. 79(e), the normal map icon display section FT4 and the normal map icon display section FT5 are displayed in color and are displayed as normal white icons. After the normal map reserved memory (F) reaches the upper limit of "4," an icon change lottery is held as a pre-reading effect each time a game ball passes through the normal map gate 44 (overflow of the normal map reserved memory), and if a lottery is won, an icon change effect is executed in which the color of one of the normal map icons changes, suggesting that the variable display of the normal pattern corresponding to the normal map reserved memory (F) may result in a favorable result for the player.

After that, when the remaining time until the deciding performance, which indicates the result of the normal map change display corresponding to the normal map icon displayed in the normal map icon display unit FT1, becomes "0", as shown in FIG. 79(f), the remaining time becomes "0 seconds", and when the deciding performance starts, as shown in FIG. 79(g), a text image saying "Let's go!" is displayed, and then, as shown in FIG. 79(h), a valid period occurs and the normal map icon in the normal map icon display unit FT1 changes to a button image and a gauge image, starting a promotion performance that encourages the operation of the performance button 17. At this time, the normal map icon display unit FT1 turns gray and the normal map icon is displayed as disappearing.

When the effect button 17 is operated or the valid period has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 79(i), the effect button image is erased and the failure effect begins. Then, as shown in FIG. 79(j), the word "Too bad" is displayed. When the normal pattern variation time has elapsed, the losing normal pattern is displayed as still, and the third special pattern TZ3 is displayed as a losing number ("417").

Furthermore, when the display of the normal symbols starts, as shown in FIG. 80(k), a battle display starts in which the third special symbol TZ3 is displayed without the display of the symbol 70a. Then, as shown in FIG. 80(l), a text image of "1ST BATTLE" is displayed and a battle display starts in which the ally character and enemy character battle each other.

After that, when the battle reaches its final stage, a deciding effect is started, and as shown in FIG. 80(m), the effective period begins and the normal map icon in the normal map icon display section FT2 changes to a button image and a gauge image, starting a promotion effect that encourages the operation of the effect button 17. At this time, the normal map icon display section FT1 turns gray and the normal map icon is displayed as disappearing.

When the effect button 17 is operated or the valid period has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 80(n), the effect of erasing the effect button image is performed and the failure effect is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 80(o), the word "Too bad" is displayed, and when the normal pattern change time has elapsed, the losing normal pattern is displayed as still, and the third special pattern TZ3 is displayed as a losing number ("562"). After that, the change display (battle change effect) of the normal patterns corresponding to the normal pattern icon display section FT3, the normal pattern icon display section FT4, and the normal pattern icon display section FT5 is executed in order.

Then, when the normal pattern corresponding to the normal pattern icon display section FT5 starts to change (battle change effect), the time-saving game state ends, and in the deciding effect for the final stage of the battle effect, if the effect button 17 is operated or the valid period has elapsed, an effect is performed in which the effect button image is erased and a decision failure effect starts, as shown in FIG. 80(p). Then, as shown in FIG. 80(q), an image of the word "Too bad" is displayed, and then, as shown in FIG. 80(r), the results for the series of advantageous periods are displayed.

Also, when the normal symbol variation time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 80(s), the losing normal symbol is displayed as still, and the third special symbol TZ3 is displayed as a losing result ("537"), and the result display continues. After that, when the first special symbol variation display starts, at the timing when the first command is received from the performance control board 130 after transitioning to the normal game state, in this case when the first first special symbol variation display starts, a mode transition image MI that blocks the performance symbol 70a is displayed, the first special symbol TZ1 begins to vary, and the number in the first reserved number display area 70E decreases from "1" to "0".

On the other hand, when a successful hit effect is executed, when the effect button 17 is operated or the valid period has elapsed, an effect is performed in which the ally character C2 launches a final attack on the enemy character C3. Then, as shown in FIG. 70(h), the first movable member 73a moves from the standby position to the effect position, and a "cue, cue" notification sound is output from the audio output device 9 (in this case, announcing a jackpot). After that, the effect progresses as shown in FIG. 73(a) to FIG. 73(g).

In this way, it is possible to execute a battle mode effect that is executed over the variable display of multiple normal symbols until the remaining number of time-saving normal symbols (G) becomes "0", provided that the first reserved memory (U1) exists at the start of the time-saving game state. Therefore, the time-saving game state can be shown as a series of effects, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, when the execution period of the variable display of the first special symbol (first variable display) and the execution period of the variable display of the normal symbol (second variable display) overlap at least partially during the time-saving game state (second game state), the game presentation corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol (battle mode presentation) and the game presentation corresponding to the variable display of the normal symbol (battle presentation) can each be executed (can be executed in parallel). This makes it possible to improve the presentation effect during the time-saving game state, and increase the interest in the game.

In addition, in the time-saving game mode, during a game presentation (battle mode presentation) corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol, a game presentation (battle presentation) corresponding to the variable display of the normal symbol can be executed multiple times. This effectively conveys to the player that there are multiple chances for a favorable result, making it possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

(Contents of the invention described in this embodiment)
◆Here, in conventional gaming machines, it is common to determine whether or not to execute a jackpot game advantageous to a player based on the determination information acquired based on the winning of a gaming medium in a starting area, and execute a game presentation according to the result of the determination. Among such gaming machines, there are some that control the game to a specific game state that is more advantageous to a player than the normal game state after the special game ends (for example, see JP2018-057968A). However, such gaming machines have a problem in that the interest of the game is low.

◆A first configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, comprising a first judgment means for judging judgment information (special chart judgment information) acquired based on the establishment of a first acquisition condition (ball entering a first starting hole), a first storage means for storing the judgment information (special chart judgment information) acquired based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition as a first reserved memory (first reserved memory), a second judgment means for judging judgment information (normal chart judgment information, special chart judgment information) acquired based on the establishment of a second acquisition condition (ball entering a normal chart gate, a second starting hole), a second storage means for storing the judgment information acquired based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition as a second reserved memory (normal chart reserved memory, second reserved memory), and a first gaming state (normal gaming state) and The game device includes a state control means capable of controlling the first game state to a second game state (time-saving game state) different from the first game state, and a presentation control means capable of executing a first game presentation (first variable presentation) according to the judgment result of the first judgment means and a second game presentation (normal game variable presentation, second variable presentation) according to the judgment result of the second judgment means, and the presentation control means is capable of displaying a first icon (first reserved icon) corresponding to the first reserved memory and a second icon (normal reserved icon, second reserved icon) corresponding to the second reserved memory, and during the first game state, the display of the second icon is restricted but the first icon can be displayed, and during the second game state, the display of the first icon is restricted but the second icon can be displayed. This makes it possible to increase the interest in the game.

◆A second configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, comprising a first judgment means for judging judgment information (special chart judgment information) acquired based on the establishment of a first acquisition condition (ball entering the first starting gate), a second judgment means for judging judgment information (normal chart judgment information, special chart judgment information) acquired based on the establishment of a second acquisition condition (ball entering the normal chart gate, second starting gate), a state control means capable of controlling between a first gaming state (normal gaming state) and a second gaming state (time-saving gaming state) different from the first gaming state, a first gaming presentation (first variable presentation) according to the judgment result of the first judgment means, and a second judgment means for controlling between a first gaming state (normal gaming state) and a second gaming state (time-saving gaming state) different from the first gaming state. The device is provided with a presentation control means capable of executing a second game presentation (normal variation presentation, second variation presentation) according to the result of the determination of the stage, and the presentation control means executes a first result suggestion presentation in the second game presentation when the second determination means determines a first determination result (opening of the second start port in a long opening pattern, big win, small win) different from a miss result during the second game state, while executing a second result suggestion presentation different from the first result suggestion presentation in the second game presentation when the second determination means determines a second determination result (opening of the second start port in a short opening pattern, etc.) different from the first determination result during the second game state. This makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

◆A third configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, comprising a first judgment means for judging judgment information (special pattern judgment information) acquired based on the establishment of a first acquisition condition (ball entering a first starting hole), a second judgment means for judging judgment information (normal pattern judgment information, special pattern judgment information) acquired based on the establishment of a second acquisition condition (ball entering a normal pattern gate, second starting hole), a state control means capable of controlling the first gaming state (normal gaming state) and a second gaming state (time-saving gaming state) different from the first gaming state, and a presentation control means for executing a variable presentation (first variable presentation, normal pattern variable presentation, second variable presentation) involving a variable display of multiple presentation patterns according to the judgment result of the first judgment means or the second judgment means, and the judgment result of the second judgment means includes a miss or a miss. The first judgment result (opening of the second start hole in a long opening pattern, big win, small win) different from the first judgment result, and the second judgment result (opening of the second start hole in a short opening pattern, special miss resulting in c time reduction) different from the first judgment result, when the second judgment means judges the first judgment result during the second game state, the performance control means stops and displays the multiple performance symbols in the first mode of stop results (win results, odd pattern alignment) in the variable performance, and when the second judgment means judges the second judgment result (opening of the second start hole in a short opening pattern, special miss resulting in c time reduction) during the second game state, the performance control means stops and displays the multiple performance symbols in the second mode of stop results (miss results, even pattern alignment) different from the first mode in the variable performance. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆A fourth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, comprising a first determination means for determining determination information (special pattern determination information) acquired based on the establishment of a first acquisition condition (ball entering the first starting hole), a first variable display execution means for executing a first variable display (variable display of a first special pattern) based on the determination result of the first determination means, a second determination means for determining determination information (normal pattern determination information, special pattern determination information) acquired based on the establishment of a second acquisition condition (ball entering the normal pattern gate, second starting hole), and a second variable display execution means for executing a first variable display (variable display of a first special pattern) based on the determination result of the second determination means. The game device includes a second variable display execution means for executing a variable display of a normal symbol and a variable display of a second special symbol, a state control means for controlling a first game state (normal game state) and a second game state (time-saving game state) different from the first game state, and a presentation control means for executing a first game presentation (first variable presentation) corresponding to the first variable display and a second game presentation (normal symbol variable presentation, second variable presentation) corresponding to the second variable display, and the presentation control means is capable of restricting the execution of the second game presentation during the first game state and executing the second game presentation during the second game state. This makes it possible to increase the interest in the game.

◆A fifth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, comprising a first determination means for determining determination information (special pattern determination information) acquired based on the establishment of a first acquisition condition (ball entering the first starting hole), a first variable display execution means for executing a first variable display (variable display of a first special pattern) based on the determination result of the first determination means, a second determination means for determining determination information (normal pattern determination information, special pattern determination information) acquired based on the establishment of a second acquisition condition (ball entering the normal gate, second starting hole), and a second variable display (variable display of a normal pattern) based on the determination result of the second determination means. The game device includes a second variable display execution means for executing a variable display of a first special symbol (a variable display of a second special symbol, a variable display of a second special symbol), a state control means for controlling a first game state (normal game state) and a second game state (time-saving game state) different from the first game state, and a presentation control means for executing a first game presentation (first variable presentation) corresponding to the first variable display and a second game presentation (normal symbol variable presentation, second variable presentation) corresponding to the second variable display, and the presentation control means is capable of executing the first game presentation and the second game presentation, respectively, when at least a part of the execution period of the first variable display and the execution period of the second variable display overlap during the second game state. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆A sixth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, comprising a first determination means for determining determination information (special pattern determination information) acquired based on the establishment of a first acquisition condition (ball entering the first starting hole), a first variable display execution means for executing a first variable display (variable display of a first special pattern) based on the determination result of the first determination means, a second determination means for determining determination information (normal pattern determination information, special pattern determination information) acquired based on the establishment of a second acquisition condition (normal pattern gate, ball entering the second starting hole), a second variable display execution means for executing a second variable display (variable display of a normal pattern, variable display of a second special pattern) based on the determination result of the second determination means, and The device includes a state control means capable of controlling a first game state (normal game state) and a second game state (time-saving game state) different from the first game state, and a presentation control means capable of executing a first game presentation (first presentation) corresponding to the first presentation and a second game presentation (normal presentation, second presentation) corresponding to the second presentation, and the state control means can end the second game state when the number of occurrences of a first game event (total number of special symbol changes, number of first special symbol changes, etc.) in the second game state becomes a first number, or the number of occurrences of a second game event different from the first game event (number of normal symbol changes, number of second special symbol changes, number of small wins) becomes a second number. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆A seventh configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, comprising a first judgment means for judging judgment information (special chart judgment information) acquired based on the establishment of a first acquisition condition (entry of a ball into a first starting hole), a first storage means for storing the judgment information (special chart judgment information) acquired based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition as a first reserved memory (first reserved memory), a second judgment means for judging judgment information (normal chart judgment information, special chart judgment information) acquired based on the establishment of a second acquisition condition (entry of a ball into a normal chart gate, a second starting hole), a second storage means for storing the judgment information acquired based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition as a second reserved memory (normal chart reserved memory, second reserved memory), a state control means capable of controlling between a first gaming state (normal gaming state) and a second gaming state (time-saving gaming state) different from the first gaming state, and The present invention is provided with a presentation control means capable of executing a first game presentation (first variable presentation) according to the judgment result of the first judgment means and a second game presentation (normal game presentation, second variable presentation) according to the judgment result of the second judgment means, and the state control means can end the second game state and control to the first game state when a predetermined end condition is met in the second game state (consumption of the remaining number of time-saving special games, consumption of the remaining number of time-saving normal games, consumption of the remaining number of time-saving small wins), and the presentation control means can execute the second game presentation when the judgment of the second judgment means based on the second reserved memory stored during the second game state is executed during the second game state, and when the judgment of the second judgment means based on the second reserved memory stored during the second game state is executed during the first game state after the end of the second game state, the execution of the second game presentation is restricted. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆An eighth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, comprising a first determination means for determining determination information (special pattern determination information) acquired based on the establishment of a first acquisition condition (ball entering the first starting hole), a first variable display execution means for executing a first variable display (variable display of a first special pattern) based on the determination result of the first determination means, a second determination means for determining determination information (normal pattern determination information, special pattern determination information) acquired based on the establishment of a second acquisition condition (normal pattern gate, ball entering the second starting hole), and a second variable display (variable display of a normal pattern, variable display of a second special pattern) based on the determination result of the second determination means. The game machine includes a second variable display execution means for displaying a first game state (normal game state) and a second game state (time-saving game state) different from the first game state, a state control means for controlling a first game state (normal game state) and a second game state (time-saving game state) different from the first game state, and a presentation control means for controlling presentations related to the game, and the presentation control means is capable of executing a predetermined preview presentation (jackpot preview presentation: pre-reach preview presentation, post-reach preview presentation) that suggests the judgment result of the second judgment means corresponding to the second variable display during the second variable display, and when the second variable display is executed during the first game state, the execution of the preview presentation is restricted, and when the second variable display is executed during the second game state, the preview presentation can be executed. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆A ninth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, comprising: an operable movable presentation means (first movable member 73a, second movable member 73b); a first judgment means for judging judgment information (special pattern judgment information) acquired based on the establishment of a first acquisition condition (ball entering the first starting hole); a first variable display execution means for executing a first variable display (variable display of a first special pattern) based on the judgment result of the first judgment means; a second judgment means for judging judgment information (normal pattern judgment information, special pattern judgment information) acquired based on the establishment of a second acquisition condition (ball entering the normal pattern gate, second starting hole); The game machine includes a second variable display execution means for executing two variable displays (variable display of normal symbols, variable display of second special symbols), a state control means capable of controlling a first game state (normal game state) and a second game state (time-saving game state) different from the first game state, and a performance control means capable of controlling performance related to the game, and the performance control means is capable of executing an action performance (preview action, successful decision action, etc.) that causes the movable performance means to operate in a predetermined manner during the second variable display, and when the second variable display is executed during the first game state, the execution of the action performance is restricted, and when the second variable display is executed during the second game state, the action performance can be executed. This makes it possible to increase the interest in the game.

◆The tenth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, comprising an operation means (effect button, effect lever, etc.) operable by a player, a first judgment means for judging judgment information (special pattern judgment information) acquired based on the establishment of a first acquisition condition (ball entering the first starting hole), a first variable display execution means for executing a first variable display (variable display of a first special pattern) based on the judgment result of the first judgment means, a second judgment means for judging judgment information (normal pattern judgment information, special pattern judgment information) acquired based on the establishment of a second acquisition condition (ball entering the normal pattern gate, second starting hole), and a second variable display execution means for executing a first variable display (variable display of a first special pattern) based on the judgment result of the second judgment means. The game device includes a second variable display execution means for executing a second variable display (variable display of normal symbols, variable display of second special symbols), a state control means for controlling a first game state (normal game state) and a second game state (time-saving game state) different from the first game state, and a performance control means for controlling a performance related to the game, and the performance control means is capable of executing a predetermined operation performance (preview performance, deciding performance, etc.) that causes the operating means to be operated during the second variable display, and when the second variable display is executed during the first game state, the execution of the operation performance is restricted, and when the second variable display is executed during the second game state, the operation performance can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆An eleventh configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, comprising a first judgment means for judging judgment information (special chart judgment information) acquired based on the establishment of a first acquisition condition (ball entering the first starting gate), a second judgment means for judging judgment information (normal chart judgment information, special chart judgment information) acquired based on the establishment of a second acquisition condition (ball entering the normal chart gate, second starting gate), a state control means capable of controlling the first gaming state (normal gaming state) and a second gaming state (time-saving gaming state) different from the first gaming state, and a control means for controlling the first judgment means or the second judgment means. and a presentation control means for executing a variable presentation (first variable presentation, normal variable presentation, second variable presentation) according to the result of the determination by the determination means, the presentation control means being capable of executing a specific presentation (re-draw presentation) that suggests whether the result is a first advantageous result or a second advantageous result, which have different degrees of advantage to the player, during the variable presentation that results in an advantageous result for the player, and the execution rate of the specific presentation differs between a case where the first determination means determines an advantageous result (jackpot) during the first game state and a case where the second determination means determines an advantageous result (win, jackpot) during the second game state. This makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

◆A twelfth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, comprising a first judgment means for judging judgment information (special chart judgment information) acquired based on the satisfaction of a first acquisition condition (ball entering the first starting hole), a first storage means for storing the judgment information (special chart judgment information) acquired based on the satisfaction of the first acquisition condition as a first reserved memory (first reserved memory), a second judgment means for judging judgment information (normal chart judgment information, special chart judgment information) acquired based on the satisfaction of a second acquisition condition (ball entering the normal chart gate, second starting hole), and a second storage means for storing the judgment information acquired based on the satisfaction of the second acquisition condition as a second reserved memory (normal chart reserve memory, second reserved memory); The game system includes a variable display execution means for executing a variable display (variable display of normal symbols, variable display of second special symbols) based on the judgment result of the second judgment means, a state control means capable of controlling a first game state (normal game state) and a second game state (time-saving game state) different from the first game state, and a performance control means capable of controlling a performance related to the game, and the performance control means is capable of executing a look-ahead performance (icon change performance, look-ahead continuous notice performance, etc.) that predicts the result of the variable display corresponding to the second reserved memory in advance, and when the variable display is executed during the first game state, the execution of the look-ahead performance is restricted, and when the variable display is executed during the second game state, the look-ahead performance can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆A thirteenth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, comprising a first determination means for determining determination information (special pattern determination information) acquired based on the establishment of a first acquisition condition (ball entering the first starting gate), a first variable display execution means for executing a first variable display (first variable display) based on the determination result of the first determination means, a second determination means for determining determination information acquired based on the establishment of a second acquisition condition (normal pattern gate, ball entering the second starting gate), a second variable display execution means for executing a second variable display (variable display of normal pattern, variable display of second special pattern) based on the determination result of the second determination means, and The game device includes a state control means capable of controlling a first game state (normal game state) and a second game state (time-saving game state) different from the first game state, and a presentation control means capable of controlling presentations related to the game, and the first variable display execution means is capable of switching a variable pattern table for determining the variable pattern of the first variable display when the number of times the first variable display is executed from the establishment of a predetermined condition (RWM clear, end of a big win game, end of a small win game, change in game state, etc.) reaches a predetermined number, and the second variable display execution means is limited in switching the variable pattern table for determining the variable pattern of the second variable display during the second game state. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆A fourteenth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, comprising a first determination means for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on determination information (special chart determination information) obtained by the entry of a gaming medium into a first starting area (entry into a special 2 starting gate), a second determination means for determining whether or not to execute an auxiliary game (winning game) that controls the first starting area to an open state based on determination information obtained by the entry of a gaming medium into a second starting area (entry into a normal chart gate), and a normal game state. and a state control means capable of controlling a specific game state (normal time reduction, normal power time reduction, special time reduction) different from the normal game state, and a presentation control means capable of controlling presentations related to the game, the specific game state includes a first specific game state (e.g., a first time reduction game state) and a second specific game state (e.g., a second time reduction game state, a third time reduction game state) different from the first specific game state, and the probability that the second starting area is controlled to an open state with a specific opening pattern (long opening pattern) differs between the first specific game state and the second specific game state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆A fifteenth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, comprising a first determination means for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on determination information (special chart determination information) obtained by the entry of a gaming medium into a first starting area (entry into a special 2 starting gate), a second determination means for determining whether or not to execute an auxiliary game (winning game) that controls the first starting area to an open state based on determination information obtained by the entry of a gaming medium into a second starting area (entry into a normal chart gate), and a normal game. The game machine includes a state control means capable of controlling the game state to a specific game state (time-saving game state) different from the normal game state, and a presentation control means capable of controlling presentations related to the game, and the specific game state includes a first specific game state (e.g., first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state) that goes through the special game, and a second specific game state (third time-saving game state) that does not go through the special game, and the first specific game state and the second specific game state have different probabilities that the second starting area is controlled to an open state with a specific opening pattern (long opening pattern). Therefore, it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

◆A sixteenth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine that is equipped with a main control means for controlling the progress of the game and a presentation control means for controlling presentations in response to commands from the main control means, and that is capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, the main control means comprising a first judgment means for judging judgment information (special pattern judgment information) acquired based on the establishment of a first acquisition condition (ball entering the first starting hole), a first variable display execution means for executing a first variable display (first variable display) based on the judgment result of the first judgment means, a second judgment means for judging judgment information acquired based on the establishment of a second acquisition condition (normal pattern gate, ball entering the second starting hole), a second variable display execution means for executing a second variable display (variable display of normal pattern, variable display of second special pattern) based on the judgment result of the second judgment means, and a state control means capable of controlling between a first game state (normal game state) and a second game state (time-saving game state) different from the first game state, The presentation control means is capable of executing a first game presentation (first variation presentation) according to the judgment result of the first judgment means and a second game presentation (normal pattern variation presentation, second variation presentation) according to the judgment result of the second judgment means. When the second variation display is executed during the first game state, a command related to the second variation display (normal pattern designation command, normal pattern variation pattern designation command, special pattern designation command for the second special pattern, special pattern variation pattern designation command for the second special pattern) is transmitted from the main control means to the presentation control means, but when the execution of the second variation display is restricted and the second variation display is executed during the second game state, a command related to the second variation display (normal pattern designation command, normal pattern variation pattern designation command, special pattern designation command for the second special pattern, special pattern variation pattern designation command for the second special pattern) is transmitted from the main control means to the presentation control means, and the second variation display is executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆A 17th configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine that is equipped with a main control means for controlling the progress of a game and a presentation control means for controlling presentations in response to commands from the main control means, and that is capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, in which the main control means comprises a first judgment means for judging judgment information (special pattern judgment information) acquired based on the establishment of a first acquisition condition (ball entering a first starting hole), a first variable display execution means for executing a first variable display (first variable display) based on the judgment result of the first judgment means, a second judgment means for judging judgment information acquired based on the establishment of a second acquisition condition (normal pattern gate, ball entering a second starting hole), a second variable display execution means for executing a second variable display (variable display of a normal pattern, variable display of a second special pattern) based on the judgment result of the second judgment means, and a first game state (normal game state) and a previous game state (normal game state). The state control means is capable of controlling the state to a second gaming state (time-saving gaming state) different from the first gaming state, and when the first acquisition condition is satisfied and when the second acquisition condition is satisfied, a first command (look-ahead designation command) and a second command (reserved number designation command) can be transmitted. The presentation control means is capable of executing a first presentation display (look-ahead presentation) in response to the first command and a second presentation display (reserved display) in response to the second command. When the first acquisition condition is satisfied during the first gaming state, the first presentation display in response to the first command and the second presentation display in response to the second command are executed, and when the second acquisition condition is satisfied during the first gaming state, the execution of the first presentation display in response to the first command is restricted, but the second presentation display in response to the second command is executed. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆An 18th configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine that is equipped with a main control means for controlling the progress of the game and a presentation control means for controlling presentations in response to commands from the main control means, and that is capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, in which the main control means comprises a first judgment means for judging judgment information (special pattern judgment information) acquired based on the establishment of a first acquisition condition (ball entering the first starting hole), a first variable display execution means for executing a first variable display (first variable display) based on the judgment result of the first judgment means, a second judgment means for judging judgment information acquired based on the establishment of a second acquisition condition (normal pattern gate, ball entering the second starting hole), a second variable display execution means for executing a second variable display (variable display of normal pattern, variable display of second special pattern) based on the judgment result of the second judgment means, and a first game state (normal game state) and a previous game state (normal game state). The state control means is capable of controlling the state to a second gaming state (time-saving gaming state) different from the first gaming state, and when the first acquisition condition is satisfied and when the second acquisition condition is satisfied, a first command (look-ahead designation command) and a second command (reserved number designation command) can be transmitted, and the presentation control means can execute a first presentation display (look-ahead presentation) in response to the first command and a second presentation display (reserved display) in response to the second command, and when the first acquisition condition is satisfied during the second gaming state, the execution of the first presentation display in response to the first command is restricted, but the second presentation display in response to the second command is executed, and when the second acquisition condition is satisfied during the second gaming state, the first presentation display in response to the first command and the second presentation display in response to the second command are executed. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆A 19th configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, comprising a first determination means for determining determination information (special symbol determination information) acquired based on the establishment of a first acquisition condition (ball entering a first starting hole), a first variable display execution means for executing a first variable display (variable display of a first special symbol) based on the determination result of the first determination means, a second determination means for determining determination information (normal symbol determination information, special symbol determination information) acquired based on the establishment of a second acquisition condition (normal symbol gate, ball entering a second starting hole), a second variable display execution means for executing a second variable display (variable display of a normal symbol, variable display of a second special symbol) based on the determination result of the second determination means, a state control means capable of controlling a first gaming state (normal gaming state) and a second gaming state (time-saving gaming state) different from the first gaming state, and a state control means for controlling the first variable display. The game device includes a presentation control means capable of executing a first game presentation (first variable presentation) corresponding to a dynamic display and a second game presentation (normal variable presentation, second variable presentation) corresponding to the second variable display, and the state control means is capable of ending the second game state when a first end condition is met (e.g., the number of remaining time-saving normal presentations = 0, etc.) in the second game state, or a second end condition different from the first end condition is met (e.g., the number of remaining time-saving special presentations = 0, the number of remaining time-saving small wins = 0, etc.), and the presentation control means is capable of ending the second game presentation in a first period if the first end condition is met after starting the second game presentation in the second game state, and ending the second game presentation in a second period different from the first period if the second end condition is met after starting the second game presentation in the second game state. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆A 20th configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, comprising a first determination means for determining determination information (special pattern determination information) acquired based on the establishment of a first acquisition condition (ball entering the first starting hole), a first variable display execution means for executing a first variable display (variable display of a first special pattern) based on the determination result of the first determination means, a second determination means for determining determination information (normal pattern determination information, special pattern determination information) acquired based on the establishment of a second acquisition condition (normal pattern gate, ball entering the second starting hole), a second variable display execution means for executing a second variable display (variable display of a normal pattern, variable display of a second special pattern) based on the determination result of the second determination means, and a first gaming state (normal gaming state) and a second gaming state (time-saving gaming state) different from the first gaming state. The game device includes a state control means and a presentation control means capable of executing a first game presentation (first presentation) corresponding to the first presentation and a second game presentation (normal presentation, second presentation) corresponding to the second presentation, and the state control means is capable of ending the second game state when a first end condition is met (e.g., the number of remaining times of the time-saving normal presentation = 0, etc.) in the second game state or a second end condition different from the first end condition is met (e.g., the number of remaining times of the time-saving special presentation = 0, the number of remaining times of the time-saving small win = 0, etc.), and the presentation control means is capable of executing a specific display (result display) when the second game state is ended by the establishment of the first end condition, and the execution of the specific display (result display) is restricted when the second game state is ended by the establishment of the second end condition. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆A 21st configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, comprising: a determination means for determining determination information (normal game determination information, special game determination information) acquired based on the establishment of an acquisition condition (entry into the normal game gate, the second starting hole); a variable display execution means for executing a variable display (variable display of normal game patterns, variable display of second special game patterns) based on the determination result of the determination means; and a state control means for controlling between a first game state (normal game state) and a second game state (time-saving game state) different from the first game state. and a presentation control means capable of controlling presentations related to the game, the presentation control means being capable of executing presentations during waiting for customers that appeal to players (such as a demonstration presentation of waiting for customers, display of an image guiding an operation for adjusting the volume or light intensity, etc.), and in the first game state, the presentation during waiting for customers can be executed when the variable display (variable display of normal symbols, variable display of second special symbols) is being executed, and in the second game state, execution of the presentation during waiting for customers is restricted when the variable display (variable display of normal symbols, variable display of second special symbols) is being executed. This makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, the display of the first special symbol and the display of the second special symbol are not executed simultaneously (in parallel), and the display of the second special symbol is executed with priority, but the display of the first special symbol and the display of the second special symbol may be executed in the order of the winning of the gaming balls into the first start hole 45 and the second start hole 47.

Also, the gaming machine may be one in which the display of the first special symbol and the display of the second special symbol are executed simultaneously (in parallel). In this case, the control related to the normal symbol of the present invention and the control related to the second special symbol may be switched. Specifically, in the normal gaming state, a change performance (game performance) is executed in which the second special symbol TZ2 is displayed without the display of the performance symbol 70a during the display of the second special symbol, and the reserved icon and the icon corresponding to the second reserved memory are not displayed, and in the time-saving gaming state, a change performance (game performance) is executed in which the display of the performance symbol 70a and the second special symbol TZ2 are displayed during the display of the second special symbol, and the reserved icon and the icon corresponding to the second reserved memory are displayed.

In addition, the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is configured not to generate a probability variable game state in which the probability of winning a jackpot is higher than in the normal game state after the end of a jackpot game, but a probability variable game state may be generated depending on the type of special jackpot pattern. In this case, a process may be performed to generate a probability variable game state on the condition that the game ball passes through a specific area 53 provided inside the first large prize opening 50 in a specific round of play during a jackpot game (for example, the second round of play or the final round of play), or a process may be performed to determine the number of variable displays that will result in a probability variable game state based on the game state when the game ball passes through the specific area 53.

The gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine, but can also be used in a reel-type gaming machine (so-called slot machine) that can award a predetermined amount of prize medals (prize medal data) to a player when a winning symbol is displayed stopped on an active line by playing with medals (gaming media) (satisfying the awarding conditions). Furthermore, it can also be used in a Jankyu gaming machine or an Arrange Ball gaming machine.

Furthermore, the embodiments disclosed herein should be considered to be illustrative and not restrictive in all respects. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims, not the above description, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope of the claims.

1 Gaming machine 5 Gaming board 44 Regular map gate 45 First start gate 47 Second start gate 50 First big prize gate 56 Second big prize gate 70 First image display device 71 Second image display device 110 Main control board 110a Main CPU
120 Payout control board 130 Performance control board 130a Sub-CPU

Claims (1)

In a gaming machine capable of executing a special game advantageous to a player,
An operation means operable by a player;
a first determination means for determining the acquired determination information based on the establishment of a first acquisition condition;
A first variable display execution means for executing a first variable display based on the judgment result of the first judgment means;
A second determination means for determining the acquired determination information based on the establishment of a second acquisition condition;
A second variable display execution means for executing a second variable display based on the judgment result of the second judgment means;
A state control means capable of controlling a first gaming state and a second gaming state different from the first gaming state;
A presentation control means for executing a first game presentation corresponding to the first variable display and a second game presentation corresponding to the second variable display,
The state control means includes:
When the number of occurrences of a first gaming event reaches a first number in the second gaming state, or the number of occurrences of a second gaming event different from the first gaming event reaches a second number in the second gaming state, the second gaming state can be ended;
During execution of the first game presentation and/or the second game presentation, it is possible to execute any one of a plurality of types of vibration presentations that vibrate the operation means in a predetermined manner;
During the first gaming state, the first gaming performance of a losing game in which the special game is not executed and the first gaming performance of a winning game in which the special game is executed can be executed, and execution of the second gaming performance is restricted;
During the second game state, the execution of the first game presentation of a losing game in which the special game is not executed is restricted, and the first game presentation of a winning game in which the special game is executed and the second game presentation are executable;
In the first game state, when the first variable display of a loss in which the special game is not executed is executed and the first game performance is executed, a predetermined vibration performance can be executed;
In the second game state, the first variable display is executed when the special game is not executed, but when the execution of the first game presentation is restricted, the execution of the specified vibration presentation is restricted.